6671 - Construction of G. Roland Vela Athletic Complex, 3.Statement of Work/ Specifications
CITY OF DENTON
215 East McKinney Street
Denton, Texas 76207
(817) 349-8200
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
PARK IMPROVEMENTS
AT
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex - Phase 1
November 15, 2017
Prepared by:
Dunaway Associates, LP
550 Bailey Avenue, Suite 400
Fort Worth, Texas 76107
(817) 335-1121
Dunaway Project No: B000399.001
00 00 00-1
SEALS PAGE
PAGE 1 OF 1
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 00 00 00
SEALS PAGE
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 1 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
------ Geotechnical Investigation (D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Job No. 16-0009)
01010 Summary of Work
01025 Measurement and Basis of Payment
01027 Application for Payment
01040 Coordination
01045 Cutting and Patching
01200 Project Meetings
01300 Administrative Submittals
01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Sample Submittals
01350 Progress Schedule
01440 Testing and Laboratory Control
01500 Construction Facilities
01605 Warranties and Maintenance
01610 Product Handling
01630 Product Options, Equal Materials and Substitutions
01705 Project Closeout
01710 Cleaning
01720 Project Record Documents
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02225 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities
02270 Erosion and Sediment Control
02308 Compost
02310 Laser Grading
02510 Site Water Distribution
02512 Concrete Vehicular Paving
02515 Concrete Walks
02580 Pavement Marking
02830 Chain Link Fencing
02930 Hydraulically Applied Seeding High Performance-Flexible Growth Medium
02938 Turf and Grasses
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 2 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork
03100-A Concrete Formwork
03100-S Concrete Formwork & Accessories
03200 Reinforcing Steel
03200-A Concrete Reinforcement
03200-S Concrete Reinforcement
03300-A Cast-in-Place Concrete - Architectural
03300-S Cast-in-Place Concrete - Structural
03310 Cast-In-Place Concrete - Sitework
03366 Integrally Colored and Stamped Concrete
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04100 Masonry Mortar
04100-A Mortar and Masonry Grout
04230 Structural Reinforced Unit Masonry
04300 Unit Masonry System
04300-A Unit Masonry
04720-A Cast Stone Masonry
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120-A Structural Steel
05120-S Structural Steel
05500 Miscellaneous Metals and Finishes
05500-A Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS
06110-A Rough Carpentry
06175-A Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 3 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07213-A Thermal Insulation
07410-A Preformed Metal Roofing
07530-A Elastomeric Membrane Roofing
07620-A Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07710-A Roof Specialties
07720-A Roof Accessories
07900-A Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08111-A Standard Steel Doors and Frames
08560-A Special Function Windows
08710-A Door Hardware
08920-A Louvers and Vents
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09670-A Fluid Applied Flooring
09700-A Special Wall Surfaces
09800-A High Performance Coatings
09900-A Painting
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10425-A Identifying Devices
10430 Site Signage
10800-A Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11510 Site Furnishings and Park Equipment
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 4 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - NOT USED
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15010-A General Requirements for Mechanical Work
15020-A Basic Materials and Methods
15070-A Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting for Pipe, Cables and Ducts
15110-A Valves
15120-A Pipe and Fittings
15250-A Insulation
15440-A Plumbing Fixtures
15480-A Domestic Water Heaters
15720-A Package Rooftop Units
15820-A Exhaust Fans
15830-A Low Velocity Metal Ductwork
15850-A Ductwork Accessories
15870-A Air Diffusers
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
16010 General Requirements for Electrical Work
16010-A Electrical General Provisions
16030-A Testing
16111 Raceways and Fittings
16111-A Conduit
16112 Surface raceways
16120 Wire and Cables
16120-A Wire and Cable
16130 Boxes
16130-A Boxes
16141 Wiring Devices
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 5 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
16141-A Wiring Devices
16160 Cabinets and Enclosures
16190-A Supporting Devices
16195 Electrical Identification
16195-A Electrical Identification
16402 Underground Electrical Service
16440-A Disconnect Switches
16450 Secondary Grounding
16461 Transformers
16470-A Panelboards
16471 Panelboards
16485 Contactors
16485-A Contactors
16491 Disconnect Switches
16503 Poles and Standards
16505-A Lighting Fixtures
16510 Lighting Fixtures – Site
CIVIL UTILITIES SPECIFICATIONS
The City of Denton as adopted the “Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 4th
Edition,” published by the North Central Texas Council of Governments, as its basic
construction specifications. Civil utilities and related work, including water, wastewater, storm
drainage and appurtenances (valves, fittings, blocking, embedment, backfill, manholes,
junctions, inlets, vaults, rehabilitation, connection, reconnection, and related work) shall be
governed by these specifications. This document is available and can be obtained from the
NCTCOG Regional Information Center, 616 Six Flags Drive, Suite 200, P.O. Box 5888,
Arlington, TX 76005-5888, ph. (817) 640-3300 or from http://www.nctcog.org . The following
sections shall apply as applicable:
DIVISION 500 UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION & APPURTENANCES
Item# Subject
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 6 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
501. Underground Conduit Materials
501.1. General
501.6. Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, Pipe and Box Section
501.7. Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
501.8. Ductile-Iron Pipe for Pipe Rehabilitation
501.14. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe
501.15. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
501.17. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Wastewater Pipe & Fittings with Dimension Control
501.18. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Profile Gravity Wastewater Pipe and Fittings For Direct
Bury and Slip-lining Applications
502. APPURTENANCES
502.1. Manholes
502.2. Wastewater Main Cleanouts
502.3. Fire Hydrants
502.4. Thrust Restraint
502.5. Fittings
502.6. Valves
502.7. Performed Flexible Conduit Joint Sealant
502.8. Polyethylene Wrap For Metal Pipe Fittings
502.9. Corrosion-Resistant Coatings and Liners for Wastewater Conduit
And Appurtenances
502.10. Connections To Conduit For Service
502.11. Miscellaneous Conduit Connections
502.12. Structures
504. OPEN CUT – BACKFILL
504.1. General
504.2. Materials
504.3. Excavation and Foundation
504.4. Backfill-General Requirements
504.5 Embedment
504.6. Final Backfill
505. OPENCUT-GENERALCONDUIT INSTALLATION
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 7 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
505.1. General
505.2. General Installation Requirements for Pipe Types
506. OPEN CUT WATER CONDUIT INSTALLATION
506.1. Description
506.2. Materials
506.3. Laying Water Conduit
506.4. Pipe Joints
506.5. Hydrostatic Test
506.6. Connections to Existing Water Conduits
506.7. Purging and Disinfection of Water Conduits
506.8. Plugs
507. OPEN CUT WASTEWATER CONDUIT INSTALLATION
507.1. Description
507.2. Materials
507.3. Laying Wastewater Conduit
507.4. Wastewater Conduit Joints
507.5. Test and Inspections
508. OPEN CUT STORM WATER CONDUIT INSTALLATION
508.1. Description
508.2. General
508.3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe for Storm Water
508.4. Corrugated Metal Pipe
508.5. Structural Plate Conduit
509. CROSSINGS
509.1. General
509.5. Creek and River Crossings
DIVISION 700 STRUCTURES
Item# Subject
ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX
DENTON, TEXAS
100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
* ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings.
* “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings.
B000399.001 TOC - 8 Table of Contents
07/06/2016
701. GENRALSTRUCTURES
701.2. Structural Excavation
702. CONCRETE STRUCTURES.
702.1. Concrete Structure Materials
702.2. Mix Design and Mixing Concrete for Structures
702.3. Mix Design and Mixing Lightweight Concrete for Structures
702.4. Constructing Concrete Structures
702.5. Pre-stressed Concrete for Structures
702.6. Pneumatically Placed Concrete (Gunite)
702.7. Drilled Shaft Foundations
702.8. Pre-cast and Cast-In-Place Concrete Units
DIVISION 800 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION & MATERIALS
Item# Subject
803. SLOPE AND CHANNEL PROTECTION
803.1. Articulating Concrete Block
803.2. Gabion Structures
803.3. Riprap
803.4. Geotextiles Used in Drainage and Stabilization Applications
01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Park improvements include concrete parking lots, one (1) concession/restroom building,
concrete plaza, playing fields, fencing with mow strip, site furnishings, sidewalk, utilities,
sports lighting, bleacher pads, landscape enhancements, irrigation, entry culvert, play area,
pavilions and other miscellaneous park features as indicated on the drawings.
1.2 CONTRACT METHOD
A. The work shall be done under a Lump Sum Contract.
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of premises for work, storage, ingress and egress of personnel, and deliveries to
areas indicated on Drawings.
B. Conform to City of Denton's rules and regulations regarding use of the project site.
C. Owner will occupy premises during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner in
scheduling operations.
1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner Responsibilities: Make arrangements for delivery of shop drawings, manufacturer's
instructions, and delivery of materials to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner as to receiving, handling, storage an d
protection of Owner-furnished equipment and materials.
1.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Full intent, meaning, and spirit of Contract Documents is to provide complete, finished, and
fully operational park facility.
B. Drawings show diagrammatically work to be performed, and are not intended to show every
incidental part, fitting and member required for a complete project. Incidental parts, fittings,
and members shall be required as part of the Contract.
C. The specifications establish the quality of materials and workmanship to be performed. They
are not intended to describe every step or member in the process of construction.
Procedures, craftsmanship and materials of high quality shall be employed where not
specifically called for in these specifications.
01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.6 SEPARATE CONTRACTS
Not Used
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01025
MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT
Page 1 of 1
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01025 – MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
This section governs basis of compensation for construction of park improvements at
G. Roland Vela Soccer Complex, Denton, Texas.
1.2 GENERAL
A. It is not the intent of the bid schedule or this Section to itemize each and every item
required for this project. Items required for project completion and not specifica lly included
in the bid schedule will be included with the items to which they are considered subsidiary.
B. The various items in the proposal and bid schedule will be paid for by the unit or lump sum
price. These prices shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment,
labor, tools, power, transportation, temporary facilities, incidentals, permits
superintendence, overhead and profit required to complete the construction of the various
items of the project listed in the bid schedule and as itemized below.
1.3 UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM BID AMOUNTS
Where in bid form, "Unit Price" or "Lump Sum Bid Amount" is set forth, it shall include furnishing
by Contractor of all labor, tools, materials, machinery, appliances, plant and equipment
appurtenant to and necessary for, the construction in every detail and the completion in a first
class, workmanlike manner of all work to be done under these specifications. "Unit Price" or
"Lump Sum Bid Amount" shall also include all permanent protection of overhead expense, bond,
insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements, delay, profit, injuries, damages, claims
and all other items not specifically mentioned that may be required to construct fully each item of
the work complete in place.
1.4 "PER EACH" BID ITEMS
These items will be paid for individually as a complete, properly functioning element. These items
will include incidentals and appurtenances required to pro vide each bid item.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01027
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Page 1 of 1
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01027 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Application for monthly progress payments are in accordance with the contract
between the Owner and the Construction Manager.
1.2 DATE OF APPLICATIONS
A. Submit application for payment between the first and fifth day of the month. Review
draft of payment application with Owner's Representative prior to submittal of record
application.
1.3 FORM
A. Submit applications for payment on Application for Payment form identified in the
Contract with the Owner. Provide five copies with each submittal.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Contract Price Breakdown is the basis for applications for payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01040
COORDINATION
Page 1 of 1
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01040 – COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coordination with Owner, subcontractors, and between various trades and crafts.
1.2 SUB-CONTRACTORS AND VARIOUS TRADES
A. Consult jointly with sub-contractors and various trades to establish schedules to the
benefit of those involved.
B. Provide whatever supervision and communication necessary to facilitate close
adherence to schedules.
C. Provide whatever supervision and communication necessary to facilitate close
cooperation and coordination of sub -contractors and various trades one with the
other.
1.3 OWNER AND OWNER PROVIDED FACILITIES
Water Service: Coordinate work with installation of meters, which will be provided by
Owner. Contractor is responsible f or Sanitary Sewer taps. Schedule work to prevent
conflict and delays.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01200 – PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Meetings of principals involved in project.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Owner will schedule meeting and provide meeting place.
B. Attendance: The following are expected to attend:
1. Owner's Representative.
2. A/E's Construction Administrator.
3. A/E's Consultant for Electrical, Civil and Structural Engineering.
4. Contractor's General Superintendent, Project Superintendent and Project
Coordinator.
5. Major Subcontractor's including the following:
a. Mechanical
b. Plumbing
c. Electrical
d. Roofing
e. Paving
f. Concrete
g. Utilities: water, sewer, electrical distribution
h. Building
i. Fencing
C. Agenda Items:
1. List of major subcontractors and suppliers.
2. Tentative construction schedule.
3. Critical work sequencing.
4. Major equipment deliveries.
5. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, proposal requests, submittals,
color coordination, change orders, and applications for payment.
01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.
9. Use of Premises: Office, work, storage, staging areas; Owner's requirements.
10. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.
11. Temporary utilities.
12. Safety and first-aid procedures.
13. Security procedures.
14. Housekeeping procedures.
15. Other business.
D. Owner's Representative will preside over the meeting.
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule meeting and notify in writing those concerned, at least one week in
advance of the meeting.
B. Provide a convenient, comfortable meeting place.
C. Contractor's Project superintendent or Project Manager shall preside over meeting.
D. Attendance: The following are expected to attend:
1. Owner's Representative
2. Consultant's Construction Administrator
3. Consultant's Sub-Consultants unless notified otherwise
4. Contractor's General Superintendent, Project Superintendent and Project
Coordinator.
5. Subcontractors having work in progress.
6. Subcontractors whose work will start within the next month.
7. Others as requested by Owner, Consultant, or Contractor.
01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.
2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
3. Field observation, problems, conflicts.
4. Problems which impede construction schedule.
5. Review of off-site fabrication, and delivery schedules.
6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
7. Revisions to construction schedules.
8. Progress schedules for succeeding period.
9. Schedule coordination.
10. Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule, on completion
date, and effect on other contracts of project.
11. Other business.
1.4 MINUTES OF MEETINGS
Contractor shall take notes at pre-construction and progress meetings and
distribute them to those concerned in the form of minutes within 7 calendar days
after meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01300
ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 1
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01300 – ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Within 10 days after receipt of Notification of Award by Owner, submit three copies
of following:
1. List of Materials and Schedules of Values.
2. Project Schedule.
B. With the Bid Proposal, submit a list of the Subcontractors selected for the project.
1.2 FORM
A. Lists and schedules shall be tabulated in accordance with specification sections.
1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Name, address, phone number, and locations of operations.
1.4 LIST OF MATERIALS
A. Name of material or equipment-catalogue designation or model number.
B. Manufacturer: Name and address.
C. Supplier: Name and address.
1.5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Identify each line with proportion of contract sum shown as materials and labor.
B. Itemize General Provision, Special Provision and Division 1 items, including bonds,
insurance, field supervision and temporary facilities.
C. Schedule of Values shall be the basis for Applications for Payment.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01340 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop drawings, product data and sample submittal requirements.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittal procedures and requirements are specified in the General Conditions set forth by
the Owner. Procedures will be finalized with Contractor at pre-construction conference.
B. Owner will provide submittal forms which Contractor is to complete and enclose with each
set of submittal data.
C. Submittal data will indicate which specification section and paragraph applies to that data.
D. No work shall be fabricated or any product shipped to project site prior to Owner's approval
of submittal.
E. Submittal data is required on all specified items including those furnished exactly as
specified.
F. Refer to individual specification sections for required submittal data.
G. Contractor shall maintain a permanent file of all approved submittals on project site.
H. Submittal data shall be provided in one hard cover 3 ring notebook for each set of data.
1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTAL
A. Submittals shall be identified as follows:
1. Name of contractor, subcontractor, or material supplier originating submittal.
2. Name and location of project.
3. Index of items submitted.
4. Identification of each material or item of equipment.
5. Date of submittal.
6. Contractor's certification.
01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SUBMITTALS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.4 NUMBER OF SUBMITTALS
A. For submittals requiring bond prints, a sepia or other reproducible along with 2 bond copies
shall be submitted for approval. Reproducible with attached submittal review comments by
A/E will be returned to Contractor whereby he may take whatever steps necessary to make
proper distribution of reviewed drawings. Maximum sheet size 24 inches by 36 inches.
B. Submit five sets of brochures or manufacturer's published data.
1.5 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. A/E will process submittals promptly and return as soon as possible. For lengthier and more
complex submittals, allow minimum of 20 working days for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01350
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01350 – PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Progress and Schedule Bar Chart consisting of time scaled figures to monitor
progress of the work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two copies to A/E and to Owner within three weeks of receiving the Notice
to Proceed. Owner and A/E will request revisions, if necessary, and return to
Contractor with suggested revisions.
B. Upon final approval by A/E and Owner, copies of the Project Schedule shall be
distributed as follows:
1. 2 copies of each to Owner.
2. 2 copies of each to A/E.
3. 1 copy to principal subcontractors and vendors.
4. 1 copy to others affected by schedule.
5. Copies posted in Temporary Field Office.
C. As revisions are made during construction, distribute up-to-date issues to the same
entities and make postings accordingly.
D. Under no circumstances will construction operations begin other than initial
mobilization until the progress schedule, in its entirety, is approved.
1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE
A. Activities shown on the schedule shall be as follows:
1. Each individual construction activity.
2. Submittal of shop drawings product data, and samples for approval.
3. Approval of submittals.
4. Delivery time for materials and equipment requiring long lead time.
01350
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
5. Times anticipated for shutdown and tying-in of existing services. This does
not serve as official request to Owner as specified in Section 01040, and each
individual request for outage shall be submitted in writing two weeks prior to
anticipated outage, as specified.
B. Schedule Format:
1. Single sheet of paper not exceeding 24 inches by 36 inches.
2. Time scale at top and bottom of page with time units shown in calendar
weeks.
C. Each activity shall be represented by a bold horizontal line, as follows:
1. Each line clearly and briefly described.
2. Estimated duration.
3. Line or arrow shall be drawn to the length as dictated by the time scale to
indicate the activity's duration.
4. Each activity shall be placed at its proper calendar location as determined by
the time scale.
5. Float time shall be shown in its proper time scale for each non-critical activity.
6. Critical activities shall be illustrated or accented, thereby easily distinguished
from non-critical activities.
7. Milestones or intermediate completion dates shall be clearly shown.
8. Final completion date on initial schedule shall coincide with time of completion
agreed upon and indicated in the Contract Documents.
D. The duration of each activity shall be shown in calendar days and shall include
Saturdays, Sundays, holidays and anticipated days lost due to inclement weather.
1.4 MONTHLY UPDATED SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two copies of Project Schedule, each to Owner and A/E, with monthly
payment application, illustrating the following:
1. Markings to show actual completed work above or below estimated work.
2. Critical path activities marked to distinguish from non-critical activities.
1.5 SCHEDULE REVISIONS
A. Revise and resubmit schedule for approval in event any of following occur:
01350
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. The previously approved schedule changes.
2. The approved schedule is extended in excess of 14 calendar days.
3. Issued change orders cause changes in the actual work which affect the
duration or actual start or finish date of activities to the extent that the
approved schedule is changed or extended in excess of 14 calendar days.
B. Provide written description of each change to the schedule, including reason for the
change and how it affects the schedule.
C. Revisions to the schedule, including those generated by change orders, shall be
made at no cost to Owner.
1.6 FLOAT
A. Contract Time shall be the Time of Completion as indicated in the Contract, plus
any time extensions granted after award of contract.
B. Float shall be the Contract Time less the Duration of the Schedule for critical
activities, or the amount of time non-critical activities can be delayed without
causing the Contract Time to be exceeded.
C. Owner will receive benefit of float. Contract Time Extensions will not be granted
unless a change order or delay causes either of the following:
1. An increase in the duration of the critical activities.
2. The available float of a non-critical activity is consumed causing the activity to
become critical and thereby altering the project schedule.
D. Time extensions shall be limited to the duration of the critical activities less the
Contract Time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
01350
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
END OF SECTION
01440
TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01440 – TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division-1
specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Inspection, Testing, and Control: An independent testing laboratory (approved
by the owner) selected and paid by the Contractor will perform the
professional laboratory services described herein.
B. Codes: Testing laboratory shall perform required inspections and tests in
accordance with Building Code, Local Authorities, State Regulations and the
specifications of ASTM and other respective technical societies.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
Testing services may include, but are not limited to the following:
A. Field Density Tests
B. Moisture Content of Existing Subgrade
C. Gradation Analyses
D. Concrete Test Cylinders
E. Concrete Source Quality Control
F. Concrete Field Quality Control
G. Keeping Inspection and testing Logs of Specified Inspections and Tests.
H. Submitting to Engineer, Contractor, and Owner, certificates, records and reports of
inspections and tests.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR
A. Testing services will be paid for by the contractor.
B. Deliver to laboratory adequate quantities of representative sample of materials
proposed for use which are required to be tested.
C. Advise laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow
laboratory to complete any required check-tests and assign personnel for field
inspection and testing as specified. Should cancellation or deployment of Testing
01440
TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Services be required after notification to laboratory has been given, Contractor
shall be responsible for making such arrangements.
D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test
samples on project site for the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing as
required by ASTM Specifications C31.
E. Furnish such nominal labor as required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining
and handling samples at site.
1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY PERSONNEL
A. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials, assemblies,
specimens, and work performed including design mixes, methods and
techniques as specified and report results to the Owner and Owner's
Representative.
B. Should it appear that the material furnished or work performed by the
Contractor fails to meet requirements of Contract Documents, testing
laboratory shall direct the attention of the Contractor and the Owner to such
failure or infringement immediately.
C. Testing laboratory personnel are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax,
enlarge, or release any requirement of the Contract Documents, or to approve
or to accept any portion of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Design Mixes
1. Concrete mixtures shall adhere to the specifications - Refer to Section 03300,
Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. At the beginning of the work, the batch plant shall submit proposed concrete
mixes for review by the Owner's Representative, including the sieve analysis
of fine and aggregate ASTM C-136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate -
ASTM C-29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and
coarse aggregates ASTM 127 and 128.
01440
TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Concrete shall not be mixed for placing until after laboratory reports reflect
that each proposed mix will develop the strength required.
01440
TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Test Cylinders: At least one (1) test shall be made of each day's placement, for
each type of concrete, for each fifty (50) cubic yards (or part thereof), on each
different portion or section of the work. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by
the laboratory. Each test shall consist of three (3) specimens, one (1) of which
shall be broken at seven (7) days and the other one (1) at twenty-eight (28) days
and one held in reserve.
C. Source Quality Control: An independent testing laboratory shall inspect and control
concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks and control concrete mixing and
loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at beginning of each pour.
D. Field Quality Control: At beginning of each concrete "pour" or from each mixer
truck (at discretion of Owner), test for slump shall be performed in accordance with
"Method of Slump Test for Consistency of Portland Cement" (ASTM C-143) unless
waived by Owner's Representative. If slump is greater than that specified, concrete
shall be rejected.
E. The work represented by the items tested shall not be considered acceptable until
the Owner has approved the test results.
F. Should the final testing indicate that specifications have not been met, the
Contractor will be responsible for performing work necessary to meet
specifications.
G. The testing laboratory should report any deviations from the specified directions for
pouring of the concrete to the General Contractor and to the Owner immediately.
Conditions at site shall be noted and recorded for each "pour".
END OF SECTION
01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01500 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
The Contractor will be responsible for the following facilities unless stated otherwise:
1.1 STORAGE SHEDS
The Contractor may provide on the premises at convenient locations with respect to
building construction areas, suitable watertight storage sheds for storage of materials,
equipment, and tools which might be damaged by exposure to weather; maintain same in
good condition. Remove when no longer needed or relocate from time to time where
preliminary location might interfere with subsequent work. Location of storage sheds
shall be approved by Owner.
1.2 POWER AND LIGHT
A. Obtain and have installed temporary electrical power service line to point
convenient for and available to trades, including mechanical and other
subcontractors. Pay for cost of current used.
B. Install temporary lighting to maintain illumination in areas where work is being
performed. Where practical, place temporary lights in locations where permanent
lighting fixtures are to be installed.
C. Pay for power until Substantial Completion is awarded by Owner.
1.3 SANITARY FACILITIES
Provide one or more toilet buildings for use of persons employed on job. Post notices,
take such precautions as may be necessary, remove refuse deposited in or about
buildings, and maintain premises in sanitary condition.
1.4 WATER
Obtain temporary water from local utility authority. Pay for costs for temporary water
connections and water usage fees until Substantial Completion is awarded by Owner.
1.5 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SAFETY
Provide traffic control and safety during construction. Meet City requirements or public
safety, barriers, and traffic control. Coordinate with Owner during necessary street
control.
1.6 PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC
A. Conduct work in manner to ensure least possible obstruction to public traffic and
protect safety of public. Provide public safety and convenience.
01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Locate materials placed on site, or materials excavated and construction materials
or equipment used, to cause as little obstruction to public as possible.
C. Owner reserves right to remedy any neglect on part of Contractor as regards to
public convenience and safety which may come to its attention. Cost of such work
done or material furnished by Owner shall be deducted from monies due or to
become due to Contractor.
1.7 LIFTING AND HOISTING
Supply hoists, lifts, cranes, and towers as required for handling of various materials.
Installation of equipment shall meet applicable safety requirements.
1.8 WATCHMAN AND JANITOR
A. Employ watchman at such time as deemed necessary to protect or attend work.
Make other security arrangement required during progress of work.
B. Provide person or persons for janitor work who shall attend to temporary toilet
rooms and keep them clean and supplied and keep construction areas broomed
and relatively clean.
1.9 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES
When temporary facilities are no longer needed for proper conduct of work, completely
remove from project and repair or replace material, equipment, or finished surface
damaged.
1.10 PARKING
All construction personnel parking shall be located in Storage Yard or areas authorized
by Owner. Do not park vehicles or equipment under the dripline of existing trees.
1.11 STORAGE AND STOCKPILE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS:
Except for topsoil, excavated materials not utilized in earthwork process for fill shall be
disposed of at off-site location.
1.12 SCAFFOLDING
Provide and install scaffolding, ramps, platforms, rails, guards, stairs, and ladders
necessary for the performance of the work. All safety standards, ordinances, codes, and
insurance requirements shall be met. All items shall be so constructed as to afford safety
and protection to both craftsmen and their work.
1.13 DE-WATERING
Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in
excavations or under or adjacent to any structures. Should such conditions develop,
01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
water and other fluids shall be controlled and disposed of by means of temporary pumps,
piping, drain lines, ditches, dams or other approved methods.
1.14 SHORING
Temporary shoring required for installation of work shall be included. Assume
responsibility for this work and make good damage caused by improper supports or
failure of shoring in any respect.
1.15 FENCING
As needed for security and public safety, provide fencing around staging area a minimum
of 6 feet in height, with 2-inch galvanized posts spaced 10 feet on center, well-braced,
and having 2-inch diamond mesh chain link fabric. Fence shall be complete with sliding
or swinging gates with necessary hardware and padlock. Provide two keys for Owner's
use. Remove fencing and fill post holes upon completion of work. Provide fencing with
fire gates as necessary for emergency access.
1.16 BARRICADES
Erect and maintain barricades to protect adjacent structures, paving, and lawns, from
damage by construction vehicles and operations. Erect barricades where required to
prevent injury to public.
1.17 FIRE PROTECTION
Provide fire and emergency access during construction. Comply with requirements of
local fire official for fire safety during progress of work. Provide fire protection plan which
shall be approved by Fire Marshall prior to beginning work.
1.18 TRENCH SAFETY
Provide shoring or safety slopes for trenches or excavations exceeding 5 feet in depth.
Comply with requirements of Texas Trench Safety Law, Article 601B, Vernon's Texas
Civil Statutes, and City of Mansfield requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01605
WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE
Page 1 of 1
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01605 – WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Warranties (guarantees), maintenance, service.
1.2 WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES)
A. Provide written warranty and guarantee of all work against defects in materials,
equipment, or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial
completion. Also provide any additional warranties and guarantees of work items
and components as specified in individual sections of these specifications.
1.3 SERVICE
A. Furnish necessary service to each electrical and mechanical system, such as
adjustment of controls, air distribution, and water balancing valves, mechanical
repair of equipment, and other work requiring specialized training, for the one year
period, concurrent with warranty period specified.
B. This shall not include repair of damage due to fire (unless fire results from faulty
material or workmanship on part of Contractor), storm, vandalism, or other factors
entirely beyond control of Contracto r, nor shall it include routine service such as
oiling motors, replacing lamps, or other work not requiring equipment and motors,
cleaning filters, and replacing lamps.
C. No additional compensation will be paid for work perform ed during one year
warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WARRANTIES
Product warranties and guarantees provided by subcontract ors, suppliers, and
manufacturers for specific items such as building components, mechanical equipment, air
conditioners, unit heaters, water heaters, and water coolers will be filled in by Contractor.
Owner's name is City of Denton. Show model numbers, serial numbers, date installed or
accepted as required to complete warranty/guarantee forms.
END OF SECTION
01610
PRODUCT HANDLING
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01610 – PRODUCT HANDLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Transportation, handling, storage protection of materials and equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION
A. Instruct suppliers to package products in containers which will provide protection
during shipment, handling, and storage. Protect sensitive products against
exposure to elements, moisture, and physical damage.
B. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or
packaging with identifying labels intact and legible.
C. Delivery of Owner supplied structures shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
D. Do not deliver products or materials prior to 60 days before scheduled beginning of
installation for each respective product or material type.
3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Protect until installed.
B. Upon delivery of Owner supplied structures (pavilions and park entry signage) the
contractor assumes all responsibilities for storage and protecting of these
structures.
C. Water-tight storage facilities of suitable size, with floors raised above the ground
shall be provided for all types of materials liable to damage from exposure to the
weather; other materials shall be stored on blocks of the ground. Materials shall be
placed as to permit easy access for proper inspection and identification. All
material shall be stored according to manufacturer's recommendations. Any
material which has deteriorated, become damaged or otherwise unfit for use, shall
not be used in work. Upon completion of all work, or when directed, remove
storage facility construction from the site. During construction, open ends of all
drains, piping conduit, and all openings in equipment shall be closed before leaving
the work at any time as to prevent the entrance of all foreign matter.
01610
PRODUCT HANDLING
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.3 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT IN STORAGE
A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide
manufacturer's service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of
enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package.
B. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services;
submit as a record document.
END OF SECTION
01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01630 – PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
Procedures and requirements for substitution of materials, products, or equipment other
than that specified.
1.2 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting
standards, by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any
product and manufacturer named.
C. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no
option unless substitution is approved as specified. Products of other
manufacturers shall meet minimum performance criteria specified or quality of
product description.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, followed by
the words "No Substitution," there is no option.
1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit equal materials substitution requests to the Consultant no less than 10 days
prior to the bid deadline. Submit equal material substitution requests on form
provided in this section. If substitution requests are approved, they will be
confirmed by Addendum issued not less than seven days prior to the bid date.
B. Substitutions will only be considered after bid opening for following:
1. Substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretations of code
or insurance requirements;
2. Specified product is unavailable through no fault of Contractor;
3. Manufacturer or fabricator refuses to certify or guarantee specified product as
required.
4. Subsequent information reveals that specified product is unable to perform
properly or to fit in the designated space; or
5. In A/E's sole judgment, substitution would be in Owner's best interest.
01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Post-bid substitution requests will not be considered unless there are significant
extenuating circumstances, such as unavailability of a product because of actions
by the manufacturer. If post-bid substitutions are required, follow the requirements
for pre-bid substitutions.
D. Substitution will not be approved if implementation would require a substantial
revision to construction documents.
E. Requests for substitutions shall be considered only when Contractor submits the
following in writing:
1. Statement by Contractor that proposed substitution is in full compliance with
Contract Documents and applicable codes.
2. Complete technical data including applicable drawings, complete
specifications, test data, samples and performance tests of the article
proposed for substitution.
3. List of all trades affected by substitution.
4. Indication of resulting contract cost adjustment.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for effects upon related work and additional costs
generated by substitution approval. Furthermore, Contractor shall agree in writing
to bear cost of A/E's time, at rate of 2.55 times the direct salary cost, for review of
substitution requests, whether the substitution is approved or not.
1.4 EQUAL MATERIALS
A. Burden of proof that proposed material substitution is equal to that specified is
Contractor's responsibility. Owner shall be the final judge of a proposed
substitutions ability to meet the construction document requirements.
B. In evaluating equal materials, Owner may consider local representation and
availability of parts, service, etc. When local services are available for specified
materials, the lack of these services may be regarded as sufficient cause for
disapproval of substitutions.
C. Equipment Equals: Equipment specified is intended to establish standards of
design, quality and capacities. Proposed substitutions shall be equal in such
features as noise level, power requirements, metal gauges, vibration attenuation,
finish, appearance, certification of recognized testing agencies and standard
bureaus, allowable working pressures, physical size and arrangement so far as
effects installation in the available space, factory applied insulation, electrical
devices, capacity reduction facilities, access to internal parts, pressure losses,
operating speeds, coil face areas, fan diameter, operating efficiencies, and all other
features and capacities specified herein.
01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.5 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION
A. Submit three copies of request for each item proposed for substitution.
B. Use Substitution Request Form as provided by construction manager.
C. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide
manufacturer's name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog
number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate.
D. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Consultant
and Owner.
1.6 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION
A. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has
investigated proposed product and has determined that it is comparable or superior
in every respect to specified product.
B. Coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for Work to be complete.
C. Certify that cost data presented is complete and includes related cost generated by
the substitution.
D. Waive claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become
apparent.
1.7 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SUBSTITUTIONS
Shop drawings and data shall thoroughly document substitutions of mechanical and
electrical equipment and Contractor shall be fully responsible for changes generated
elsewhere by the substitution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Page 4 of 4
JEG WUXU2200 01630 - 4 Product Options, Equal Materials,
09/28/09 and Substitutions
END OF SECTION
01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Page 1 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01705 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
Closeout shall include general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for
final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner, and
similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual
units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is
directly related to "Substantial Completion", and therefore may be either a single time
period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which
have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. That time variation shall
be applicable to other provisions of this Section.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Refer to General Conditions.
B. Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Owner will proceed with inspection.
Following initial inspection, Owner will either prepare Certificate of Substantial
Completion, or advise Contractor of work which shall be performed prior to
issuance of certification; and repeat inspection when requested to assure that work
has been substantially completed.
1.3 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. On or before the date of final inspection Contractor shall turn over to Owner
following Contract Close-Out Materials, which he will have accumulated and
retained during course of project:
1. All approved submittal data, two complete sets.
2. Written project warranty, and all other equipment and materials
warranties/guarantees as signed by all appropriate suppliers or
manufacturer's, one set.
3. Operating and maintenance instructions for all installed equipment and
systems, to include a maintenance and spare parts list, two sets.
4. One set of "Record" drawings and specification showing conditions and
dimensions of all construction indicated by original construction documents.
Drawings shall show routing of underground outside utilities or conduits, with
burial depth related to finish grade. Drawings shall also show the final grades.
The final grading plan shall be performed and produced by a licensed land
surveyor.
5. Materials will be reviewed by Owner for completion. Final Acceptance will not
be approved until Contract Close-out materials are completed.
01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Page 2 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. As-built Information
1. Contractor shall submit all as-built drawings indicating all field changes to the
plans. Field changes shall be clearly marked and dimensioned indicating the
built condition of discipline or area of work.
2. The following information will be required from the contractor prior to final
acceptance:
Engineering Department requirements:
a. Copies of Final Pay Requests for all public improvements from all
Contractors and Subcontractors, both paving and utilities.
b. Affadavits from all Contractors and Subcontractors that all bills, liens,
subcontractors, suppliers, etc have been paid.
c. Maintenance bonds as required.
d. Two (2) sets of Bond Prints of the entire Preliminary As-Built Civil
Construction Plans.
e. One set of “As-recorded” Mylars of the entire Civil Construction Plans
f. One CD-ROM containing AutoCAD files of Water/Sewer and Storm
Sewer Plans and Profiles.
g. One CD containing PDF format files of the entire Civil Construction Plans
Parks Department requirements:
a. Maintain one set of each of the following record documents; record any
actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings
2. Project Manual
3. Addenda
4. Change orders and other Modifications to the Contract.
b. Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment
as follows:
1. After the Owner has approved the as-built drawings (with revisions),
provide a scanned multi-page PDF document saved to a CD using
the following directory and subdirectory hierarchy:
“Project Name”
As-builts
Drawings
Specifications
Bonds
Submittals
Site Furnishings
Electrical
01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Page 3 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Playground equipment
Structures
Irrigation equipment
Concrete mix
Utilities
Other, Etc.
Owner/Maintenance Manuals
Warranties and Guarantees
Maintenance Manuals
3. Although various departments shall require different or sometimes
duplicate documents, it is the contractor’s responsibility to provide each
department with the required close-out documents, at no cost to the
Owner. Final pay application shall be contingent on the contractor
providing all documents to the satisfaction of the Owner.
C. Instruction on use of new products
1. Contractor shall demonstrate operation and maintenance for all Products
to Owner one (1) week prior to date of Substantial Completion.
2. Demonstrate operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing,
and maintenance of equipment.
3. Insert any new data in Operation and Maintenance Manuals when need
for additional data arises during instruction.
D. Refer to individual Divisions 2 through 16 for specific work requirements. The
requirements include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Submit Final Pay Voucher.
2. Complete work items on Substantial Completion punch lists, if any.
3. Deliver tools, spare parts, keys, extra stocks of materials and similar physical
items to Owner.
4. Complete start-up testing of systems. Train and instruct Owner's designated
personnel in operation and general maintenance requirements of all
mechanical and electrical components. Discontinue and remove from project
site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and
facilities, and similar items.
5. Complete final clean up requirement, including site dress up, touch-up
painting, etc.
01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Page 4 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. Upon receipt of Contractor's written notice that work has been completed, Owner
will schedule inspection with Contractor and inspect work. After inspection, Owner
will either approve Final Payment or prepare punch list for Contractor listing work
items not completed and incorrect or obligations not fulfilled as required for final
acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES
Arrange to meet with Owner's personnel, at project site, to provide basic instructions
needed for proper operation and maintenance of entire work.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Divisions 2
through 16. General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General
Conditions and as temporary service in "Temporary Facilities" Section of this
Division. Provide final cleaning of work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning
surface or unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for first-class building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for
cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of
cleaning levels required;
1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a
polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision-
obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent
materials.
3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surface finishes, to a dirt-free
condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable transparent
materials.
4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, remove excess
lubrication and other substances.
01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Page 5 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar
spaces.
6. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean.
7. Vacuum clean carpeted surface and similar soft surfaces.
8. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those
resulting from water exposure.
9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.
10. Clean project site, including landscape development areas, of litter and foreign
substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains,
petrochemical spill and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are
neither planted nor paved, to a smooth even-textured surface.
END OF SECTION
01710
CLEANING
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01710 – CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Cleaning during period of construction and at completion of the work.
1.2 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
Conduct cleaning and disposal operation to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations,
and anti-pollution laws.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or
property and which will not damage surfaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The site and adjacent properties shall be kept free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish, and wind blown debris, resulting from construction operations.
B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and
rubbish.
C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site daily and dispose at a
legal disposal area away from the site.
3.2 DUST CONTROL
Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning
process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces.
01710
CLEANING
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.3 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning
B. See Section 01705 - Project Closeout.
END OF SECTION
01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 01720 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Maintain at the site one record copy of the following:
A. Drawings - Prints of drawings shall be clearly marked Record Prints.
B. Specifications
C. Addenda
D. Change Orders and Written Instructions
E. Field Orders and Written Instructions
F. Submittals
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Substitutions
5. Field Test Reports
3.2 STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used
for construction.
01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Label documents other than drawing Record Documents and file documents and
samples in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of these
specifications.
C. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by the Owner.
3.3 DRAWINGS
Record actual construction of:
A. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground or concealed utilities and
apparatus referenced to permanent features visible at surface.
B. Field changes or dimensions and detail.
C. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
D. Details not on original drawings.
3.4 SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA
Record in each section changes made by Addenda, Change Order, and Field Order.
3.5 SUBMITTALS
Prior to final inspection, deliver Record Documents to Owner.
3.6 OWNER INSPECTION OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Inspection by Owner shall be a minimum of once monthly. Owner's verification that
documents are current shall be a requirement for issuance of Certificate of Payment.
END OF SECTION
02225
EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
Page 1 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02225 – EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section governs all excavation required for the construction of water, sanitary
sewer, storm drain, and miscellaneous utility lines and for the backfilling around
completed utility and storm drain lines to the level of the existing or finished
ground, all in conformity with the locations, lines and grades shown on the plans
and in accordance with these specifications. This section also covers the
pumping or bailing and drainage, and all sheeting and bracing of trench walls.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work and construction conforming to the City of Denton specifications
and details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials for bedding will include sandy gravel and crushed rock. These bedding
materials should be clean and homogenous and free of mud, silt, clay lumps or
clods, vegetation and/or debris.
The sandy gravel shall have:
Passing 2 inch sieve 100%
Passing 1 inch sieve 90% - 100%
Passing 1/2 inch sieve 50% - 80%
Passing No. 4 sieve 30% - 60%
Passing No. 100 sieve 0% - 5%
All material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25
and a plasticity index of not more than 6.
B. Crushed rock shall be graded as follows:
Passing 1 inch sieve 100%
Passing 3/4 inch sieve 90% - 100%
Passing 1/2 inch sieve 20% - 55%
Passing 3/8 inch sieve 0% - 15%
Passing No. 4 sieve 0% - 5%
02225
EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
Page 2 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Materials for backfill above the bedding material shall consist of random materials
from the excavation. The backfill should be free of any appreciable amount of
gravel or stone particles larger than four inches, in any dimension, and should be
free of mud, silt, clay lumps or clods, vegetation and/or debris.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND TRENCH PROTECTION
A. The walls and faces of all excavations and excavated trench es more than 5-feet
deep or with evident hazardous ground movement in which workers are exposed
to danger from moving ground shall be guarded by a shoring system, sloping of
the ground, or other equivalent means. The determination of the angle of repose
and the design of the supporting system shall be based on careful evaluation of
the depth of cut, material, changes in material, water content variations, and
external loadings. The minimum requirements for determining the angle of
repose and for the shoring of excavations or trenches shall be in accordance with
Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching and Shoring, Section 1926.650 thru Section
1926.652, as amended and with appendices, of the Construction Safety and
Health Regulations, Occupational Safety and Hea lth Administration, U. S.
Department of Labor.
B. Shoring shall be used when the location of the trench is in a restricted clearing
area, or within close proximity to other utility lines or structures. Existing
vegetation may not be damaged or removed to accomplish a required angle of
repose. Shoring will have to be used in such cases.
C. Trench side slopes must meet Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) standards. Sheeting, shoring a nd bracing will be required when side
slope standards are not met. A pull box, meeting OSHA standards, will be
acceptable.
D. The Contractor will submit detailed plans and specifications for trench safety
systems that meet OSHA standards when excavation will exceed a depth of 5-
feet. These plans must be sealed by an Engineer registered by the State of
Texas and submitted prior to formal execution of the contract.
3.2 TRENCHES
A. Prior to installation of any on-site subsurface utilities (water, sanitary sewer,
drainage culverts, electrical, etc.) all rough grading shall be complete in all areas
and roads to within plus or minus 0.10 feet.
B. Utilities shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical or a combination of
vertical or sloped sides. Trenches shall be sheeted and braced to the extent
necessary to maintain stability of excavation and provide full safety for workmen
throughout the construction period. Adequacy of the sheeting and bracing shall
02225
EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
Page 3 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
be the responsibility of the Contractor. Also, Department of Labor "Safety and
Health Regulations for Construction" dated April 17, 1971, shall be adhered to by
this Contract at all times.
02225
EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
Page 4 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. The pipe should be placed on a minimum bedding material thickness below the
pipe and extend up the sides of the trench. Large clods of backfill material will be
broken down into smaller particles before placement. The backfi ll should be
placed in loose layers not exceeding 6 -inches in depth (loose measurement) and
each layer will be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density.
Moisture content of the backfill should be between the optimum moisture value
and 5% above optimum.
D. For pipe utilities and storm drain lines of all types, where the soil encountered at
established grade is a quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material the following
procedure shall be used unless other metho ds are called for on the plans: All
unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of 2-feet below bottom of storm drain
line for drain lines 2-feet or more in height and to a depth equal to the height of
the line for storm drain lines less than 2-feet in height. Such excavation shall be
carried at least 1-foot beyond the horizontal limits on all sides. All unstable soil so
removed shall be replaced with sandy gravel material, consisting of hard durable
particles or fragments of granular aggregates mixed or b lended with fine sand,
clay, stone dust or other similar binding or filler materials to provide a uniform
mixture with gradations of materials as shown in Paragraph 2.01.
After placement, the sand gravel material shall be wetted if necessary and shall
be compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable foundation
for the storm drain and utility line. Jetting will not be permitted.
E. Any rock adjacent to the excavation which has been loosened by excavation
methods, shall be removed and replaced with approved compacted backfill
material.
3.3 SHAPING OF TRENCH BOTTOM
The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the
class of bedding indicated on the plans or specified in these specifications.
3.4 DEWATERING TRENCH
A. Pipelines shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All
water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the utility placing
operation to insure a dry, firm bed on which to place the pipe and the trench shall
be maintained in such dewatered condition until all piping is set. Removal of
water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping or by a well-point installation as
conditions warrant.
B. Backfill shall be placed as soon as practicable after laying, bedding and jointing of
pipe.
02225
EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
Page 5 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.5 REMOVING OLD STRUCTURES
When old masonry structures or foundations are e ncountered in the excavation, such
obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 1 foot
below the bottom of the trench.
3.6 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that measures are taken to maintain
the stability and otherwise protect existing structures and utilities required to
remain in place. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or
breakage of existing utility lines, other contractors' utility lines and underground
telephone and radio communication cables.
B. The Contractor shall inform utility owners and the City of Denton sufficiently in
advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute,
provide temporary detours or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order
that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay and
expense. The Contractor shall cooperate with all utility owners conc erned in
effecting any utility adjustments necessary and shall not hold the Owner liable for
any expense due to delay or additional work because of conflicts.
3.7 SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS
All materials from excavation operations not required or not suitable for backfilling shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off -site.
3.8 BACKFILL
A. After the bedding has been prepared and the pipes installed, selected materials
from excavation or borrow shall be placed along both sides of the pipe equally, in
uniform layers not exceeding 6-inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted
using enough water to facilitate compaction if required, and thoroughly
compacted to the required density. Excess wetting or jetting will not be permitted.
Material for backfill shall be free from stones of such size as to interfere with
compaction and shall be free from large lumps which will not break down readily
under compaction. The Owner shall have the right to reject any material
containing more than 20% by weight of material retained on a 3-inch sieve, or
material excavated in such a manner as to produce large lumps not easily broken
down or which cannot be spread in loose layers.
02225
EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
Page 6 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Filling and/or backfilling shall be continued in this manner to the elevation of the
top of the pipe. Special care shall be taken to secure thorough compaction of the
materials placed under the haunches of the pipe. All fill or backfill below the top
of pipe shall be compacted in the manner prescribed above. The backfill above
the pipe shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth.
Successive layers shall be added and thoroughly compacted by hand o r
pneumatic tampers or by mechanical compaction equipment approved by the
Owner until the trench is completely filled and brought to the elevation of the
existing ground or the top of the proposed subgrade, whichever is lower.
Backfilling shall be done in such a manner as to avoid injurious top or side
pressures on the pipe.
C. Where trench excavation is in rock, shale or other incompressible material,
excavate to at least 6-inches below the pipe and refill to grade with sand or gravel
firmly compacted, then backfill as above following the installation of the pipe.
D. All backfill below proposed finished grade shall be compacted in accordance with
Section 02220 - Earthwork.
E. Compaction control tests shall be made in accordance with Owner's
Requirements.
END OF SECTION
02270
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02270 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials needed to complete the Work as
shown on the Plans and specified herein.
B. The work performed under this section shall comply with the plan requirements
for this project and with the requirements and intent of the NPDES Storm Water
Discharge Permit program to the extent that it applies to this project.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02220 - EARTHWORK
B. Section 02930 – HYDRAULIC SEEDING
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having
jurisdiction. The Specifications and the Plans are not represented as being
comprehensive, but rather to convey the intent to provide complete slope
protection and erosion control for both the Owner's and adjacent property.
B. Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction
and maintained during the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are
subject to severe erosion and off-site areas which are especially vulnerable to
damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be identified and receive
additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner.
C. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size
of the area to be exposed at any one time and to minimize the time of exposure.
D. Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to
reduce erosion and sediment loss during the period of exposure.
E. When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting
from a land-disturbing activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the
receiving ditch or stream, the Contractor shall install measures to control both
the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated erosion and
increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner.
F. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted so as to minimize
off-site sedimentation damage.
02270
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of
all sediment once the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure
receiving the sediment is reduced by one-half. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment at the time of
completion of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Silt Fence Fabric:
1. Mirafi 100X or approved equal.
2. Minimum bursting strength: 300 psi.
3. Edges treated to prevent unraveling.
4. Furnished with o-rings or clips to facilitate attachment to woven wire
fabric.
B. Wire Fencing: Steel wire fencing (hog wire) with minimum 14 gauge wire and a
maximum 14 gauge wire and a maximum opening of 6 inches.
C. Posts:
1. Steel, T-section minimum 4 feet 6 inches long, minimum of 1.3 pounds
per foot without anchor plate.
2. Anchor plate attached before coating.
3. Fabricate with lugs or other approved means to prevent vertical
movement from the wire fencing.
D. Tie Wire: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A112.
E. Temporary cover for graded areas shall be undamaged, air dry threshed straw
free from weed seeds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE:
02270
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Erosion control measures must be implemented prior to the commencement of
any soil disturbing activity.
B. Stabilize fill and grade of areas to receive soil erosion and sediment control in
accordance with Section 02220, “EARTHWORK”. Maintain positive drainage to
sediment and erosion control devices during and after grading operations.
3.2 SILT FENCE:
A. Install steel posts on a minimum of 4-foot centers. Minimum embedment of 6”.
B. Minimum height of the silt fence to be 2 feet with a 6-inch clearance between the
top of the silt fence and the top of the posts.
C. Install the steel posts on a slight angle towards the anticipated runoff surface.
D. Trench in the toe of the silt fence so that the down slope face of the trench is flat
and perpendicular to the line of flow.
E. Minimum trench depth: 6 inches.
F. Trench width: 6 inches.
G. Attach wire fence (hog wire) to the posts.
H. Attach the silt fence fabric to the wire fence (hog wire) and secure with a
minimum of two wire ties per post.
I. Backfill over the silt fence fabric in the trench.
J. When build up of soil, silt, or any other material behind the silt fence reaches a
height of 6 inches or when the silt fence is no longer functioning efficiently,
remove all accumulated material and repair the silt fence as needed.
3.3 DUST CONTROL
A. Dust control of the Contractor's performance of the Work shall be performed by
the Contractor by applying water.
B. Dust control shall be provided in the amounts and locations as ordered by the
Owner's Representative.
3.4 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE:
A. Protect erosion and sediment control devices from damage. Repair and replace
dikes, silt fences and other measures when damaged by construction, natural
and other physical causes. All soil erosion and sediment control devices shall be
02270
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor and shall function as
originally intended.
B. Periodically (at least once every 7 days and after each rainfall event) inspect and
maintain erosion and sediment control structures, until final stabilization of
disturbed ground areas is achieved.
C. All stock piled soil shall be surrounded by a silt fence to properly control
sediment runoff.
D. Inspection services provided by the Owner's Representatives do not relieve the
Contractor's responsibility for inspection and maintenance of the erosion control
measures.
E. The Contractor is responsible for modifying or providing additional erosion
control devices to control erosion from his operations on the site. This may
become necessary due to disturbance of additional areas or phasing of the
Contractor's operations.
3.5 STAGING AREAS:
At such time when the specific location of the staging areas are determined, silt fences,
diversions, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all side slope and down
slope boundaries of the staging area and shall be provided by the Contractor. The
erosion control plan for each staging area shall be approved by the Owner's
Representative and devices shall be in place prior to occupation of the staging areas.
All relative material and labor to construct and maintain the staging area erosion control
plans shall be subsidiary to the other items of work.
3.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan as provided by Owner’s Representative.
END OF SECTION
02308
COMPOST
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02308
COMPOST
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
1.02
A.
B.
Furnish and place compost on all areas to receive sod within limits of
Soccer the Soccer fields and the Central area to a depth of 1.5 inches.
Incorporate compost into topsoil to a depth of 6".
RELATED SECTIONS
1.03
A.
B.
Section 02310 - Laser Grading
Section 02925 - Sodding
SUBMITTALS
A. Test Results and Compost Technical Data Sheets.
B. Certification that compost is STA certified compost.
C. Sample in quart bags.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPOST
A. Azalea Soil as produced by Living Earth or approved equal.
B. Contact: 972-869-4332
C. Manufacturer shall test product on a prescribed basis using STA Program
approved labs, for chemical, physical, and biological properties in accordance
with the U.S. Composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance.
D. Properties of compost shall be suitable for turf and plant growth.
02308
COMPOST
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Apply topsoil to proper elevation to allow for compost installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Place compost and spread evenly.
B. Thoroughly incorporate compost into soil to a minimum depth of 6" using
suitable equipment.
C. Fine grade and allow ground to settle. Regrade as required.
END OF SECTION
02310
LASER GRADING
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02310
LASER GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Final grading of subgrade and surface grades utilizing laser controlled equipment
for athletic fields and courts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02300 - Earthwork
B. Section 02305 - Topsoil
C. Section 02925 - Sodding
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Submit subcontractor qualifications and equipment information demonstrating the
successful completion of at least five similar projects utilizing specialized laser
controlled construction equipment.
B.Required project experience shall involve fine grading of athletic fields.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION3.1
A.
B.
Verify site conditions.
Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as
indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B.Protect benchmarks, existing structures and improvements from excavating
equipment.
02310
LASER GRADING
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Prepare soil by removing rocks, clods and foreign matter.
3.3 FINISHING AND LASER GRADING
A.Establish required subgrades and surface grades using specialized construction
equipment with an automatic blade/box control system using an external laser
grade reference.
B.Final laser graded surface shall be smooth and uniform and shall conform to the
required lines, grades and cross sections.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Verify compliance of finish grading of final field surfaces by conducting a survey of
points based on a grid not less than 40 feet square. Include other key points such
as at bases pitching rubber and field corners. Submit copy of as-built survey.
B.If survey indicates Work does not meet specified requirements, correct Work,
and resurvey at no cost to Owner.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Soccer Fields Finish Surface - laser grade topsoil areas to finish grade.
END OF SECTION
02510
Water Distribution
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02510 – WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary
Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 – General Requirements, and the Drawings
are collectively applicable to this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and fittings for water line, including domestic water line.
2. Valves and fire hydrants.
1.2 UNIT PRICE – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Pipe and Fittings:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the linear foot.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes hand trimming excavation, pipe and fittings,
bedding, concrete thrust blocks, pipe restraints, backfill, connection to
building service piping and to existing municipal utility water source.
B. Valves:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes valve, fittings and accessories, and
installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Waterworks Association (AWWA) “Standards”.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and
accessories.
B. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
02510
Water Distribution
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and
invert elevations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with City of Denton specifications and details.
B. Valves: Manufacturer’s name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Shall be approved by City of Denton.
B. Pipe:
1. AWWA C900 PVC, blue in color, Class 200 (DR14) for 8” diameter and
smaller, Class 150 (DR18) for larger than 8” diameter.
2. AWWA C150 D.I., w/ polyethylene encasement (AWWA C105).
C. Valves: Mueller, M&H, or Waterous – 300 psi test, w/ polyethylene encasement
(AWWA C509).
D. Fittings: US Pipe, American or approved equal, Class 250 D.I., polyethylene
encasement (AWWA C105), w/ Mega-Lugs, or approved equal, and concrete
thrust blocking. All bolts to be “Cor-Ten” or approved equal.
E. Tapping Sleeves & Valve: Full body D.I.
F. Water Service: Type K copper.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that municipal utility water main size, location and invert are as indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
02510
Water Distribution
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with City of Denton specifications and details.
B. Set valves and hydrants on solid bearing.
C. PVC pipe shall have Class F1 embedment. D.I. pipe shall have Class F3
embedment.
3.4 DISINFECT ION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with City of Denton specifications.
3.5 TESTING
A. All waterlines shall be visual and hydrostatically tested in accordance with City of
Denton specifications.
B. All trenches shall be compaction tested in accordance with City of Denton
specifications.
3.6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide water service per City of Denton requirements.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed per City of Denton requirements.
B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work,
replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
02512
CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02512 – CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section governs the construction of exterior brush finish concrete paving, walks, and
curb and gutter, complete, and as indicated on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03200 – Reinforcing Steel
C. Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
D. Section 02220 - Earthwork
1.3 REFERENCES - See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE - See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.5 TESTS - See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR BRUSH FINISH CONCRETE
A. Portland Cement: Type IA, ASTM C175. (Air Entrained at 4% to 6%)
B. Aggregates: See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and
shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 03310 -Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
D. Admixtures
Provide admixtures produced by nationally recognized manufacturers. Do not
use admixtures which have not been auth orized in writing by the Owner.
02512
CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. Mix Design
Provide Mix Design as approved by the City of Denton and a demonstrated record of
performance. Submit Mix Design for approval with product submittals.
F. Expansion joint material shall be 1/2-inch thick bituminous impregnated fiber,
ASTM D1751, manufactured for use as expansion joint material, u nless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
G. Reinforcing shall be deformed billet steel reinforcing bars conforming to Section
03200 – Reinforcing Steel.
H. Curing Compound
Provide a liquid-type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM
C309. Use Type 1, clear with fugitive dye, for exterior surface, products offered
by:
Horncure 30D; A. C. Horn/WR. Grade
Clear - Bond; Guardian Chemical Co.
LR 151; Protex Ind., Inc.
or approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete except as amended herein.
3.2 SLOPES
Provide grade stakes not more than 25-feet apart for all pavement construction. Check
tops of forms for grade before placing concrete. Introduce short vertical curves in walks
as shown and at points where change in walk grade exceeds 3%. Slope pavement in
the direction of drainage as indicated on the Drawings. Make slight adjus tments in
slopes at intersections with existing pavement as necessary or directed by the Owner to
match finish grade with existing conditions.
3.3 DIMENSIONS
Concrete pavement shall be of one-course construction and of the thickness and widths
shown on the drawings.
02512
CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.4 FINISHES
A. Vibrate or tamp and screed the concrete true to grade and section, bring
sufficient mortar to the surface for finishing, and give a wood or carpet -float finish.
Round all edges, including those along expansion joints and grooves, (unless
grooves are saw cut) to a 1/4-inch radius.
B. Brush Finish Concrete
Provide a light brush finish to parking lot, drives, curb and gutter, and all areas so
designated on the drawings. Brush strokes shall be at 90 º to the long axis of the
area receiving the finish.
C. Architectural Finishes
Provide architectural finishes as indicated in Drawings. See Section 03366 –
Colored and Stamped Concrete Paving.
3.5 JOINTING
A. Contractor to submit pavement jointing plan for approval prior to construction.
B. Expansion Joints
Provide 1/2-inch transverse expansion joints, with premolded filler at pavement
intersections and where pavement abuts other fixed structures. Provide
expansion joints at 48-ft. intervals in curb and gutter and in walks, unless
indicated otherwise on the drawings. Expansion joints shall be placed vertically
and shall extend the full depth thereof; the expansion joint filler shall extend to
within 1/4-inch of the surface.
C. Control Joint (Contraction Joints, Grooves)
Between expansion joints, hand tool grooves or cut control joints 1/8 to 1/4 -inch
wide and at least 1-1/2-inch deep, or T/5, whichever is greater. Place at intervals
of 12-ft. on center, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
C. Joint Filler and Joint Sealing
Joint filler and joint sealant shall comply with Items 2.2.9 and 2.2.10 of Standard
Specifications for Public Construction, North Central Texas, latest edition.
Color of Joint Filler to be approved by Owner’s Representative.
02512
CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.6 CONCRETE CURING
A. General
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for
the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of
the concrete. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the
concrete surface after placing and finishing.
Continue curing for at least 120 cumulative hours during which the concrete has
been exposed to air temperatures above 50 ºF. Avoid rapid drying at the end of
the curing period.
B. Miscellaneous Concrete Walks a nd Paving
Provide membrane curing by applying the specified membrane forming and
curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as the water film has
disappeared. Apply uniformly in a 2 coat continuous operation in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas which are subjected to heavy rainfall
within 3 hours after initial applications. Maintain the continuity of the coating and
repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period.
3.7 PROTECTION
Remove no forms for at least 8 hours after initial set. Protect new concrete from
pedestrian and automotive traffic for a period of 3 days after pouring.
END OF SECTION
02515
CONCRETE WALKS
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02515 – CONCRETE WALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Provisions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section covers the labor, materials, equipment and services needed for construction
of concrete sidewalks (including handicap ramps), complete as indicated on the
drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK
B. SECTION 03200 - REINFORCING STEEL
C. SECTION 03310 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D. SECTION 02220 - EARTHWORK
E. SECTION 02512 - CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING
F. SECTION 03366 – COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE PAVING
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Construct 4 ft. by 4 ft. test panels of each finish for examination and approval by the
Owner. Do not begin work until Owner and Landscape Architect has approved test
panel. Construct as many test panels as necessary to create finishes which achieve
Owner's approval. Pavement which does not match the appropriate approved test
panel, in the Owner's judgment, will be rejected and shall be removed immediately, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR BRUSH FINISH CONCRETE
A. Portland Cement: Type IA, ASTM C175. (Air Entrained at 4% to 6%)
B. Aggregates: See Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
02515
CONCRETE WALKS
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3600 psi at 28 days and
shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place
Concrete.
D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by nationally recognized manufacturers.
Do not use admixtures which have not been authorized in writing by the Owner.
E. Slump: 4 inch maximum, 4 inch minimum, measured at point of deposit.
F. Mix Design: Provide Mix Design which has a demonstrated record of performance.
Submit Mix Design for approval with product submittals.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion Joint
1. Expansion Joint filler shall be 3/4" redwood with removable wood zip strip
manufactured for use as expansion joint material.
2. Joint sealant shall be Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, self leveling, two
component urethane, as manufactured by Sonneborn Corp. Submit joint
sealant colors to Landscape Architect for approval prior to construction.
B. Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing shall be deformed billet steel reinforcing bars conforming to Section
03200 – Reinforcing Steel.
C. Curing Compound
Provide a liquid-type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM
C309. Use Type 1, clear with fugitive dye, for exterior surface: Products offered
by:
Horncure 30D; A. C. Horn/W.R. Grace
Clear - Bond; Guardian Chemical Co.
LR 151; Protex Ind., Inc.
or approved equal
D. Key Way for Construction Joints
1. Vulco Screed Joint, Type 1, with No. 8150 vinyl screed cap, as manufactured
by Vulcan Metal Products, Inc., Birmingham, Alabama; Available from Lofland
Co. (817) 838-6811.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
02515
CONCRETE WALKS
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. 1 GENERAL
See Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, except as amended herein.
3.2 SLOPES
Provide grade stakes not more than 25 feet apart for all walk construction. Check tops
of forms for grade before placing concrete. Introduce short vertical curves in walks as
shown and at points where change in walk grade exceeds 3%. Provide 1/4-inch per foot
crown or cross slope in the direction of drainage as indicated on the Drawings. Pitch
walks to adjacent drainage routes and make slight adjustments in slopes at walk
intersections as necessary or directed to provide proper drainage.
3.3 DIMENSIONS
Concrete walks shall be of one-course construction and of the thickness and widths
shown on the Drawings.
3.4 FINISHES
A. Vibrate or tamp and screed the concrete true to grade and section, bring sufficient
mortar to the surface for finishing, and give a wood or carpet-float finish. Round all
edges, including those along expansion joints and grooves, to a 1/4 inch radius.
B. All walks shall have a medium brush finish, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
C. Architectural Finishes: As indicated on Drawings. See Section 03366 Colored and
Stamped Concrete Paving.
3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS
Provide 3/4 inch transverse expansion joints, with redwood filler as indicated on
drawings and at walk intersections and where walks abut other fixed structures. At walk
intersections, the required expansion joints shall be located at the end of each fillet.
Expansion joints shall be at right angles to the walk and extend the full depth thereof.
3.6 CONTROL JOINT (CONTRACTION JOINTS, GROOVES)
Between expansion joints, cut control joints 1/8 to 1/4 inch wide and at least one inch
deep, or T/5, whichever is greater. Spacing to be equal to the sidewalk width unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
02515
CONCRETE WALKS
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.7 JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANT
Joint filler and joint sealant shall comply with Items 2.2.9 and 2.2.10 of Standard
Specifications for Public Construction, North Central Texas, latest edition.
Color of Joint Filler to be approved by Owner’s Representative.
3.7 CONCRETE CURING
Concrete walks shall be cured in accordance with Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place
Concrete of these Specifications.
3.8 PROTECTION
Remove no forms for at least 8 hours after initial set. Protect concrete walks from
pedestrian and automotive traffic for a period of 3 days after pouring.
END OF SECTION
02580
PAVEMENT MARKING
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02580 – PAVEMENT MARKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Paint striping of existing paving as indicated and detailed on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Paint for pavement marking shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-115E, Paint,
Traffic, Highway, color to be approved Landscape Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METHODS OF APPLICATION
A. Equipment
All machines, tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be
approved by the Owner's representative and shall be maintained in satisfactory
operating condition.
1. Paint Application
The equipment for applying paint to pavements shall be self-propelled or
mobile drawn pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of
atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. The machine
shall be capable of applying the stripe widths indicated, shall have a speed
during application not less than 5 miles per hour and shall be capable of
applying the paint at the coverage rate specified in paragraph APPLICATION,
at an even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges. Equipment used for
marking pavements shall be capable of placing the prescribed number of lines
at a single pass as solid lines, intermittent lines or a combination of solid and
intermittent lines using a maximum of three different colors of paint as
specified.
The paint applicator shall have paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity
and suitable gages to apply paint in accordance with the requirements
specified. The tanks shall be equipped with suitable air-driven mechanical
agitators. The spray mechanism shall be equipped with quick-action valves
conveniently located, and shall include necessary pressure regulators and
02580
PAVEMENT MARKING
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
gages in full view and reach of the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed
in the paint supply lines to insure freedom from residue and foreign matter that
may cause malfunction of the spray guns. Pneumatic spray guns shall be
provided for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile paint
applicator cannot be used.
2. Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses and nozzles of
proper size and capacity as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. The
compressor shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 cubic feet of air
per minute at a pressure not less than 90 pounds per square inch at the nozzle
for each nozzle used.
B. Surface Penetration
New concrete pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a period of not less
than ten days, and asphalt surfaces for thirty days before application of marking
materials. All surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned before application
of the paint. Dust. dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by
sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water or a combination of
these methods as required. Rubber deposits, surface laitance, and other coatings
adhering to the pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes,
sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion as directed. Where oil
or grease is present on pavements to be marked, the affected areas shall be
scrubbed with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other
approved detergent or degreaser and rinsed thoroughly after each application.
After cleaning, the oil soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to prevent
bleeding through the new paint.
C. Application
1. Rate of Application: Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement surface to
be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet per gallon.
2. Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, and only when the air and
pavement temperatures are above 40ºF and less than 95ºF. The paint
temperature shall be maintained within these same limits. Paint shall be
applied pneumatically with approved equipment and at the rate of coverage
specified herein. The Contractor shall provide guidelines and templates as
necessary to control paint application.
02580
PAVEMENT MARKING
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be
strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and so there will be no
pickup, displacements, or discoloration by tires or traffic. If there is a
deficiency in drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued
until the cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected. If discoloration
of the paint occurs due to bleeding of bituminous materials, the paint should be
applied in two coats. A light coat of paint should first be applied at a coverage
of about 35 to 40 percent of the specified coverage. After drying, a second
coat should be applied to complete the specified coverage.
END OF SECTION
02830 - 1
CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02830 1
CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS 2
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 4
A. Furnish and install chain link fence and gates for soccer fields, baseball outfields, 5
dugouts and backstops. 6
1.2 SUBMITTALS 7
A. Shop drawings on backstops, fencing, and gates. 8
B. Material certifications and product data. 9
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 10
A. Fencing components shall conform to Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute 11
(CLFMI) Product Manual (Standard Guide for Metallic Coated Chain Link Fence and 12
Fabric) and applicable ASTM standards. 13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 14
2.1 FENCING 15
A. The entire chainlink fencing system including fabric, line, terminal posts and corner 16
posts, rails, steel and iron parts, and braces shall be hot dipped galvanized-after weaving. 17
2.2 PIPE 18
A. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1083 Specification for Pipe, Steel, 19
Hot Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 20
B. Pipe shall conform to following size and weight requirements and in accordance with 21
ASTM F 1083 for Schedule 40 pipe. 22
23
Nominal Pipe
Size (NPS)
Outside Diameter
(inches)
Wall Thickness
(Inches)
Weight
(lbs./ft)
1-1/4 1.660 0.140 2.27
2 2.375 0.154 3.65
2-1/2 2.875 0.203 5.80
3 3.500 0.216 7.58
3-1/2 4.000 0.226 9.12
4 4.500 0.237 10.80
6 6.625 0.280 18.99
24
Note: The dimensionless designator NPS (minimal pipe size) has been substituted in 25
this specification for such traditional terms as nominal diameter, size and minimal 26
size. 27
28
C. Pipe shall be coated inside and outside by the hot-dip process, with the weight of the 29
zinc coating not less than 1.8 oz/sf (of the surface being coated). 30
02830 - 2
CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.3 FABRIC 1
A. All chain link fabric shall be No. 6 or 9 gauge as indicated on the drawings, 2-inch 2
mesh, coated steel chain link wire which shall stand a minimum tensile strength of 90,000 3
psi based upon cross sectional area of wire. All fencing shall have knuckled selvage. 4
B. Fencing shall be No. 9 gauge fabric. 5
C. Wire Coating: Galvanized coating shall be a minimum of 2 ounces per square foot of 6
wire surface conforming to ASTM A392 Class 2, Hot Dip Process after weaving. 7
D. Fabric Test: Submit a manufacturer's certified test result that zinc coating material is a 8
minimum of 2 ounces per square foot of wire. 9
2.4 TOP RAIL 10
A. Fencing outside diameter per plans, with outside sleeve type couplings at least 7 inches 11
long, one coupling in every 5 to have spring to take up expansion and contraction of rail. 12
Fabric tied to top rail every 24 inches with No. 9 gauge aluminum tie wires. Reference 13
NPS chart 2.2 B 14
2.5 BOTTOM AND MIDDLE RAIL 15
A. Bottom and middle rails for fencing shall conform to requirements for top rail. 16
B. Fencing – 4 ft. height: bottom rail shall conform to requirements for top rail 17
C. Fencing – 6 ft. height: bottom rail shall conform to requirements for top rail. 18
D. Fencing – 16 ft. height: provide middle and bottom rails per detail, to conform to 19
requirements for top rail. 20
2.6 LINE POSTS 21
A. All line posts shall conform to the following specifications and conditions as shown on 22
the drawings. 23
B. Fencing shall have Schedule 40, galvanized line posts of the sizes indicated on the 24
drawings. 25
C. Spacing of line posts shall not exceed 10 ft. on center. 26
D. Line posts to be equipped with No. 9 gauge aluminum wire ties on 14-inch centers. 27
2.7 TERMINAL POSTS 28
A. End, corner and pull posts shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. End, corner and pull 29
posts for fencing shall be the sizes indicated on the drawings. Posts to be equipped with 30
1/4-inch by 3/4-inch tension bar, #11 gauge by 1-inch wide tension bands and 3/8-inch 31
diameter carriage bolts and nuts; bands on approximately 14-inch centers. Posts to be 32
equipped with hot dip galvanized malleable cast iron or pressed steel cap of 33
manufacturer's design. 34
2.8 BRACES 35
A. 3/8-inch galvanized rod trusses from line post back to the terminal post complete with 36
truss tightener. 37
02830 - 3
CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.9 SWING GATE FRAME 1
A. Round tubular members, welded at all corners. Welded joints shall be coated in 2
accordance with Practice ASTM A 780, employing a zinc-rich paint. 3
2.10 GATE FABRIC 4
A. Same type as used in fence construction. 5
B. Securely attach to frame at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. 6
2.11 GATE HINGES 7
A. Structural, capable of supporting the gate leaf and allow the gate to open and close 8
without binding. Coatings to match the fence post coating specification. 9
B. Permit the gate to swing a full 180 degrees (outward from playing fields). 10
2.12 SINGLE GATE LATCH 11
A. Capable of retaining the gate in a closed position and include provision for a padlock. 12
Coating to match the fence post coating specification. 13
2.13 BACKSTOP 14
A. N/A 15
2.14 CONCRETE POST FOOTINGS AND EDGING 16
A. All concrete used shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days using 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard 17
of mix with a maximum of 7 gallons of water per sack. Concrete work shall conform to 18
Section 03300. 19
2.15 TOLERANCE 20
A. Standard mill tolerance on all framework members and chain link fabric will apply. 21
PART 3 - EXECUTION 22
3.1 INSTALLATION 23
A. Install fence by skilled and experienced fence erectors and on lines and grades as shown 24
on Drawings. All posts shall be set plumb, and as indicated on Drawings. Top rails shall 25
run with finish grade with no discernable humps, valleys, or bends. 26
3.2 COORDINATION 27
A. Coordinate work as to location of posts and timing of post placement. Post footings 28
shall be installed to allow for placement of concrete grade beams, mowing strips, and 29
other surfaces. Locate top of post footings 4 inches below finish grade in lawn areas. 30
3.3 WELDING 31
A. All welds shall be flush and free of sharp edges, spurs, welding flux, etc., and shall 32
conform to AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction." All welds shall be 33
coated with cold ZRC galvanizing compound. 34
B. Gate frames shall be welded. 35
02830 - 4
CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.4 FENCE FRAMING INSTALLATION 1
A. Install chain link fence is accordance with ASTM F 567 and manufacturer’s 2
instructions. 3
B. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical 4
direction of 30 degrees or more. 5
C. Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid-height for fences 6 feet and over, on each 6
side of terminal posts. Firmly attach with fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these 7
points. Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb. 8
D. Tension Wire: Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric (where bottom rail is not 9
provided). Install tension wire before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. 10
Secure tension wire to fabric with 12-1/2 gauge hog rings 24” o.c. 11
E. Fasteners: Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security. 12
3.5 FABRIC ORIENTATION 13
A. Place fabric on inside of fields, except as shown on Drawings. 14
B. Leave approximately 2” between finish grade and bottom selvage. 15
END OF SECTION 16
02930
HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
Page 1 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02930 - HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE
GROWTH MEDIUM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies a hydraulically-applied, 100% biodegradable, High
Performance-Flexible Growth Medium (HP-FGM) that is manufactured in the United
States and is composed of 100% recycled thermally refined (within a pressure
vessel) wood fibers, crimped interlocking man-made biodegradable fibers, mineral
activators, naturally derived crosslinked biopolymers and water absorbents. The HP-
FGM is photo-sanitized, free from plastic netting, requires no curing period and upon
application forms an intimate bond with the soil surface to create a continuous,
porous, absorbent and flexible erosion resistant blanket that allows for rapid
germination and accelerated plant growth.
B. Related Sections: Other Specification Sections, which directly relate to the work of
this Section include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Section 02300 – Earthwork
2. Section 02930 – Hydraulic Seeding
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
Include required substrate preparation, list of materials and application rate.
B. Certifications: Manufacturer shall submit a letter of certification that the product
meets or exceeds all technical and packaging requirements.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in UV and weather-resistant factory labeled
packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Protect from damage, weather, excessive temperatures and
construction operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. PROFILE Products LLC
750 Lake Cook Road – Suite 440
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089
800-366-1180 (Fax 847-215-0577)
www.profileproducts.com
02930
HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
Page 2 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Seed Mix: Seed mix descriptions, application rates, and acceptable manufacturers
are listed in Section 02930 - Hydraulic Seeding.
B. The HP-FGM shall be Flexterra® HP-FGM
and conform to the following property
values when uniformly applied at a rate of 3500 pounds per acre (3900
kilograms/hectare) under laboratory conditions.
Property Test Method Req. Value (English)Req. Value (SI)
Physical
Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D65661 12 oz/yd2 minimum 407 g/m2 minimum
Thickness ASTM D65251 0.22 inch minimum 5.6 mm. minimum
Wet Bond Strength ASTM D68181 9 lb/ft 131 N/m
Ground Cover ASTM D65671 99% minimum 99% minimum
Water Holding
Capacity
ASTM D7367 1700% minimum 1700% minimum
Material Color Observed Green Green
Performance
Cover Factor2 Large Scale
Testing4
0.01 maximum 0.01 maximum
% Effectiveness3 Large Scale
Testing4
99 % minimum 99 % minimum
Cure time Observed 0 - 2 hours 0 - 2 hours
Vegetation
Establishment
ASTM D73221 800 % minimum 800 % minimum
Yield5 Calculated 2.6 minimum 2245 minimum
Kinetic Energy
Absorption Potential6 Calculated 2.0 minimum 734 minimum
Environmental
Functional Longevity7 ASTM D5338 Up to 18 months Up to 18 months
Ecotoxicity EPA 2021.0 96-hr LC50 > 100%96-hr LC50 > 100%
Effluent Turbidity Large Scale
Testing4
100 NTU maximum 100 NTU maximum
Biodegradability ASTM D5338 100% minimum 100% minimum
1. ASTM test methods developed for Rolled Erosion Control Products and have been
modified to accommodate Hydraulically-Applied Erosion Control Products.
2. Cover Factor is calculated as soil loss ratio of treated surface versus an untreated
control surface.
3. % Effectiveness = One minus Cover Factor multiplied by 100%.
4. Large scale testing conducted at Utah Water Research Laboratory. For specific testing
information please contact a Profile technical service representative at 866-325-6262.
5. Yield = (Mass per Unit Area)*(Thickness)*(Ground Cover Percentage).
6. Kinetic Energy Absorption Potential = (Wet Bond Strength)*(Thickness)
7. Functional Longevity is the estimated time period, based upon ASTM D5338 testing and
field observations, that a material can be anticipated to provide erosion control and
agronomic benefits as influenced by composition, as well as site-specific conditions,
including; but not limited to – temperature, moisture, light conditions, soils, biological
activity, vegetative establishment and other environmental factors.
02930
HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
Page 3 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.3 COMPOSITION
A. All components of the HP-FGM shall be pre-packaged by the Manufacturer to assure
both material performance and compliance with the following values. No chemical
additives with the exception of fertilizer, soil pH modifiers, extended-term dyes and
biostimulant materials should be added to this product.
1. Thermally Processed (within a pressure vessel) Wood Fiber – 80% + 3%
Heated to a temperature greater than 380 degrees Fahrenheit (193 degrees
Celsius) for 5 minutes at a pressure greater than 50 psi (345 kPa)
Crosslinked Biopolymers and Water Absorbents – 10% + 1%
Crimped, Man-made Biodegradable Interlocking Fibers – 5% + 1%
Micro-Pore Granules – 5% + 1%
2.4 PACKAGING
A. Bags: Net Weight – 50 lb, UV and weather-resistant plastic film
Pallets: Weather-proof, stretch-wrapped with UV resistant pallet cover
Pallet Quantity: 40 bags/pallet or 1 ton/pallet
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATE AND SEEDBED PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions where materials will be applied. Apply
product to geotechnically stable slopes that have been designed and constructed
to divert runoff away from the face of the slope. Do not proceed with installation
until satisfactory conditions are established.
B. Depending upon project sequencing and intended application, prepare seedbed
in compliance with other specifications under Section 1.01 B
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Strictly comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations. Use approved hydro-spraying machines with fan-type nozzle
(50-degree tip). To achieve optimum soil surface coverage, apply HP-FGM from
opposing directions to soil surface. Rough surfaces (rocky terrain, cat tracks and
ripped soils) may require higher application rates to achieve 100% cover. Slope
interruption devices or water diversion techniques are recommended when slope
lengths exceed 100 feet (30 m). Maximum slope length is for product
applications on a 3H:1V slope. For application on steeper slopes, slope
interruption lengths may need to be decreased based on actual site conditions.
Not recommended for channels or areas with concentrated water flow. This
product may be applied on saturated soils and does not require a curing period to
be effective. No chemical additives with the exception of fertilizer, liming and
biostimulant materials should be added to this product.
02930
HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
Page 4 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. For Erosion Control and Revegetation: To ensure proper application rates,
measure and stake area. For maximum performance, apply HP-FGM in a two-
step process*:
1.Step One: Apply fertilizer with specified prescriptive agronomic formulations
and 50% of seed with a small amount of HP-FGM for visual metering.
2.Step Two: Mix balance of seed and apply HP-FGM at a rate of 50 lb per 125
gallons (23 kg/475 liters) of water over freshly seeded surfaces. Confirm
loading rates with equipment manufacturer. Do not leave seeded surfaces
unprotected, especially if precipitation is imminent.
*Depending upon site conditions HP-FGM may be applied in a one-step process
where all components may be mixed together in single tank loads. Consult with
Manufacturer for further details.
Best results and more rapid curing are achieved at temperatures exceeding 60°F
(15°C). Curing times may be accelerated in high temperature, low humidity
conditions with product applied on dry soils.
Over-application of product may inhibit germination and plant growth.
C. Mixing: A mechanically agitated hydraulic-application machine is strongly
recommended:
1.Fill 1/3 of mechanically agitated hydroseeder with water. Turn pump on for
15 seconds and purge and pre-wet lines. Turn pump off.
2.Turn agitator on and load low density materials first (i.e. seed).
3.Continue slowly filling tank with water while loading fiber matrix into tank.
4.Consult application and loading charts to determine number of bags to be
added for desired area and application rate. Mix at a rate of 50 lb of HP-
FGM per 125 gallons (23 kg/475 liters). Contact Equipment manufacturer to
confirm optimum mixing rates.
5.All HP-FGM should be completely loaded before water level reaches 75% of
the top of tank.
6.Top off with water and mix until all fiber is fully broken apart and hydrated
(minimum of 10 minutes — increase mixing time when applying in cold
conditions). This is very important to fully activate the bonding additives and
to obtain proper viscosity.
7.Add fertilizer
8.Shut off recirculation valve to minimize potential for air entrainment within
the slurry.
9.Slow down agitator and start applying with a 50-degree fan tip nozzle.
10.Spray in opposing directions for maximum soil coverage.
02930
HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
Page 5 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Application Rates: These application rates are for standard conditions.
Designers may wish to reduce rates to encourage faster vegetation
establishment or may need to increase application rates on rough surfaces.
Slope Gradient / Condition English SI
< 4H to 1V 2500 lb/ac 2800 kg/ha
> 4H to 1V and < 3H to 1V 3000 lb/ac 3400 kg/ha
> 3H to 1V and < 2H to 1V 3500 lb/ac 3900 kg/ha
> 2H to 1V and < 1H to 1V 4000 lb/ac 4500 kg/ha
> 1H to 1V 4500 lb/ac 5100 kg/ha
Below ECB or TRM 1500 lb/ac 1700 kg/ha
As infill for TRM* 3500 lb/ac 3900 kg/ha
*Use only approved and tested TRMs to create the GreenArmor™ System
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After application, thoroughly flush the tank, pumps and hoses to remove all
material. Wash all material from the exterior of the machine and remove any
slurry spills. Once dry, material will be more difficult to remove.
B. Clean spills promptly. Advise owner of methods for protection of treated areas.
Do not allow treated areas to be trafficked or subjected to grazing.
D ENGLISH SI
END SECTION 02930
02938
TURF AND GRASSES
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 02938 - TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: This work includes all labor, materials and equipment for soil
preparation, fertilization, planting and other requirements regarding turfgrass sodding
shown on drawings.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Section 02300, Earthwork.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For exotic plant materials: American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature,
Second Edition, 1942.
B. For native materials
1. Manual of the Vascular Plants of Texas by Correll and Johnston
2. Check List of Vascular Plants of Texas by Hatch
3. Flora of North Central Texas by Shinners and Moller
C. Texas Seed Law & Regulations – latest edition.
D. ASTM – American Standard Testing Material
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples, certificates and specifications of sod, fertilizer, compost, soil amendments or
other materials may be requested by the Project Manager.
B. All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be
subject to verification by the Project Manager.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Sod: Harvesting and planting operations shall be coordinated with not more than forty
eight hours elapsing between the harvesting and planting. In times of extreme heat
(over 95 degrees Fahrenheit) period of time between harvesting and planting to be no
more than 24 hours. Verification of harvesting time will be required.
B. Fertilizer
1. Unopened bags labeled with the analysis.
2. Conform to Texas Fertilizer Law.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The contractor who plants the sod is responsible for supervision of his crew, while
planting the sod and maintaining the sod until the project is accepted by the Owner.
02938
TURF AND GRASSES
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOD
A. The sod shall be of the type shown on the drawings and shall consist of stolons, leaf
blades, rhizomes and roots with a healthy, virile system of dense, thickly matted roots
throughout the soil of the sod for a thickness not less than one inch. Sod shall be
alive, healthy and vigorous and shall be free of insects, disease, stones and
undesirable foreign materials and grasses. Sod shall have been produced on growing
beds of clay or clay-loam topsoil. The sod shall not be harvested or planted when its
moisture condition is so excessively wet or dry that its survival will be affected. If sod
is stacked, it shall be kept moist and shall be stacked roots-to-roots and grass-to-
grass.
B. The sod shall be cut in strips four feet wide, or as called for on plan, to be laid parallel
with the contours.
2.2 FERTILIZER
A. All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or containers clearly labeled showing the
analysis.
B. All fertilizer shall be in acceptable condition for distribution and shall be applied
uniformly over the planted area two weeks after sodding.
C. All fertilizer shall have an analysis of 3-1-2 or as designated on the plans. The
fertilizer rate shall be 45 pounds of nitrogen per acre.
2.3 WATER
A. The water shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be clean and free of industrial
wastes or other substances harmful to the germination of the seed or to the growth of
the vegetation. The amount of water will vary according to the weather variables.
Generally, the sod should be soaked one time per day for three weeks or until
established. Soaking is mandatory after spreading the fertilizer.
2.4 COMPOST
All compost material is to be totally organic and decomposed for at least nine months. All
compost is to be clean and free of fungus, disease, live plants, seed, excessive cotton lint
and any harmful chemicals. Raw organics are not acceptable.
A. Dyno Dirt as produced by City of Denton using yard trimmings and biosolids or
approved equal.
B. Contact: Gayla Wright, City of Denton, 940-349-8290 (office) or 940-390-9352
(mobile).
C. Sample and Specification Submittal: Submit a producer's specification and a quart
sample of the compost proposed for the Project Manager's approval.
2.5 TURF TOP DRESSING
All turf top dressing is to be totally organic and decomposed for at least nine months. All
turf top dressing is to be clean and free of fungus, disease, live plants, seed, excessive
cotton lint and any harmful chemicals.
02938
TURF AND GRASSES
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Amend with top soil with a top dressing suited for need as determined by Landscape
Architect from review of soil test data: Use either "Enriched Top Soil", "Dairy Manure
Top Dressing", "Professional Top Dressing" or “PH Balanced Top Dressing" as
produced by Soil Building Systems, Inc., of Dallas, (866) 764-5727, or an approved
equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All turfing operations are to be executed across the slope, parallel to finished grade
contours.
3.2 SOIL PREPARATION
A. Scarify subgrade to a depth of four inches (4”) before depositing the required topsoil.
B. Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the topsoil, destroy existing vegetation and
prepare an acceptable sod bed. All areas shall be tilled with a heavy duty disc or a
chisel-type breaking plow; chisels set not more than ten inches apart. Initial tillage
shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, and then followed by a disc
harrow. Depth of tillage shall be five inches. A heavy duty rototiller may be used for
areas to be planted with sod.
C. Cleaning: Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials,
rubbish, weeds and stones larger than one inch in diameter.
D. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be topdressed
with one-half inch compost and then shall be leveled; fine graded, and drug with a
weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of
ruts, depressions, humps and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil
preparation step to be completed before planting.
3.3 PLANTING
A. Prior to laying the sod, the planting bed shall be raked smooth to true grade and
moistened to a depth of four inches, but not to the extent causing puddling.
B. Remove and dispose of stones 1/2 inch or larger, sticks, roots, other debris and grass
stubble exposed during this operation.
C. Do not vary final grades more than 0.1 feet from finish elevations.
D. Receive approval of fine grading from Architect prior to grass planting.
E. The sod shall be laid smoothly, tightly butted edge to edge, and with staggered joints.
The sod shall be pressed firmly into the sod bed by mechanical roller so as to
eliminate all air pockets, provide a true and even surface, and insure knitting without
displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas.
F. Following compaction, compost shall be used to fill all cracks between sods. Excess
compost shall be worked into the grass with suitable equipment and shall be well
watered. The quantity of compost shall be such that it will cause no smothering or
burning of the grass.
02938
TURF AND GRASSES
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.4 FERTILIZING
A. First Application (Twenty-one days after planting):
1. Distribute 10-10-10 fertilizer uniformly at rate of 15 pounds per 1,000 square feet
and rake into seed bed prior to sodding.
B. Second Application:
1. Repeat fertilization with 20-5-10 commercial fertilizer after first cutting at rate of 15
pounds per 1,000 square feet.
C. Water: Immediately water in fertilizer after each application.
3.5 PERFORMANCE
A. Establish a dense lawn of permanent grasses, free from lumps and depressions.
B. Re-grass any area failing to show uniform cover. Such replacement shall continue
until a dense lawn is established. Scattered bare or dead spots will not be allowed.
C. Mow and edge lawn a minimum of three times, each time after lawn has reached a
height of 2-1/2 inches. Mow to a height of 2 inches returning clippings to lawn.
D. Keep lawn areas weeded removing broadleaf and grassy weeds as required.
3.6 GRADE MAINTENANCE AND EROSION DAMAGE
A. Maintain original grades of lawn areas after commencement of planting and during
maintenance period.
B. Provide surface repair to ruts, ridges, tracks. Replant areas as required for final
acceptance.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE
A. The work will be accepted when a dense, undamaged stand of grass, free of weeds, is
achieved, as approved by Landscape Architect/Owner.
3.8 CLEAN UP
A. Keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage areas. Remove
trash and debris resulting from lawn preparation from site daily as work progresses.
Leave paved areas in a broom clean condition by sweeping or hosing.
END OF SECTION
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03100 – CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1,
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope. Furnish all material, labor, tools, equipment and related items required to
provide forms for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03200
2. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03310
3. Colored and Stamped Concrete Paving – Section 03366
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following publications of the American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition
shall apply to the extent applicable in each reference thereto:
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
B. Design Criteria.
1. Design formwork for loads and lateral pressures outlined in ACI 347, wind
loads as specified by controlling local building code, and such other loads
to which the form may be subjected. Comply with the requirements of
State and Federal safety standards.
2. Details of formwork shall comply with ACI 347.
3. Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces, unless indicated on
the Drawings.
C. Tolerances.
1. Construct formwork to insure that the concrete surfaces will comply with
tolerances set forth in ACI 301.
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plywood used for forms shall be Exterior-Type APA Class I as graded by the
American Plywood Association.
B. Steel forms shall be free of dents and other defects which would make them
susceptible to leakage or disfigurement of the finished concrete surface.
C. Form oil shall be a non-staining paraffin-base oil having a specific gravity of
between 0.8 and 0.9.
D. Release agent used shall be non-staining.
E. Form accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in the concrete, such as
ties and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. Non-fabricated
wire is not acceptable. The portion remaining within the concrete shall leave no
metal within 1" of the surface when the concrete is exposed to view. Spreader
cones on the ties shall not exceed 7/8" diameter. Design form ties to prevent
seepage of water along the tie.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Forms shall be tight to prevent leakage of grout or cement paste.
B. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts.
Take up all settlement during concrete placing operations. Brace forms against
lateral deflections.
C. All curvilinear formwork will be curved smoothly to avoid segmental tangents over
curved edges.
3.2 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Plywood and other wood surfaces not subject to shrinkage shall be sealed
against absorption of moisture from the concrete by either:
1. A field applied form oil or sealer, or
2. A factory applied non-absorptive liner.
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. When forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it shall be done prior to
erecting forms. Do not allow excess coating material to stand in puddles in the
forms or allowed to come in contact with the surfaces to which fresh concrete is
to be bonded.
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Clean form surfaces before use and re-use.
D. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to concrete
surfaces.
3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. The shores and supports shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its
specified 28-day strength, unless otherwise permitted.
B. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, cure the exposed
concrete by one of the methods specified in Section 03300.
C. Remove form ties as soon as possible after form removal, not to exceed 2
working days.
3.4 REMOVAL STRENGTH
A. When formwork removal is based on the concrete reaching its specified 28 day
strength, the concrete shall be presumed to have reached this strength when
either of the following conditions is met:
1. When test cylinders, field cured under the most unfavorable conditions
prevailing for any portion of the concrete represented, have reached the
required strength. Except for the field curing and age at test, the
cylinders shall be molded and tested as specified in Section 03300.
2. When the concrete has been cured as specified in Section 03300, for the
same length of time as the age at test of laboratory-cured cylinders which
have reached the required strength. The length of time the concrete has
been cured in the field shall be determined by the cumulative number of
days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which time
the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50
degrees and the concrete has been damp or sealed from evaporation and
loss of moisture.
END OF SECTION
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03100-A - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install form materials, water stops, and form accessories: including:
1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and
anchorage.
2. Openings for other work.
3. Form accessories.
4. Form stripping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Framework.
C. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to conform to
design and code requirements, so that resultant concrete conforms to required
shapes, lines, and dimensions. Formwork shall be sufficient to carry the wet
weight of concrete and a minimum of 20 psf construction live load.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design, construct, and erect formwork in accordance with ACI 347 and 301.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of
components to formwork.
B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover
over reinforcement, request instructions from A/E before proceeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Facing Materials:
1. Unexposed Finish Concrete: Any standard form materials that produce
structurally sound concrete. Provide lumber dressed on at least two
edges and one side for tight fit.
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Exposed Finish Concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth,
stain free final appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide
materials with sufficient strength to resist hydrostatic head without bow or
deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as follows:
a. Plywood: PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior
Grade, mill-oiled and edge-sealed.
b. Lumber: Southern Pine special, No. 2 grade, with stamp grade
clearly visible.
c. Steel: Minimum 16 gauge sheet, well matched and tight fitting.
d. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting,
stiffened to support weight of concrete.
2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Void Forms: Trapezoidal, wax impregnated cardboard cartons; biodegradable,
structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set;
manufactured by Saveway Carton Forms or equal.
2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap off; 3/4-inch break back dimension.
B. Form Release Agent: Material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or
impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on
concrete.
C. Corners: Chamfered wood or plastic strips; maximum possible lengths.
D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Section 04200.
E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gauge thick, longest possible lengths,
with alignment splines for joints, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing
to concrete formwork.
F. Nails, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient
strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that
dimensions agree with Drawings.
3.2 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in
accordance with requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork
subject to overstressing by construction loads.
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not
damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not
indicated on Drawings.
F. Provide chamfer strips on exposed edges unless drawings note otherwise.
G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect
forms from moisture or crushing.
3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded
items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special
finishes or applied coverings that are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of
untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of
concrete.
3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing
through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
D. Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and
intervals specified in Section 04300.
E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Install water stops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints
watertight.
G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate
cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing
water to drain.
03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms,
and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.5 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter.
Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-
icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete
construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means
to remove foreign matter.
3.6 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in
accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties,
and items are secure.
3.8 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to
carry its own weight and imposed loads.
B. Remove formwork progressively so no unbalanced loads are imposed on
structure.
C. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish
concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
D. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete
will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
03100-S
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03100-S CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to install
formwork and shoring for cast-in-place concrete, and installation into formwork of
items furnished by others, such as anchor bolts, setting plates, bearing plates,
anchorages, inserts, frames, nosings and other items to be embedded in
concrete.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400
2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100
3. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. It is Contractor's responsibility to design and engineer formwork.
B. Reference Standards:
1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
2. U.S. Product Standard for Softwood Plywood, Construction and Industrial
PS-1.
C. Allowable Tolerances: Except when close coordination and fitting of various
trades' work precludes allowance of tolerance, maximum total permissible
deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions shall be as stated
below. See and maintain forms in such manner as to ensure completed work
within specified tolerance limits.
1. Variation from plumb:
a. In lines and surfaces of arises:
In any 10 ft of length .....................1/4 in.
Maximum for the entire length .........1 in.
b. For exposed conspicuous lines:
In any 20 ft of length .................... 1/4 in.
Maximum for the entire length ......1/2 in.
2. Variation in sizes and location of
sleeves, floor and wall openings.....+/-1/4 in.
3. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions
of beams in thickness of slabs:
Minus................................................. 1/4 in.
03100-S
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Plus .................................................... 1/2 in.
4. Variation in steps................................ 1/4 in.
5. Variation in location of anchor bolts
unless provided with sleeves or other
means of adjustment..........................1/4 in.
D. Max. deflection of form facing materials at concrete surfaces exposed to view
shall be 1/240 of span between structural members.
1.4 A. Shop Drawings: Diagram of proposed construction joints not indicated on
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Forms: Wood, metal or other approved material that will not adversely affect
surface of concrete and will provide or facilitate obtaining specified surface finish.
1. Wood:
a. Unexposed Surfaces:
1. No.2 Common or Better Southern Yellow Pine lumber, sufficient
thickness to sustain loads to be imposed, dressed to uniform
smooth contact surfaces, readily removable, or:
2. Commercial Standard Douglas-Fir, moisture resistant, concrete
form plywood, not less than 5 ply, at least 3/4" thick, one side
smooth.
b. Exposed Surfaces: Non-absortive overlay plywood such as medium or high
density overlay, Finn-Form or equal.
B. Void box forms shall be wax-impregnated cardboard cartons, equal to those
manufactured by SureVoid Products Inc.or approved equal. Cover ribs and tops
shall be made of corrugated fiberboard capable of sustaining a load of six
hundred (600) pounds per square foot, (as evidenced by recorded independent
testing laboratory tests). All contact surfaces of void box forms shall be coated
with an approved moisture resistant compound, sized as indicated.
C. Form Accessories:
1. Form ties: Bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile
strength of 3,000 pounds when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable
in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would
leave a hole larger than 1" in diameter. Ties shall be of such construction
that, when forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1"
of finished surface.
2. Form Release Agent: Non-Staining, wax barrier type, Symons Corp.,
"Magic Cote" or equal.
3. Construction Joint Form: Burke Concrete Products "Keyed Kold Joint" or
equal.
03100-S
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. Formwork Construction:
1. Construct forms tight to prevent loss of mortar. Use chamfer strips in
corners of forms to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed
surfaces.
2. Camber formwork to compensate for deflections in formwork prior to
concrete attaining design strength.
3. Adjust shores and struts to take up settlement caused by concrete
placement.
4. Provide temporary openings in formwork to allow cleaning and
observation.
5. Construct forms for beams and girders so that sides may be removed
without disturbing bottom of form or its support.
6. Clean contact and screed surfaces of hardened concrete and foreign
materials prior to assembly.
B. Form Coatings:
1. Apply specified form release agent; follow manufacturer's direction.
2. Do not allow agent to puddle in forms or to contact hardened concrete
against which fresh concrete is to be placed.
3. Do not coat forms with material that will stain or disfigure exposed
concrete surfaces; do not use forms coated with such material.
C. Form Accessories:
1. Form Ties: Coat ties that are to be pulled from walls with cup grease or
other approved material to facilitate removal.
D. Construction Joints:
1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the
drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure,
and as acceptable to the Structural Engineer.
2. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls and
slabs; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for
slabs.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
Continue reinforcement across construction joints.
4. Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at points of contact between
slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Installation of Embedded Items:
1. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place
concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions
provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
03100-S
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
END OF SECTION 03100 - S
03200
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03200 – REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all concrete reinforcement as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI 315) - Manual of Standard Practice for
Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures
B. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement
of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete
reinforcement.
B. Submit mill test certificates of supplied reinforcement indicating physical and
chemical analysis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: Domestic deformed type, ASTM A615, Grade 60.
B. Galvanized Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A767.
C. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including
bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports
complying with CRSI recommendations. Wood, brick, and other devices will not
be acceptable.
03200
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the specified codes and standards, approved shop
drawings and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement
and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, grease and other
materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately form bar reinforcement to dimensions indicated. Bend stirrup and tie
bars around a pin of diameter not less than two times bar diameter. Bend other
bars around a pin of diameter not less than six times bar diameter. Bend bars
cold. Do not straighten or rebend in a manner that will injure material. After
fabrication bundle and tag with identifying metal tags securely wired in place.
D. Accurately position and secure metal reinforcement against displacement with
annealed iron wire ties, suitable clips at intersections, metal supports, chairs, and
hangers.
E. Avoid splices of bar reinforcement at points of maximum stress. All splices shall
conform to the requirements of Chapter 12, ACI 318-83, but shall in no case be
less than 36 bar diameters unless otherwise noted on plans. Stagger splices of
adjacent bars and provide corner bars corresponding in size and number to
adjacent bars.
END OF SECTION
03200-A
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03200-A - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install reinforcing steel and required supports for cast-in-place
concrete; include:
1. Reinforcing steel bars or fabricated steel bar for cast-in-place concrete.
2. Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, and spacers for supporting
reinforcement.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
D. CRSI - Manual of Practice.
E. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars.
F. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and
Nomenclature.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Indicate sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, wire fabric,
bending and cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting, and spacing
devices.
B. Furnish one complete set of final shop drawings to the testing laboratory for its
use in reinforcing placement inspection.
C. Manufacturers Literature: Submit for review, manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions for the proprietary splicing method used, to show
compliance with these specifications.
D. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical
and chemical analysis.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of
Standard Practice, and Documents 63 and 65.
B. Conform to ACI 301 or 315.
03200-A
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.5 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide reinforcement for field sample specified in Sections 03100 and 03300.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver reinforcement in bundles properly tagged showing quantity,
grade, and suitable identification marks to allow checking, sorting, and placing.
B. Storage: Store reinforcement off ground; cover; keep clean.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 or 60 ksi yield grade billet-steel deformed
bars, uncoated finish.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 18 gage annealed type or Acceptable patented system.
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Standard CRSI, galvanized; sized and
shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and
placement of concrete including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor
barrier puncture.
1. In exposed concrete (including painted) use plastic supports, hot-dipped
galvanized bar supports with plastic feet, or stainless steel.
2. Do not use standard supports in contract with form surfaces for concrete
that is to be sandblasted, tooled, or retarded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcing is to be installed only from Placement Drawings which have been
reviewed by A/E.
B. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings.
C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03300.
D. Tolerances:
1. Maintain surface clearance dimensions shown, plus or minus 1/4 inch.
2. Secure reinforcing with accessories and tie wire to prevent displacement
before and during concreting.
3. Concrete will not be poured if bars are not properly and securely placed
with adequate supports.
E. Dowels: Secure in position prior to pouring concrete.
03200-A
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
F. Interferences: Give notice whenever pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other
construction interferes with placement; obtain method of procedure to resolve
interference.
03200-A
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.2 SPLICES
A. Lap splice all bars up to 11 in accordance with standard detailing practice unless
otherwise shown on Drawings. Butt splice all 14 and 18 bars.
3.3 REPAIR
A. Remove and replace damaged bars if practicable.
B. Partially embedded bars that become damaged are to be restored to full capacity
as follows:
1. Bent Bars - Straighten by cold bending or with minimum heat (short of a
red glow).
2. Cracked or Broken Bars - Weld in new material equivalent to 100% of
base bar in accordance with AWS recommendations.
END OF SECTION
03200-S
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03200-S CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to
fabricate and place reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete, including bars,
welded wire fabric, ties and bar supports.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400
2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100
3. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
3. ASTM A615, Specification for Deformed Billet Steel Bars for Concrete.
4. ASTM A185, Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement.
5. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Fabricating:
a. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1"
b. Stirrups and ties: Plus or minus 1/2".
c. Members more than 8" but not over 2'-0" deep: Plus or minus
1/2".
d. Members more than 2'-0" deep: Plus or minus 1".
e. Crosswise of members: Space evenly within 2" of stated
separation.
f. Lengthwise of members: Plus or minus 2".
2. Maximum bar relocation to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,
conduits or other embedded item: 1 bar diameter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
03200-S
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Shop Drawings: Include complete bending diagrams, assembly diagrams,
splicing and laps, and rods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing
and accessories.
1. Show diagrammatic elevations of walls at scale large enough to clearly
show position and erection marks of marginal bars, around openings,
dowels, splices, etc., for these bars.
2. Show complete layout plan for each layer of reinforcing of structural slabs
and beams showing number, arrangement, spacing, location, marking,
orientation, etc., of reinforcement required for layer being described.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating
bar size, length and mark.
B. Unload reinforcing carefully to prevent damage. Store above ground in dry, well
drained area; protect from mud, dirt and corrosion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed billet steel bars, domestic manufacture,
Grades 40 and/or 60 as indicated on structural drawings.
B. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcing: ASTM A185, domestic manufacture, steel wire
spot welded at intersections and of size indicated.
C. Metal Accessories: Include spacers, chairs, bolsters, ties and other devices
necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement
in place, conforming to requirements to CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice for
Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Metal accessories shall be galvanized
where legs will be exposed in finished concrete surfaces.
D. Tie Wire: FS QQ-W-461, black enameled steel, 16 ga. min.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. In accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Before placing in work, thoroughly clean reinforcement of loose rust,
mill scale, dirt, oil and other coating which might tend to reduce bonding.
03200-S
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Reinspect reinforcing left protruding for future bonding, or following delay in
work, and reclean if necessary.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Bar Placement: In accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318 and CRSI "Manual for
Standard Practice".
1. Bending: Bend bars cold; do not heat reinforcing or bend by makeshift
methods. Discard bent, kinked or otherwise damaged bars.
2. Splices: In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Wire Fabric Placement:
1. Install in longest practicable length.
2. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly
over beams of continuous structures.
3. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap.
4. Keep wire in proper position during concrete placement.
5. All wire fabric shall be delivered in flat sheets, not rolled.
END OF SECTION 03200 - S
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03300-A - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for structural building frame, slabs on
fill or grade, and other concrete components associated with the building;
include:
1. Floors and slabs on fill on vapor retarder and elevated structural slabs on
metal deck.
2. Floor toppings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting.
C. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting.
D. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
F. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
G. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
H. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
I. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Structural Bituminous Types).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit for review, manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions for each item of proprietary material used, showing
compliance with these specifications.
B. Design Mixes: Submit for review, design with support material and mix design of
the test results and manufacturer's data.
C. Placing Schedule: Submit concrete placement plans and schedule; include
location and details of construction joints and waterstops.
D. Certification: Certification that tensile splitting strength meets or exceeds
specified requirements for reinforced concrete.
E. Refer to Sections 03100 and 03200 for additional submittal requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 2 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Quality assurance for all cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 03,
Concrete Testing and Inspection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MIX DESIGN
A. Employ technical agency familiar with local construction conditions and materials
to design concrete mixes. The technical agency shall be other than that retained
by the Owner for quality control testing.
B. Prior to the formulation of design mixes, the Contractor shall review with the
technical agency responsible for their preparation, requirements relative to
slump, seasonal variation of admixtures and anticipated job use conditions.
C. Separate design mixes are required for each anticipated and/or actual change in
type of mix materials including admixtures, change in proportion of basic
materials, change in slump limits and change in pumped concrete requirements.
D. Mix designs are to be formulated with ample lead time (6 weeks) to allow testing
and verification of the design as hereinafter specified so that mixes can be
reviewed by A/E prior to job use.
E. Mix designs reviewed by A/E are to be in file in the Contractor's field office prior
to pouring concrete.
F. Requirements of Mix Designer:
1. List design mixes required, stating where each applies.
2. Design the concrete mixes subject to the controls specified under
Paragraph 2.6, Proportioning, including adjustments for seasonality.
3. Verify the adequacy of the design mix for compressive strength in
accordance with ACI 301, Method 1 or Method 2 as hereinafter modified:
a) Method 1: Compression test cylinders shall be made and tested in
accordance with appropriate ASTM procedures to substantiate an
average compressive strength as specified in Paragraph 2.6,
Proportioning.
b) Method 2: Appropriate field test data for concrete made with the
same ingredients may be used. Thirty (30) or more consecutive
strength test results of mixes with the same materials and
proportions used in similar construction and climatic conditions
within the past year shall be used to indicated performance in
strength shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.6, Proportioning.
4. Adjust mix designs that prove unsatisfactory in use, subject to A/E's
review. Concrete that does not consistently exhibit the specified control
characteristics will be considered unsatisfactory.
G. Submit for A/E's Review
1. List of mixes.
2. Mix proportions.
3. Proposed adjustments for seasonality.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 3 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
4. Test results and/or mill certificates showing that the mix proportions and
materials comply with the performance characteristics specified.
5. Manufacturer's data, or independent test results if required by A/E,
showing that the lightweight concrete complies with the specification
regarding shrinkage, split cylinder strength, and modulus of elasticity.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150; modified as follows:
1. Alkali content; maximum 0.6 percent or certify that no alkali reactivity is
produced with the proposed cement-aggregate combinations (ASTM
C227).
2. Type I unless noted.
3. Type II where noted.
4. Type III at Contractor's option to Type I - subject to A/E's review.
B. Aggregate: ASTM C33 (modified grading) for normal weight concrete and ASTM
C 330 for structural lightweight concrete. Native stone. Artificial or natural sand.
For concrete strengths greater than or equal to 5,000 psi use sharp angular
crushed stone.
C. Mixing Water: Drinkable, tasteless, and odorless.
2.3 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260.
B. Water Reducing (Plasticizing): ASTM C494 Type A.
C. Water Reducing (Retarding): ASTM C494 Type D.
D. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
E. Water Reducing (Accelerating): ASTM C494 Type E.
F. Calcium Chloride: Strictly prohibited.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder: 10-mil thick clear polyethylene film. Type recommended for
below grade application.
B. Grout
1. Bearing Plates: Non-shrink per CRD C588, non-metallic for exposed
grout, "Masterflow 713" (Master builders), "Euco N.S." (The Euclid
Chemical Co.), "Five Star Grout" (U.S. Grout Corp.) or "Sono Grout"
(Sonneborn-Contech.)
2. Structural Repair: As specified.
3. Drypack: Zero slump, cement-sand mix, proportion determined by trial to
produce 7000 psi at 28 days.
C. Joint Filler: Bitumine impregnated fiber type, 1/2-inch thick; ASTM D1751.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 4 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.5 PROPORTIONING
A. Proportion the materials to produce job-use concrete of the type and strength
indicated, subject to the following controls.
B. Strength and Durability:
1. Structural Concrete:
a) Water reducing (plasticizer) admixture required.
b) Trial Mix: Average compressive strength shall be determined by
ACI 301, Method 1 with a minimum of 1200 psi greater than the
specified f'c or by Method 2 where the average strength exceeds
the specified strength f'c by at least:
1) 400 psi if standard deviation is less than 300 psi.
2) 550 psi if standard deviation is less than 300 psi to 400 psi.
3) 770 psi if standard deviation is less than 400 psi to 500 psi.
4) 900 psi if standard deviation is less than 500 psi to 600 psi.
5) 1,200 psi if standard deviation is greater than 600 psi.
c) Minimum Cement Content
1) 3,000 psi Concrete - 5 bags/cubic yard.
2) 4,000 psi Concrete - 6 bags/cubic yard.
d) For pumped concrete, increase minimum cement content as
required to maintain equivalent water/cement ratios to those
required for all strengths of non-pumped concrete.
2. Exterior Exposed Concrete:
a) Air entrainment and water reducing admixtures as required.
b) Minimum cement - 6 bag/cubic yard.
c) Maximum water - 5 1/2 gallon bag.
C. Aggregates
1. ASTM C33.
2. Maximum Size 467 for general use.
a) Size 57 for columns, beams, and slabs.
b) Size 7 or Size 67 for tight pours.
c) Minimum 15 percent passing No. 50 sieve.
d) Minimum 3 percent passing No. 10 sieve.
e) Fineness Modulus, Sand: Minimum 2.5, maximum 3.
D. Consistency: Plastic and workable with cohesiveness sufficient to prevent
segregation with maximum slump as hereinafter specified.
E. Admixtures:
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 5 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. Water Reducing (Plasticizing): Follow the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Air entraining: Limit air content as follows:
a) Exposed normal weight concrete - minimum 5 percent, maximum
7 percent.
b) Lightweight concrete - minimum 4 percent, maximum 6 percent.
3. Accelerators: Only as accepted by A/E.
4. Retarders: Only as accepted by A/E.
5. Splitting Tensile Strength (fct): Minimum as follows for given strength
(f'c):
a) 3,000 psi, fct = 370 psi.
b) 4,000 psi, fct = 425 psi.
6. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum E = 2,400,000 psi (secant modulus at 0.3
f'c).
7. Drying Shrinkage: Maximum .06 percent at age 1 year or .035 percent at
28 days ASTM.
8. Shrinkage Compensated Cement: May be used to control drying
shrinkage acceptable to A/E.
9. Natural Sand: (ASTM C33) is to be substituted for lightweight fines.
F. Shrinkage Compensated Concrete: In accordance with cement product
recommendations to produce the following characteristics:
1. Drying Shrinkage: Maximum 0.005 percent at 100 days.
2. Expansion: Maximum 0.1 percent at 7 days.
3. Water reducing retarding admixtures required.
G. Pumped Concrete:
1. Aggregates:
a) Maximum Size: One-third the maximum opening in either the
pump or the pipeline, whichever is smaller.
b) Grading: As close as possible to the middle of the ASTM C33 or
C330 grading range.
c) Fine Aggregate Fineness Modulus (FM): 2.40 to 3.00 with 15 to 20
percent passing the No. 50 sieve and 5 to 10 percent passing the
No. 200 sieve.
d) Daily Variation in FM: 0.20 from the value used in selecting
proportions.
2. Admixtures
a) Air Content: Minimum 3 percent, maximum 5 percent.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 6 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
b) Pumping Aids: As required to produce a pumpable mix with
sufficient strength.
c) Accelerators: Not to be used with pumped concrete.
2.6 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete by a mechanical batch type mixing plant with
adequate facilities for accurate measurement and control of each material
entering mixer and for changing proportions to conform to varying conditions of
work. Provide for adequate inspection at all times. Obtain approval for plant and
its location.
1. Batching Unit: Provide with the following:
a) Weighing Unit: For each type material to show scale load at
convenient stages of weighing operation. When directed, check
weighing units in A/E's presence; when required, adjust before
further use.
b) Water Mechanism: Tight, with valves interlocked so that discharge
valves cannot be opened before filling valve is fully closed; fit with
graduated gauge.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 7 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Mixing Unit
a) Mixing Speed: Do not charge mixers over rated capacity or
operate above rated speed. Excessive mixing, requiring addition
of water to preserve required consistency is not permitted.
Discharge entire batch before recharging.
b) Mixing Time: Measure from instant water is introduced into drum
containing solids. Introduce all mixing water before one-fourth of
mixing time has elapsed; mixing time 1 1/2 minutes or until mass
is uniform and homogeneous. Capacity of mixer to be such that it
will handle one or more full sack batches.
B. Ready Mixed Concrete: ASTM C94 Alternative No. 1 for controlled mixes.
C. Concrete will be considered unacceptable if it undergoes initial set or if not
deposited within 90 minutes of the time the water is introduced.
D. Adding water to unworkable concrete at delivery end is not permitted unless:
1. A/E accepts procedure, observes additions of water and the resulting
water/cement ratio does not exceed the mix design proportions.
2. Workability without exceeding maximum slump may be attained with the
site-addition of a high-range water-reducing admixture.
E. Admixtures introduced at the site are to be added separately, in solution form,
and with additional mixing time at the rate of 30 seconds/cubic yard or a
minimum of 1 1/2 minutes.
F. Slump
1. 4 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch for normal weight at point of deposit.
2. 4 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch for normal weight pumped concrete at the
point of deposit, 5 inch maximum at the pump.
3. Maximum slump for concrete containing high-range water-reducing
admixture shall be 8 inches after addition to concrete with 2 to 4 inch
slump.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into
concrete are accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in
placing concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying
bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in
existing concrete, insert steel dowels, and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 8 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on fill. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and
seal. Do not disturb or damage vapor retarder while placing concrete. Repair
damaged vapor retarder.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Notify A/E minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
C. Wet all exposed subgrade, masonry filler units, precast concrete, previously
poured concrete, and uncoated wood forms immediately prior to pouring (except
during freezing temperatures).
D. Do not pour concrete in freestanding water, over ice, or on frozen sub-grade.
E. 24 hours time must elapse between adjacent slab and wall pours. Columns and
walls must reach an initial set (minimum 3 hour curing) before framing supported
thereon is poured.
F. Deposit concrete within 5 feet of its final position in uniform layers not exceeding
18 inches deep with no more than 30 minutes time lapse between layers.
G. Free fall, except in walls and columns, not to exceed 5 feet. Free fall in walls and
columns not to exceed 5 feet unless with the addition of a high-range water-
reducing admixture. Free fall in walls and columns not to exceed 15 feet.
H. Guide the flow of concrete in walls and columns for vertical drop between the
reinforcing.
I. Consolidate the concrete to maximum density using internal vibration (use
external vibration only as a supplement). Work the concrete around and under
reinforcing and into corners.
J. Mechanical Vibrators: Minimum frequency - 7,000 rpm. Insert and withdraw
vertically drawing out entrapped air and excess water.
K. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed
during concrete pavement.
L. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
Item Coverage
(inches
Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3
Slabs on Fill 2
M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control
joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
N. Place floor slabs on fill in lanes indicated on Drawings.
O. Construction Joints: Locate construction joints as detailed or to limit the size of
pour units as follows: Slabs-On-Ground: Maximum 15 feet.
P. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time after finishing. Use 3/16 inch thick
blade, cutting one-fourth into depth of slab thickness.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 9 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Q. Separate exterior slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint
filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface.
R. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify
A/E upon discovery.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed with sack rubbed finish.
B. Finish concrete surfaces to be stained smooth.
C. Provide Class A tolerances to floor slabs according to ACI 301.
D. Finish floors to light broom finish.
E. Pitch to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal.
3.5 PATCHING
A. Notify A/E immediately upon removal of forms.
B. Patch imperfections with an approved repair concrete.
3.6 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Concrete that does not satisfy the performance requirements of this specification
is to be removed and replaced if repair cannot be accomplished to A/E's
satisfaction.
B. Structural Repair: The long term strength, elasticity, and continuity characteristics
of the entire structural element and/or frame must be accounted for if repair is
attempted.
1. Use expansive cements, and epoxy type bonding agents to produce
repair materials with strength, elasticity, and durability characteristics
compatible with the parent material being repaired.
2. Submit a procedural outline of proposed repair work including a
description of materials, preparations, shoring, and protection for A/E's
review.
3. A/E will review repair procedures before they are attempted.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour,
quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,
excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature
for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. On areas indicated to receive stain finish, protect with ¼” masonite boards over
burlap pads. Ensure that protection materials will not adversely affect the curing
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 10 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
of the concrete. Maintain protection throughout construction until application of
stain materials. After stain is applied and cured, replace protection boards as
required for the remainder of construction.
3.9 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
A. ACI 306; the methods of protection used for cold weather concreting are to be
reviewed with A/E. Sufficient protection material is to be on the job site in
advance of the time when mean daily temperatures are expected to drop below
40 degrees F. Provide strong and secure weather protection around the building
for at least one story above and one story below the floor being concreted to
prevent infiltration of wind. Submit to A/E for review details and materials of the
temperatures in the range between 50 degrees F and:
1. Heated Concrete Temperature:
a) Maximum 100 degrees F in mixer.
b) Maximum 90 degrees F leaving mixer.
2. Accelerators:
a) Review with A/E.
b) Calcium Chloride: Shall not be used.
3. Concrete made with hydrothermally or vacuum-saturated lightweight
aggregate shall be allowed to air dry for two weeks after the initial curing
period. During the initial curing period, as well as the drying period, the
concrete temperature shall be maintained above 50 degrees F.
3.10 HOT WEATHER PROTECTION
A. ACI 305; when air temperature or form temperature exceeds 100 degrees F
control concreting as follows:
1. Cool concrete to a maximum 70 degrees F leaving the mixer.
2. 50 lbs. ice = 6 gallons mixing water (maximum per cubic yard).
3. Adjust concrete mix to retard set with retarding admixture or Type II
cement.
3.11 CURING
A. Retain moisture and maintain reasonably constant temperature in freshly poured
concrete for the duration of the curing period.
B. Curing Period Duration: Starting at time of deposit: Concrete with Type I
Cement, five days.
C. Concrete Surface Curing Temperature
1. Minimum 50 degrees F, maximum 90 degrees F.
2. Rate of Change: Maximum plus or minus 5 degrees F per hour.
D. Moisture Retention: By any of the following, except as otherwise specified.
1. Moist Cure: Roll-out waterproof covering (equivalent to ASTM C171) or
use burlap, frequently wetted (except during freezing temperatures).
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 11 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Chemical Curing Agents: Curing compound conforming to FS IT-C-800A,
30 percent solids minimum and/or ASTM C309.
3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Sampling: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
1. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test at point of discharge for each day's pour
of each type of concrete, and additional tests if concrete consistency
changes.
2. Air content: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete.
One test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
3. Air content: One test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained
concrete.
4. Concrete temperature:
a) Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above.
b) Test each time a set of compression test specimens are made.
5. Compression test specimen: ASTM C 31. One set of four standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test.
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. One set for each day's pour of each
concrete class exceeding 5 cubic yards.
1. Test one additional set of cylinders for each 75 cubic yards over and
above the first 25 cubic yards of each class of concrete placed in any one
day.
2. Test one specimen at 7 days, two at 28 days, and retain one from each
set for later testing, if required.
3. When frequency of testing would otherwise provide fewer than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5
randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
4. When strength of field-cured specimens is less than 85 percent of
companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and
provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place
concrete.
5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of
sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified
compressive strength, and no individual strength test result fails below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C. Test Results: Laboratory shall report test results in writing to A/E and contractor
within 24 hours of test.
1. Compressive strength test reports shall contain the minimum following
data:
a) Project identification name and number.
b) Name of concrete testing service.
03300-A
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 12 of 12
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
c) Date of concrete placement.
d) Concrete type and class.
e) Location of concrete batch in structure.
f) Design compressive strength at 28 days.
g) Concrete mix proportions and materials.
h) Compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-days
tests and 28-day tests.
2. Nondestructive testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other
nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole
basis for acceptance or rejection.
3. Additional tests: The testing service shall make additional tests of in-place
concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other
characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by A/E.
a) Testing service may conduct tests of cored cylinders, complying
with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
b) Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when
unacceptable concrete has been verified.
END OF SECTION
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03300-S – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract apply to the work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to
provide cast-in-place concrete consisting of portland cement, fine and coarse
aggregate, water and selected admixtures; combined, mixed, transported,
placed, finished and cured as herein specified.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400
2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100
3. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
2. ASTM C33, Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate.
3. ASTM C94, Standard Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete.
4. ASTM C150, Standard Specifications for Portland Cement.
5. ASTM C260, Standard Specifications for Air-Entraining.
Admixtures for Concrete.
6. ASTM C494, Standard Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete.
B. Concrete Mix Design: Contractor shall employ and pay cost of a recognized
independent Testing Laboratory to perform the following services:
1. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 301.
2. For each concrete mix type proposed, make trial mix using aggregate
proposed.
3. Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall
be in accordance with ACI 301.
4. Make advance tests of trial mixes with proposed materials. Mold and cure
in accordance with ASTM C31; test cylinders in accordance with ASTM
C-39. Do not place concrete on project until laboratory reports and
breaks of confirmation cylinders indicate that proposed mixes will develop
required strengths.
5. Submit proposed mix designs to Architect for review min. 14 days prior to
placing concrete. Show:
a. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and water.
b. Combined aggregate gradation.
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 2 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
c. Aggregate specific gravities and gradations.
d. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content.
e. Type of cement and aggregates.
f. Type of dosage of admixtures.
g. Type, color and dosage of integral coloring compounds, where
applicable.
h. Special requirements for pumping.
i. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is
valid.
j. Any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in
mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished
product.
6. Mix designs based on record of past performance in accordance with ACI
301, method 2, may be submitted in lieu of mix designs required above,
provided all necessary information is included.
7. Check mix designs and revise if necessary wherever changes are made
in aggregates or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of
concrete. Slump shall be minimum to produce workable mix. Laboratory
shall prescribe maximum quantity of water.
C. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring or each fifty (50)
cu. yards, whichever comes first, on each different portion or section of the work.
Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31, and test in accordance
with ASTM C39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory.
Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall
consist of five (5) specimens: two (2) to be tested at twenty-eight (28) days, two
(2) to be tested at seven days, and one held in reserve. Determine temperature
and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C231.
D. Field Quality Control:
1. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of
concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C143.
2. Monitor addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is
allowed to remain in truck.
3. Certify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete, amount of water
added during initial batching, and time initial batching occurred.
4. Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI (American
Concrete Institute) recommendations as a standard of quality.
E. Source Quality Control: Periodically inspect and control concrete mixing and
loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals as agreed to by Architect
and laboratory personnel.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94.
Mix concrete min. 70 revolutions of transit mix drum at mixing speed. Min. 40
revolutions shall be at production plant.
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 3 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15
minutes.
C. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch
plant.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather Requirements:
1. Hot Weather Concreting:
a. Follow ACI 301.
b. Provide retarding type admixture conforming to ASTM C494-Type
A or D in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Cold Weather Concreting:
a. Follow ACI 301.
b. When ambient temperature at site is below 40 degrees F, or is
expected to fall to that temperature within ensuing 24 hours, heat
water and/or aggregates prior to adding to mix so that temperature
of concrete will be between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F at
time of placement.
c. Maintain temperature of deposited concrete between 50 degrees
F and 70 degrees F for min. 7 days after placing.
3. Temperature Changes: Maintain changes in concrete temperature as
uniform as possible, but in no case exceed change of 5 degrees per hour
or 25 degrees in any 25 hour period.
4. Admixture intended to accelerate hardening of concrete or produce higher
than normal strength at early periods will not be permitted unless
specified or prior approval is obtained from Architect.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete Mix Design.
B. Delivery Tickets: Furnish duplicate delivery tickets for each load of ready-mix
concrete delivered to site, in accordance with ASTM C94. Show batch weights
on each ticket.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I. Type III may be used for cold weather
concreting when approved by Architect.
B. Aggregate:
1. Fine: ASTM C-33, clean hard, durable, uncoated, natural non-staining
sand free from silt, loam or clay.
2. Coarse: ASTM C-33, hard, durable, uncoated, crushed stone, gradation
in accordance with size No.57, unless otherwise approved in mix design.
Max. aggregate size in accordance with ACI 318.
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 4 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Water: Clean and free from oil, acid and injurious amounts of vegetable matter,
alkalies and other impurities.
D. Admixtures:
1. Water-reducing or water-reducing/set-retarding; ASTM C494.
2. Air entraining agent: ASTM C260.
E. Curing Materials:
1. Waterproof Paper: FS UU-P-265a.
2. Polyethylene Sheeting: Minimum 0.004" thick, free from defects, uniform
in appearance, white.
3. Curing Compounds: L&M "CURE" by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.,
or approved equal, for interior concrete slab surfaces. Curing compound
must be compatible with floor hardener and sealer.
F. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1752, Type 1, non-asphaltic.
G. Non-shrinking Cement Grout: U.S. GrouT Corp. "Five Star Grout" or equal.
H. Non-Slip Stair Nosing: Equal to Wooster No. 101 "Alumograt" of required length.
2.2 MIXES
A. Strength: Concrete is classified and specified by ultimate compressive strength
(f'c) at age 28 days.
B. Proportions: Proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain required
plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Do not
make changes in proportions without Architect's approval.
C. Design concrete to yield the following characteristics:
Min.28 day Min. Max. Slump
Compressive Cement Cement Dry Limits
Type Strength Type Content Density Min. Max.
I 3000 psi Portland 5* NA 3" 5"
II 4000 psi Portland. 6* NA 3" 5"
* bags per cu. yd.
D. Concrete Uses: Refer to structural drawings for type usage.
E. Concrete permanently exposed to weather: Contain air-entraining admixture to
produce 5% +/- 1% air by volume of concrete.
F. Maximum Fly Ash content shall not exceed 20% by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 5 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notify Architect and Testing Laboratory at least 24 hours prior to when each
concrete operation is to begin.
B. Allow various trades ample time to install anchor bolts, sleeves, conduit and
inserts necessary for proper execution of their work. Accurately position in form.
Do not cut reinforcing steel to facilitate installation of inserts or accessories.
C. If power screeds are to be used, recess sleeves and cap in manner to prevent
water and cement from entering, but so that they may be located after finishing.
Otherwise, extend sleeves 1" above finish floor.
D. Remove impounded water from forms and excavations before concrete is
deposited. Close temporary drains by grouting or by other satisfactory means.
Close openings left in forms for cleaning and inspection, after forms have been
cleaned out, inspected and approved.
E. Remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete before concrete is
deposited. Before beginning placement, remove hardened concrete and foreign
substances from inner surface of mixing and conveying equipment.
F. Provide runways, pumps, conveyors, etc. to convey concrete to point of deposit in
order not to disturb forms or reinforcement or segregate concrete. Do not allow
conveying equipment directly over reinforcement.
G. Do not allow concrete to free-fall over 5'-0"; provide tremies, chutes or other
approved means of conveyance when drop exceeds this amount.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Placing: Place concrete in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and as
modified herein. Direct concrete rapidly from mixer to forms and deposit as
nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or
flowing. Do not place partially hardened, contaminated or re-tempered concrete.
B. Consolidation: Place concrete with aid of mechanical vibrating equipment unless
otherwise approved by Architect. Apply vibration at point of deposit and in area of
freshly placed concrete. Vibrate enough to accomplish thorough compaction and
complete embedment or reinforcement and fixtures. Supplement vibration by
hand-spading in corners and angles of forms to prevent honey-combing.
C. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on concrete that has set, roughen and
clean surface of set concrete of laitance, foreign matter and loose particles. Wet
surface of set concrete just prior to placing new concrete
D. Protection and Curing:
1. Protect concrete from frost damage and moisture loss.
2. Provide artificial heat to maintain temperature of concrete above minimum
required herein for duration of curing period.
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 6 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Keep forms sufficiently wet to prevent cracking of concrete or loosening of
form joints.
4. Cure surfaces of exposed concrete by means of curing compound or
sheeting method, as applicable.
E. Patching Formed Surfaces of Exposed Concrete:
1. After forms have been removed, inspect concrete surfaces and patch
pour joints, voids, stone pockets, other defective areas and tie holes
before concrete is thoroughly dry. Chip away defective areas to depth of
not less than 1" with edges perpendicular to surface. Wet areas to be
patched and spaced at least 6" wide entirely surrounding it, to prevent
absorption of water from patching mortar. Do not patch concrete in
freezing weather.
2. Apply chemical bonding agent to surface in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, followed immediately by patching
mortar. Make patch of same proportions as used for concrete except
omit coarse aggregate. Add only enough water consistent with
requirements for handling and placing.
3. Thoroughly compact mortar into place and screed off; leave patch slightly
higher than surrounding surface. Leave undisturbed for one to two hours
to permit initial shrinkage before final finishing. Finish patch to match
texture and color of adjoining surface. Completely fill tie holes left by
withdrawal of rods and holes left by removal of end of ties. For holes
passing entirely through wall, force mortar through with plunger type
grease gun. Cure all patches.
F. Finishing Formed Surfaces:
1. As - Formed Finish.
a. Provide at surfaces not exposed to view in completed work.
b. Remove fins by stoning, otherwise leave texture imparted by
forms.
2. Rubbed Finish:
a. Provide at exterior vertical surfaces exposed to view in completed
work.
b. After removal of forms, patching and repairing, and while concrete
is still green, spread slurry consisting of 1 part portland cement
and 1-1/1 part damp, loose sand by volume, over pre-dampened
surface. Apply using burlap pads or sponge rubber floats.
Remove surplus materials, then rub with clean burlap. Water for
completed surfaces for 7 days min.
G. Flatwork:
1. Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips
accurately to produce designed elevations and contours in finished
surfaces. Align concrete surface to contours of screed strips using strike-
off templates or compacting type screeds. When formwork is cambered,
set screeds to like camber to maintain proper concrete thickness.
2. Floated Finish: Provide at slab surfaces to precede other finishes. Begin
floating after concrete has been struck off, consolidated and leveled,
03300-S
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 7 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
surface water has disappeared and surface is sufficiently hardened to
support power driven float. Finish surface with impact type power driven
float or hand float. Test surface with 10'-0" straightedge placed at min. 2
different angles; correct irregularities exceeding 1/4". Refloat repaired
areas.
END OF SECTION 03300 - S
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03310 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and Placing Cast-in-place concrete including finishing and curing.
B. Furnishing concrete for drilled piers.
C. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work,
including preformed joint filler.
D. Grouting anchor bolts and under base plates.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03100- Concrete Formwork
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 33 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous
Type) (ASTM D 994).
B. ACI 214 - Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete.
C. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
D. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting.
E. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting.
F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
G. ACI 311 - Guide for Concrete Inspection.
H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
I. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
J. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
K. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
L. ASTM C 260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
M. ASTM C 494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 2 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
N. ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures,
and floor hardener/sealer, waterstop, curing compounds, grout.
B. Samples: Submit two, 4-inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint and
construction joint material (joint filler).
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and
interface required with adjacent Work.
D. Concrete Mix Design:
1. Submit two copies of laboratory mix design proposed in accordance with
ACI 301, Method 1, or one copy of each of 30 consecutive test results
and mix designs used from record of past performance in accordance
with ACI 301, Method 2 to the engineer and the testing laboratory.
a. Determine or certify proportions of ingredients for mix by
independent testing laboratory in accordance with Chapter 4, ACI
318 to provide characteristics listed on Drawings for each class of
concrete.
b. Determine required average strength for above specified strength
in accordance with ACI 318; evaluate compressive strength
results of field concrete in accordance with ACI 214.
c. Include following information in concrete mix design:
(1) Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, and
water.
(2) Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air
content.
(3) Type of cement and sieve analysis of coarse and fine
aggregates.
(4) Type and dosage of admixtures.
(5) Special requirements for pumping
(6) Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which
design is valid.
(7) Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in
mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished
product, specified.
2. Batch Delivery Tickets: Submit sample tickets indicating information to be
supplied.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 3 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which
are concealed from view.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
D. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather.
E. Conform to ACI 306 when concreting during cold weather.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and
placement of form accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal or Type III - High Early Strength
from single source.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, maximum size as indicated in the
Concrete Notes shown on the drawings.
2.2 ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260.
B. Water Reducing: ASTM C 494 Type A.
C. Use set-controlling admixtures only when accepted by the A/E. Set controlling
admixture, Type C - accelerating, Type D - water reducing and retarding, Type E
- water reducing and accelerating admixture as reviewed by the independent
testing laboratory and the A/E.
D. Super Plasticizing: Use PSI Super super plasticizer (high-range water-reducer)
as manufactured by Gifford-Hill and Company, Inc., conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C 494, Type F/G in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 4 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. The manufacturer is acceptable contingent upon the products’ compliance with
the specification.
F. Calcium chloride is prohibited. Do not use admixture containing more than 0.1
percent chloride ions. Submit written certification of maximum chloride ion
content with mix design.
G. Water: Use City water.
H. Fly Ash, Slag, and Pozzolans: Prohibited. Obtain Architect/Engineer
Representative’s approval to use other admixtures.
I. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240.
2.3 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin.
B. Vapor Barrier:
1. Ten mils thick polyethylene sheeting, clear color, resistant to decay in
accordance with ASTM E154.
2. Vapor Barrier Joint Tape: 3M, No. 890 glass filament acetate tape.
2.4 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Non-shrink grout for grouting under base plates.
1. Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water
reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum
compressive strength of 7000 psi.
2.5 EPOXY GROUT
A. Epoxy grout for grouting anchor bolts.
1. Three components consisting of 100 percent solids epoxy resins, special
hardeners and specially graded aggregates.
2. Product: Sure-grip Epoxy Grout (J-54), Dayton Superior Corp, Oregon,
IL, (800)745-3700.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 5 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.6 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A. Joint (Sealant) Filler; Re: Joints and sealants in Division 7.
B. Preformed Joint Filler: 1/2-inch, performed joint filler, ASTM D1751, asphalt
impregnated fiberboard nonextruding type or 1/2-inch thick, preformed neoprene,
ASTM D1752, Type I. Ensure compatibility with joint filler/sealant.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Form Coating: For all exposed concrete, use non-staining form coating as
manufactured by:
1. “Non-Crete,” The Non-Crete Company, Omaha, Nebraska.
2. “Formcel,” Lambert Corporation, Houston, Texas.
B. Curing Materials:
1. Use resin base liquid concrete curing compound complying with ASTM C
309, Type I, with fugitive dye to provide uniformity of color, application
and providing 95 percent or more retention of the mixing water for seven
days or more. Compound shall be compatible with any materials (paint,
resilient flooring, etc.) which will be applied to the concrete surfaces. Do
not cure with this compound any surfaces intended to receive clear
hardener or penetrating sealer.
2. Dissipating curing compound shall be liquid membrane-forming
compound, complying with ASTM C 309, which provides an initial cure for
concrete, then begins to chemically break down and wear off the surface
within two to four weeks. Use “Kurez DR,” as manufactured by the Euclid
Chemical Company, or approved equal. Use of this product shall be
limited to floors receiving penetrating sealer or cementitious topping.
3. Curing and sealing compound shall be an acrylic sealer equal to
“Sealtight CS-309" as manufactured by W. R. Meadows, Incorporated, or
“Sealco 309" as manufactured by the Gifford Hill Company. Use of this
product shall be limited exclusively to permanently exposed concrete
surfaces not specified to receive a penetrating sealer or liquid hardener.
Comply with ASTM C 309.
C. Finishing Materials:
1. Floor hardener shall be a penetrating liquid, for subsequent (not integral)
application and shall be “Lapidolith,” as manufactured by Sonneborn
Building Products, or Ashford Formula or approved equal. See schedule
for location of floor hardener. No combination curing and hardener
material will be considered in lieu of hardener material specified.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 6 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Cement floor leveling compound for interior applications shall be SikaSet
Underlayment, by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. Cement floor
leveling compound for exterior applications shall be SikaTop 122, by Sika
Corporation, or approved equal.
3. Retarder shall be “E.A.C. Super Tuf-coat 66,” as manufactured by Preco
Chemical Corporation. Color shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.8 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Owner.
Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
C. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Owner.
D. Add 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, air entraining agent to normal weight
concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
E. Use silica fume for submerged concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into
concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship
in placing concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying
bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Conform with ACI 304 and the following.
B. Convey concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practical and by
methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients.
C. Deposit as nearly as practical in its final position.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 7 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Provide chutes so that the concrete slides in the chute and does not flow.
E. Where a vertical drop greater than 5 feet is necessary, place concrete through
tremies or similar devices to prevent segregation.
F. Place concrete before the initial set has occurred, and in no event after it has
contained its water content for more than 1-1/2 hours.
G. Unless otherwise specified, place all concrete upon clean, damp surfaces, free
from water, or upon property consolidated fills, but never upon soft mud, dry
porous earth, or frozen ground.
H. Compact the concrete and work it in an approved manner into all corners and
angles of the forms and around reinforcement in a manner to prevent
segregation of the coarse aggregate.
I. Construct forms for the lifts of vertical walls to make all parts of the walls easily
accessible for the placement, spading and consolidation of the concrete as
specified.
J. Deposit concrete in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid
re-handling and to maintain, until the completion of the unit, a plastic surface
approximately horizontal. Under no circumstances shall concrete that is partially
hardened be deposited in the work. Deposit concrete continuously and as
rapidly a practical until the unit of operation is completed.
K. Consolidate all concrete by vibration so that the concrete is thoroughly worked
around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms,
eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or
planes of weakness. Conform with ACI 309 and the following.
L. Mechanical vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 7,000 vibrations per
minute and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over-vibrating and use of
vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert vibrators
and withdraw at many points, from 18 inches to 30 inches apart for a 5 to 15
second duration. Permit the vibrators to sink as deep while running as their own
weight will readily take them.
M. Keep three spare emergency vibrators on the job site during all concrete placing
operations.
N. Furnish vibrators of the internal type; apply directly to the concrete and not
through the forms, except in sections too thin to permit the insertion of the
internal type, in which case form vibrators may be employed, with the approval of
the A/E.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 8 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
O. Carry all top surfaces slightly above the forms and strike off by board finish when
settlement has taken place, forcing out all excess water.
P. After the concrete has taken its initial set, prevent impact or loads on forms or on
the ends of projecting reinforcement.
Q. Add concrete to compensate for the settlement produced by vibration, and to
bring the surface to the elevation required.
R. Bonding: In placing fresh concrete to set concrete, remove all loose and foreign
materials from work already in place. Slush set concrete surface with bonding
agent and scrub with wire brooms and leave moist when the new concrete is
place in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Ensure complete
bonding of the new concrete to the set concrete.
S. Place and consolidate all concrete in vertical members in place not less than 4
hours before concrete in the horizontal or the vertical members resting thereon is
placed.
T. Make the operation of placing concrete continuous between vertical construction
joints. Make the vertical construction joints at approximately the center of a
panel or beam with vertical bulkheads to the full depth. Place the scheduled or
detailed reinforcement continuously through the joints.
3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General:
1. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 302 AND ACI 304.
2. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete. Do not use grate tampers
or mesh rollers. Do not spread concrete by vibration.
3. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and pitch surfaces
uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings.
4. Ensure floor surfaces are depressed sufficiently to accommodate finish
materials.
B. As-Cast Finished:
1. Rough Form Finish:
a. Provide surfaces true to line and plane with no specific
requirements for selected facing materials.
b. Patch tie holes and defects and rub down fins exceeding 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in height with wooden blocks.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 9 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
c. Otherwise, leave surfaces with the texture imparted by the forms.
2. Smooth Form Finish:
a. Produce smooth, hard, uniform finish in the same manner as
rough form finish.
b. Remove all fins and patch all tie holes and defects.
3. Smooth Rubbed Finish:
a. Complete all patching immediately after forms have been
removed. Complete rubbing within one day after from removal.
b. Wet surfaces and rub grout with Carborundum brick, cement from
the rubbing process or similar abrasive until a uniform a texture
and color is achieved.
C. Slab Finishes
1. Scratched Finish:
a. After the concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and
leveled, roughen the surface with stiff brushes or rakes before
final set.
b. Ensure that finish is true to plane within 1/4 inch in 3 feet as
determined by a 3 foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab
in any direction.
2. Floated Finish:
a. After the concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated, and
leveled, do not work the concrete further until ready for floating.
b. Floating is to begin when the water sheen has disappeared, and
when the mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit the proper
operation of a power-driven float.
c. Then consolidate the surface with power-driven floats.
d. Hand float with wood or corkfaced floats used in locations
inaccessible to the power-driven machine.
e. Recheck trueness of surface at this stage with a 10 foot
straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.
f. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots during the initial
floating operation.
g. Refloat the slab immediately to a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
h. Ensure that finish is true to plane within 1/4 inch in 10 feet as
determined by a 10 foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab
in any direction.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 10 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Troweled Finish:
a. After the concrete has received a power float finish as specified
above, finish the surface initially with power trowels, and finally
with hand trowels.
b. After power floating, provide a power trowel finish to produce a
smooth surface free of defects other than minor trowel marks.
c. Perform additional trowelings by hand after the surface has
hardened sufficiently.
d. Perform the final troweling when a ringing sound is produced as
the trowel is moved over the surface.
e. Consolidate the surface thoroughly by hand troweling operations.
f. Make certain that the finished surface is free of any trowel marks
and uniform in texture and appearance.
g. On surfaces intended to receive floor coverings, remove by
grinding any defects on sufficient magnitude to show through the
floor covering.
h. Finish slabs maintaining surface flatness and levelness tolerance,
overall value FF 30/FL 20, and minimum local value FF 25/FL 15.
4. Broom Finish:
a. Perform floating as specified above.
b. After excess water has been removed, provide a transverse
scored texture produced by drawing a broom across the surface.
D. Schedule of Finishes for Formed Surfaces
1. As Cast Rough Form Finish: All concrete surfaces not exposed to view.
2. As Cast Smooth Form Finish: All concrete surfaces not exposed to view
after application of finish material.
3. Smooth Rubbed Finish: All interior and exterior concrete surfaces
exposed to view.
E. Schedule of Finishes for Slab Surfaces
1. Scratched Finish: Slabs and surfaces to receive bonded concrete
toppings.
2. Floated Finish: Surface scheduled to receive roofing or waterproofing
membranes and bonded cementitious setting beds.
3. Troweled Finish: Floor surfaces scheduled as exposed, or to receive floor
covering.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 11 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
4. Broom Finish: Exterior horizontal surfaces.
5. Steel Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Floors to receive “thin-set” (“dry-
set”) floor tile.
6. Liquid Hardener: Permanently exposed concrete floors.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from moisture loss, premature
drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury for at least 7
days.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 12 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Conform to ACI 308.
C. Prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period.
D. Accomplish curing by one of the following methods.
1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
2. Absorptive mats or fabrics (burlap) kept continuously wet.
3. Use curing compounds as specified. Do not use compounds on any
surface which will receive additional concrete or where concrete
hardeners or terrazzo floors are scheduled to be installed. Remove the
compound film from all exposed surfaces at the end of the curing period.
4. Use non-staining waterproof paper or polyethylene sheeting as specified.
Lap joints 12 inches and weight in place.
3.6 PLACING GROUT
A. Place grout in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.7 PATCHING
A. Allow Owner’s Representative to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon
removal of forms.
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify
Owner’s Representative upon discovery.
C. Patch imperfections as directed and in accordance with ACI 301.
3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details,
dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Owner’s
Representative.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair or replace exposed concrete except upon
express direction of Owner’s Representative for each individual area.
3.9 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Perform the following inspections and tests:
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 13 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with ACI 301.
2. Review proposed mix design of each class of concrete to verify
conformance with the contract documents.
3. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure
conformance with specified requirements.
4. Sampling and Testing Concrete: Concrete used shall be sampled and
tested by testing laboratory using techniques certified by ACI to determine
acceptability as required by ACI 318 and to demonstrate conformance
with specified properties as follows:
a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172.
b. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each set of compressive
strength test specimens.
c. Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight
concrete; one for each set of compressive strength specimens.
d. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; test concrete hourly when
air temperature is 40 degrees F and below, and when 80 degrees
F and above; and when each set of compression test specimens
is made.
e. Compressive Strength Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of three
standard cylinders for each 75 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of
each concrete type placed on any one day, unless otherwise
directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test
specimens.
f. Compressive Strength Test: ASTM C 39; one specimen tested at
7 days, two at 28 days, and one retained in reserve for later
testing if required. When frequency of testing will provide less
than five strength tests for given class of concrete, testing shall be
conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from
each batch if fewer than five are used.
5. Evaluation and Acceptance
a. If the measured slump, or air content of air entrained concrete falls
outside the specified limits, a check test shall be made
immediately on another portion of the same sample. In the event
of a second failure, the concrete shall be considered to have failed
to meet the requirements of the specifications, and shall not be
used in concrete operations in the structure.
b. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if
the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test
results are equal to, or exceed specified strength and no individual
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 14 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
test result (average of two cylinders) is below specified strength by
more than 500 psi.
c. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements
of the “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings” ACI
301, Chapter 18, have been met.
03310
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 15 of 15
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
d. In any case where the average strength of the laboratory control
cylinders, as shown by the tests for any portion of the structure,
falls below the minimum ultimate compressive strength herein
before specified, the Contractor shall provide improved curing
conditions of temperature and moisture and/or purpose
adjustments to the mix design to secure the required strength.
Also, if the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders
should follow the core test procedure set forth in ACI 301, Chapter
17 in locations approved by the Architect. At least three cores
shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 psi below
indicate, in the opinion of the Architects, that the strength of the
structure is inadequate, such replacement, load testing, or
strengthening, as may be ordered by the Architect, shall be
provided by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
6. Concrete Test Reports:
a. Quality Assurance: ACI 311.
b. Complete and distribute report immediately after inspections and
tests are complete.
c. If the report indicates non-conformance with the contract
documents, then a probable cause and a recommendation for
corrective action shall be included.
d. Comply with ACI 311, “Guide for Concrete Inspection.”
e. If the testing laboratory observes a trend of decreasing quality of
the concrete due to weather conditions or other cause, then the
testing laboratory shall notify the A/E and provide a proactive
corrective action recommendation before concrete falls below
specified requirement.
f. The testing laboratory shall control the addition of water to the
concrete at the jobsite and the length of time the concrete is
allowed to remain in the truck before placement. The inspector
shall compare the mixture with the significant deviation to the A/E,
Contractor and concrete supplier. Corresponding adjustments
shall be made before the concrete is discharged, or the load shall
be rejected and not placed.
g. The testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating
class of concrete delivered (or poured), amount of water added
and the time at which the cement and aggregate was discharged
into the truck, and the time at which the concrete was discharged
from the truck.
END OF SECTION
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 1 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 03366 – INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Integral colored concrete.
2. Stamped / Imprinted concrete.
3. Sealers and coatings.
C. Related Sections
1. Section 02750-A – Integrally Colored and Stamped Concrete (Architecture)
2. Section 02512 – Concrete Vehicular Paving
3. Section 02515 – Concrete Walks
4. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
5. Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork
6. Section 03200 – Reinforcing Steel
7. Section 07900-A – Joint Sealants
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
2. ACI 302 IR "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
3. ACI 303.1 "Standard Specification for Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete."
4. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing of Concrete."
5. ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting."
6. ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting."
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C309 "Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete."
2. ASTM C494 "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete."
3. ASTM C979 "Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete."
C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. AASHTO M194 "Chemical Admixtures."
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 2 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit specified manufacturer’s complete technical data sheets for
all products to be used, including installation instructions. These data shall include,
but are not limited to:
1. Colored admixture
2. Powder antiquing release agent
3. Imprinting / texturing tools,
4. Curing compound
B. Color: Contractor to submit color charts showing a full range of available colors for
approval of colors selected for mockups.
C. Design Mixes: Contractor to submit mixes for each type of colored concrete.
D. Qualification Data: For firms indicated in “Quality Assurance”, including list of
completed projects.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each specified material from the same source and maintain a high degree of
consistency in workmanship throughout the Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of specified integral color, stamp, and
sealer shall have a minimum 10 years experience in the production of the specified
products.
C. Installer Qualifications: Contractor must have a minimum 3 years experience in
integral colored concrete and stamping/imprinting applications and successfully
completed not less than 6 projects comparable in scale and complexity.
1. Statement of Contractor Qualifications
a. Submit list of at least 6 completed projects including project name, project
address and owner contact information.
D. Regulatory Requirements
1. Products shall comply with the United States Clean Air Act for maximum Volatile
Organic Compound (VOC) content as specified in PART 2 of this section.
E. Mockups and Field Samples: Prepare field sample at project site for Owner’s review
and approval. Contractor shall provide three (3) mockups per paving type as
described in Drawings to demonstrate a range of colors for selection by Landscape
Architect.
1. Samples shall be constructed on site and shall be 4’x4’ minimum and 4” thick.
Owner shall approve location of mock ups prior to construction.
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 3 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. For accurate color, the quantity of concrete mixed to produce the sample should
not be less than 3 cubic yards (or not less than 1/3 the capacity of the mixing
drum on the redi-mix truck) and should always be in full cubic yard increments.
Excess material shall be discarded off site, according to local regulations.
3. Construct sample-using processes and techniques intended for use on
permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control,
construction, and expansion joints in sample panels.
4. Sample shall be poured, stamped, and sealed by the individual workers who will
actually be performing the work for the project.
5. Obtain written approval of the sample from project Landscape Architect before
start of work. The approved sample provides visual standard for work of this
Section.
6. Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates, and color additives used in
mockup for comparison with materials used in remaining work.
7. Retain approved samples through completion of the work for use as a quality
standard for finished work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with legible
manufacturer’s identification and information.
B. Store specified products in dry conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.6 JOB SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain an ambient temperature of between 50 F and
90 F during application and at least 48 hours after application. Schedule placement
of concrete to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are
applied. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is in the forecast within 24-
hours.
B. Protection: Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage or contamination of any
surfaces near the work zone. Protect completed work from moisture, freezing or
contamination.
C. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until
discharge. Mix times shall meet manufacturer’s written recommendations.
1.7 PRE-JOB CONFERENCE
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 4 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. One week prior to the placement of colored concrete, a meeting will be held to
discuss the project and application of materials.
B. The Landscape Architect, General Contractor, Sub-Contractor and a Manufacturer’s
Representative will be present to review mockups.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY
www.scofield.com
(800) 800-9900
Local Representative: Jim Orella (972) 839-3730
jim.orella@scofield.com
B. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Colored Admixture for Integrally Colored Concrete:
1. CHROMIX Admixture by L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY
a. Colors shall be selected by Landscape Architect from mock-ups as
described in 1.3E, this section.
b. Admixture shall be a colored, water-reducing admixture containing no
calcium chloride with coloring agents that are lime proof and UV resistant.
c. Colored admixture shall conform to ACI 303.1, ASTM C979, ASTM C494,
and AASHTO M194.
B. Stamping / Imprinting Tool:
1. LITHOTEX Pavecrafters imprinting tools by L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY
a. Pattern: Fractured Earth
b. Size: 52x52
C. Release Agent:
1. LITHOCROME Release Agent by L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY
a. Color: Clear or Antique Color shall be selected by Landscape Architect.
b. The product shall be recommended by pattern tool manufacturer and
compatible with integral color additives.
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 5 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Curing and Sealing Compound:
1. Cureseal-S Matte; L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY: Curing and sealing compound
shall comply with ASTM C309 and be of same manufacturer as colored
admixture, for use with integrally colored concrete.
2. The Landscape Architect will approve the colors based on the constructed
mockup.
E. Substitutions: The use of any products other than those specified will be considered
providing that the contractor requests its use in writing within seven (7) days prior to
prior to bid date. This request shall be accompanied by:
1. A certificate of compliance from the material manufacturer stating that the
proposed products meet or exceed the requirements for this specification.
2. Documented proof that the proposed material has a ten (10) year proven record
of performance for staining concrete substrates, confirmed by at least five (5)
local projects that the Landscape Architect could examine.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration.
B. Supplemental admixtures shall not be used unless approved by manufacturer and
Landscape Architect.
C. Do not add water to mix in the field.
D. Add colored admixture to the mix according to manufacturer’s written instructions in
premeasured bags, not by weight of cement content.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which
work will be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install concrete according to requirements of Section 03310 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 6 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. The area to receive integrally colored concrete shall have the sub-grade prepared as
required as for any concrete slab or grade.
C. The formwork shall be installed in accordance with the drawings. The slab thickness
shall be consistent with that of ordinary slabs under the same conditions and as
shown on drawings.
D. Provide reinforcement as specified.
E. Control joints and/or expansion joints shall be provided in accordance with the
drawings and the guidelines established by the American Concrete Institute. As with
any concrete slab, Bomanite colored concrete usually contains construction joints,
control joints and expansion joints. The Contractor shall advise and work with the
Landscape Architect to determine the best location for these joints to minimize the
visibility of the joints and to minimize unsightly cracking.
F. The expansion joint filler color is to be approved by Landscape Architect.
G. The concrete shall be placed and screeded to the finished grade, and floated to a
uniform surface using standard finishing techniques.
H. After the initial curing period, the surface of the slab shall be sealed.
I. Surfaces shall be finished uniformly with the following finish as shown on Drawings:
1. Rock Salt: [Float,] [trowel,] [and] [broom] concrete. Then sprinkle salt on
concrete and press into surface leaving only tops of salt grains exposed. After
24 hours, wash salt away with water and brush. Allow surface and impressions
to dry before applying curing compound.
2. Stamped/Imprinted: Apply pattern according to tool manufacturer's instructions.
Touch-up pattern and finish edges with hand tools as necessary.
3.3 CURING
A. Integrally Colored Concrete: Apply curing and sealing compound for integrally
colored concrete according to manufacturer's instructions using manufacturer's
recommended application techniques. Apply curing and sealing compound at
consistent time for each pour to maintain close color consistency.
B. Curing compound shall be same color as the colored concrete and supplied by same
manufacturer of the colored admixture.
C. Precautions shall be taken in hot weather to prevent plastic cracking resulting from
excessively rapid drying at surface as described in CIP 5 Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
published by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association.
D. Do not cover concrete with plastic sheeting.
3.4 PROTECTION
03366
INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE
Page 7 of 7
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Protect surface treated with sealing compound until dry.
B. Remove no forms for at least 8 hours after initial set. Protect work from pedestrian
and automotive traffic for a period of 3 days after pouring.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to variations in
color and appearance of uncolored concrete, are acceptable. Final acceptance of
colored concrete is at Owner’s sole discretion.
END OF SECTION
04100
MASONRY MORTAR
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
SECTION 04100 - MASONRY MORTAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
Furnish and install mortar for unit masonry materials.
1.2 REFERENCES
ASTM C 91 - Masonry Cement.
ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
ASTM C 207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C 476 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Samples: For color selection and approval by landscape architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use same source or brand of masonry mortar materials for the duration of the Project.
1.5 MATERIAL STORAGE
Store mortar materials in a dry place, off the ground, under cover.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Use Type III high-early strength for laying masonry in
cold weather.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, with 12 percent maximum air content by volume.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type N.
Aggregates: ASTM C 144.
Water: Clean, free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials.
04100
MASONRY MORTAR
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
Mortar Color: As selected by A/E. Provide separate colors for stone and brick.
2.2 MORTAR MIXES
Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents. The use of
calcium chloride in mortar is not permitted.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Meeting the requirements of ASTM C 270.
Masonry Cement: One part masonry cement to three parts sand, proportioned by volume.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING
Mixing mortar with sufficient water for minimum of three minutes in a drum type batch mixer. Mix
mortar thoroughly and only in such quantity as is needed for immediate use. Use mortar within
two hours after mixing. Discard mortar not used within specified time. Clean mixer after four or
five batches have been mixed.
Add water to lime at least 24 hours before mixing it with other materials.
Mortars that have stiffened within time interval stated above because of evaporation of moisture
may be retempered to restore workability by adding water. Do not retemper mortar that has
reached initial set.
In cold weather, heat sand or water sufficiently to maintain temperature of mortar above 50
degrees F as follows:
Heat sand or mixing water: 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F.
Heat sand and mixing water: 32 degrees F to 20 degrees F.
3.2 MEASURING MATERIALS
Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight.
Do not measure by shovel.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 04100-A - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Mortar and grout for masonry.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Include design mix, indicate the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270
used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
B.Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
C.Reports for Information:
1.Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property
requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780.
2.Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials
to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM
C1019.
D.Manufacturer's Certificate for Information: Certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing,
and foreign matter.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 45 degrees F prior
to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B.Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior
to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color.
B.Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C.Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D.Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404.
E.Grouts Fine Aggregate: Sand.
F.Water: Clean and potable.
2.2 MORTAR MIXES
A.Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M or S using
the Property specification.
B.Mortar for Engineered Masonry: ATM C270 Type M or S using the property
specification.
2.3 MORTAR MIXING
A.Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities
needed for immediate use.
B.Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
C.Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
D.If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
E.Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or
two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 45 degrees F.
2.4 GROUT MIXES
A.Bond Beams, Lintels and Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10
inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine and course grout.
2.5 GROUT MIXING
A.Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in
accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout.
B.Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
2.6 MIX TESTS
A.Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270.
B.Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength,
and slump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Plug clean-out holes with concrete masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout
pressure.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. Install grout in accordance with
ASTM C476.
B.Work grout into masonry and cavities to eliminate voids.
C.Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by
rodding.
D.Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.
B.Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A.Concrete Masonry Unit:
1.Type M or S mortar.
2.Color to be selected by Architect.
END OF SECTION
04230
STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
Page 1 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 04230 – STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section includes furnishing all materials, equipment and services as required in
conjunction with or properly incidental to construction of all masonry as described and/or as
shown on the Drawings.
C. Comply with Drawings and General Requirements and referenced documents.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Concrete masonry unit manufacturer shall certify that masonry units furnished meet or exceed
requirements of this Specification.
B. The Work in this Section, unless noted on the Drawings, or herein specified shall be governed
by the latest edition of the following codes or specifications:
1. ACI 531 "Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry Structures".
2. ASTM C145 "Standard Specification for Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units".
3. ASTM C270 "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry".
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings showing dimensions necessary for fabrication and placement of
reinforcement and accessories.
B. Do not make shop drawings using reproductions of Contract Drawings.
C. Submit in writing any requests for modification to Drawings or Specifications. Submitting
shop drawings for review does not constitute "in writing" unless it is brought to the attention of
the Architect that specific changes are being suggested.
1.04 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Deliver materials to job site in undamaged condition.
B. Store concrete masonry units on raised platforms. Cover and protect units from inclement
weather.
C. Store mortar and grout materials in manner to prevent intrusion of moisture and
contaminants.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Masonry construction shall be in compliance with "Recommended Practices and
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction", adopted February 1975 by
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council and as specified herein.
B. Lay no concrete masonry unit when air temperature is below 40F unless materials are
protected from weather and laid up in shelter. In such instances, maintain materials and
surrounding air temperature to minimum 50F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion
of masonry work.
C. In temperatures exceeding 100F, do not lay out mortar beds ahead of placing units. Use a
very light fog spray, not sufficient to penetrate masonry, on vertical surface of masonry to aid
in mortar curing during the first 24 hours after placing units.
04230
STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
Page 2 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Block
1. Hollow load-bearing units:
a. ASTM C90, Grade N general purpose, Type I moisture-controlled. Units shall have a
compressive strength of 2,000 psi on net area.
b. Nominal face dimensions: 8" high x 16" long.
c. Provide standard and fire rated units.
d. Provide colors as noted on plans.
2. Provide normal weight aggregate units.
3. Masonry Units shall be manufactured by Feather Lite Building Products, P.O. Box 1029,
Austin, Texas 78767, 512-472-2424.
4. Special Shapes:
a. 8" and 12" smooth and split face block hollow core units.
B. Flashing:
1. 20-mil minimum thickness elastomeric impermeable sheet material.
2. Resistant to corrosive effects of masonry mortar.
3. Acceptable product: Nervastral HD, Rubber and Plastics Compound Co., Inc.
C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing:
1. Continuous open-web welded wire trusses, 9 ga. side rods and diagonal ties, galvanized
finish, welded at 16" intervals to continuous side rods forming truss design.
2. Prefabricated corner and "tee" intersecting units.
3. Size for single width construction.
4. Acceptable products: Dur-0-Wall, Dur-0-Wall Company; Blok-Trus, AA Wire Products
Company; Trus-Mesh, Hohmann and Barnard.
D. Reinforcing Rods: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
E. Weeps: PVC plastic tubes or sash cord.
F. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C150, Type I or Type III, non-staining.
2. Use of masonry cement will not be permitted.
G. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
H. Mortar Aggregates:
1. ASTM C144, free of clay or organic matter.
2. Gradation:
Sieve Size: Percent Passing:
No. 4 100
No. 8 95 to 100
No. 16 60 to 100
No. 30 35 to 70
No. 50 15 to 35
No. 100 2 to 15
No. 200 10 to 2
I. Portland Cement Grout Aggregates: ASTM C33, pea gravel uniformly graded from 3/8" to
1/2".
J. Water: Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic matter.
K. Cleaning Agents:
1. Combination of surface acting acids and wetting agent for general purpose cleaning of
new masonry surfaces.
04230
STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
Page 3 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Acceptable Product: Sure-Klean No. 600 Detergent, Pro/So/Co., Inc.
2.02 MIXES
A. Mortar Proportions:
1. Non-load-bearing walls: ASTM C270, Type N, 750 psi at 28 days (1:1:6)
2. Load-bearing walls: ASTM C270, Type S, 1800 psi at 28 days (1:1/2:4-1/2)
B. Portland Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand, pea gravel and water proportioned to
produce 2,500 psi at 28 days with 9 1/2" slump when placed.
C. Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions by measuring materials by volume.
Measurement by shovel will not be permitted.
D. Mix mortar in accordance with requirements of BIA M 1 and grout in accordance with ASTM
C476.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect foundation to assure surfaces to support masonry are to proper grade and elevation
and free from dirt or other deleterious matter.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Lay only dry units, free of paint, oil, efflorescence or foreign matter.
2. Remove laitance, loose aggregate or anything that prevents bonding to foundation.
B. Reinforcement: Before being placed, remove loose coatings from reinforcement.
C. Use masonry saws to cut masonry units.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Tolerances:
1. Maximum Variation from Plumb:
a. Vertical lines and surfaces of columns and walls:
(1) 1/4" in 10'-0"
(2) 3/8" in 20'-0" maximum
(3) 1/2" in maximum
b. External corners or control joints:
(1) 1/4" in 20'-0"
(2) 1/2" in 40'-0" maximum.
2. Maximum Variation from Level or Grades for Exposed Lintels, Sill, Parapets or Horizontal
Grooves:
a. 1/4" on any bay or 20'-0"
b. 1/2" in 40'-0"
3. Maximum Variation from Plan Location of Linear Building Line or Related Portions of
Columns, Walls and Partitions:
a. 1/2" in any bay or 20'-0"
b. 3/4" in 40'-0"
4. Maximum Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions of Columns and Thickness of Walls: -
1/4"; + 1/2"
B. Pattern Bond: Running bond with vertical joints located at centerline of masonry units in
alternate courses unless noted otherwise on architectural drawings.
04230
STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
Page 4 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. General:
1. Set units plumb, true to lien and with level courses accurately spaced within allowable
tolerances.
2. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM allowables.
3. Adjust masonry unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic.
4. Where adjustment must be made or if units are displaced after mortar has stiffened,
remove units, clean joints and units of mortar and relay with fresh mortar.
5. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they are set in position.
6. Adjust shelf angles to keep masonry level and at proper elevation.
7. Provide pressure relieving joints by placing continuous 1/8" foam pad under shelf angle.
D. Mortar Beds:
1. Hollow Units:
a. Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
b. Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs where
adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
E. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints:
1. Construct uniform joints, 3/8" nominal thickness.
2. Shove vertical joints tight.
3. Tool concave joints in exposed surfaces when thumb-print hard with round joints slightly
larger than width of joint.
4. Flush cut all joints not exposed.
5. Fill horizontal joints between top of non-load bearing masonry partitions and underside of
beams or slabs with flexible material.
F. Control Joints:
1. Keep clean of mortar and debris.
2. Install where indicated and at following locations:
a. Changes in thickness, height and direction.
b. Within 8'-0" of corners or offsets.
c. At control or expansion joints in structure.
d. At each side of openings greater than 24" wide.
e. Place control joints at foundation walls, shelf angles, setbacks and materials
expanding at different ratios.
3. Concrete Masonry units:
a. Space joints at 30'-0" o.c. maximum in uninterrupted walls.
b. Provide continuous vertical control joints through bond beams except at lintels above
openings.
c. Offset control joints to ends of lintels.
G. Collar Joints:
1. Keep cavity in cavity walls clean.
2. Remove all protruding mortar fins in cavity to be grouted.
H. Joining of Work:
1. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, remove loose
units and mortar and clean exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry.
2. If necessary to stop off horizontal run of masonry, rack back one-half block length in each
course.
3. Do not use toothing to join new masonry to set or partially set masonry.
I. Reinforcing and Ties:
1. Bars:
a. Reinforce each jamb of wall openings with one bar vertical.
b. Place reinforcing bars in hollow cores vertically where indicated.
04230
STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
Page 5 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing:
a. Fully embed joint truss type reinforcement in each alternate bed joint 16" o.c.
b. Extend joint reinforcement entire length of bed joint.
c. Place reinforcing in course immediately above opening extending at least 16" past
each side of opening.
d. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at ends.
e. Bend or weld at offsets or special conditions.
J. Bond Beams:
1. Provide CMU bond beams at top of CMU walls and lintels above openings.
2. Reinforce bond beams with minimum of two bars and grout.
3. Discontinue bond beams at expansion and control joints.
K. Flashing:
1. General:
a. Clean surface to receive flashing and remove projections which might puncture or
damage flashing material.
b. Seal joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
c. Seal top of flashing to ensure moisture cannot infiltrate behind flashing.
d. Continue flashing around corners. Ensure membrane material is not interrupted in
horizontal plane at corners.
2. Wall base, opening sills and heads:
a. Place flashing on mortar bed and cover with mortar.
b. Start 1/2" from outside face of wall and turn up in cavity 8" minimum.
c. Lap joints 4" minimum.
d. Place flashing under and behind sills.
e. Place flashing over steel lintels.
f. Extend flashing beyond opening jamb lines.
L. Weep Holes:
1. Provide weep holes in head joints in first course immediately above flashing by either
leaving head joint free and clean of mortar, or placing and leaving sash cord or plastic
weeps in joint.
2. 24" o.c. maximum spacing.
3. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar waste.
M. Built-In Work:
1. At completion of conventional masonry unit work, fill holes in joints and tool.
2. Cut out and re-point defective joints.
3. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final
pointing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean initially with stiff brushes and water. Remove efflorescence in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. When cleaning agent is required, apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 square feet.
1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is reviewed.
2. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent and immediately rinse with clear water.
3. Do small sections at a time, working from top to bottom.
4. Protect sash, metal lintels and other corrosive parts when masonry is cleaned with acid
solution.
C. Leave area and surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, drippings and broken masonry.
04230
STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
Page 6 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
END OF SECTION
04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
Page 1 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 04300 - UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units
B. Brick
C. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C. ASTM A 641 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
D. ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Concrete Units: Submit two full size concrete masonry units to show
texture, finishes, and dimensions.
B.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530, ACI 530.1.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Building Code requirements for masonry construction.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F
prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the masonry work with openings and chases for heating, plumbing,
and electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits built into masonry walls. Provide for
installation of bolts, toggles, flashing, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips,
wall plugs, and frames.
04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
Page 2 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.Manufacturers
1. Featherlite
2. Texas Industries
3. Builders Concrete Products
B.Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C 90, Type I - Moisture
Controlled normal weight; standard and split face.
C. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 4, 6, 8, & 12 inches by 16 inches.
Provide special units for:
1. Inside and outside corners of other than 90 degrees.
2. Any reveal work where holes or backside strikings will be exposed.
3. Provide 1" bull nose units for all external corners in interior spaces.
D. Color: To be selected by the architect.
2.2 BRICK UNITS
A. MANUFACTURERS
1. Acme Brick Company
2. Approved equal
B. BRICK UNITS
1. Face Brick: Modular.
2. Size and Shape: 3-5/8-inch by 2-1/4-inch by 7-5/8-inches. Provide solid
units where configuration would show holes.
3. Color: To be selected by the architect.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Joint Reinforcement:
1. Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 641, 3/16-inch side
rods with cross ties.
2. Manufacturers
a) AA Wire Products Company.
b) Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
c) Heckman Building Products.
04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
Page 3 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
d) Hohman and Barnard, Inc.
e)Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America
B. Veneer Anchor Straps with Adjustable Wire Ties:
1. Manufacturers:
a) Wire Bond
b) AA Wire Products Company.
c) Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
d) Heckman Building Products, "Model 315D" and "Model 316".
e) Hohman and Barnard, Inc.
f) Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
2. Corrugated metal 1-1/4-inch by 9-inch size by 22 gauge thick, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A153 B2 steel finish with 3/16-inch diameter wire
ties, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153 B2 steel finish.
2.4 LINTELS AND BEAMS
A. Steel Lintels: Build steel lintels into masonry where required for openings in the
brick veneer.
B. Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls where shown on Drawings.
Bond beams shall be continuous where possible.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
C.Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into
masonry work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place
until building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.3 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
Page 4 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B.Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal
joints of uniform thickness.
C.Align brick coursing with CMU coursing.
D.Brick:
1. Bond: Running and as shown on drawings.
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave.
E. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Block Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave.
3.4 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly
jointed with other work.
B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight,
clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G. Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required.
3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Continuously reinforce mortar joints 16 inches on center vertically in solid
masonry walls meeting cavity walls.
B. Provide ties at 8 inches on center where masonry walls intersect. Install ties in
masonry veneer walls 16 inches on center vertically.
3.6 LINTELS
A. Install lintels over openings.
B. Extend steel lintel angles or plates minimum 8-inches into adjacent masonry.
04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
Page 5 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.7 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install items to be built-in the work and furnished by other
sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb and level.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4-inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16-inch.
C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet and 1/2-inch in 20 feet
or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch per story noncumulative; 1/2-inch in
two stories or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet and 1/4-inch in 10
feet; 1/2-inch in 30 feet.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet.
G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4-inch.
3.9 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with
other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.10 PARGING
A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging.
B.In cavity walls, solidly parge inner wythe masonry. In solid masonry walls,
vertical longitudinal joints between face brick and cement masonry shall be
completely filled by parging either face of backing or back of facing.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test all masonry work.
B. Inspect and test parging work.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
Page 6 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.13 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed
external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 04300-A - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Concrete masonry units
B.Glass block
C.Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
A.ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
B.ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C.ASTM A 641 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
D.ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.Samples: CMU: Submit block samples to show texture, finishes, and dimensions.
B.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530, ACI 530.1.
B.Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.Conform to applicable Building Code requirements for masonry construction.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F
prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A.Coordinate the masonry work with openings and chases for heating, plumbing,
and electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits built into masonry walls. Provide for
installation of bolts, toggles, flashing, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips,
wall plugs, and frames.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.Manufacturers
1.Featherlite
2.Texas Industries
3.Builders Concrete Products
B.Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C 90, Type I - Moisture
Controlled normal weight; standard and split face.
C.Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 4, 6, 8, & 10 inches by 16 inches.
Provide special units for:
1.Inside and outside corners of other than 90 degrees.
2.Any reveal work where holes or backside strikings will be exposed.
3.Provide 1" bull nose units for all external corners in interior spaces.
4.Provide burnished or split face in height as indicated in architectural
drawings
D.Color: To be selected by the architect.
2.2 GLASS BLOCK
A.Manufacturers
1.Pittsburgh Corning
2.Approved equal
B.Hollow Glass Units:
1.Nominal Size: 8 x 8 x 4 inches.
2.Color: Clear glass.
3.Pattern and Design: “Decora” LX
C.Accessories
1.Panel Reinforcing: Two parallel rods with cross rods welded and
galvanized after fabrication.
2.Panel Anchors: Steel strips, punched with elongated holes, pattern
staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
3.Asphalt Emulsion: Water based asphalt emulsion.
4.Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.Joint Reinforcement:
1.Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 641, 3/16-inch side
rods with cross ties.
2.Manufacturers
a)AA Wire Products Company.
b)Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
c)Heckman Building Products.
d)Hohman and Barnard, Inc.
e)Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America
2.4 BEAMS
A.Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls where shown on Drawings.
Bond beams shall be continuous where possible. Reinforce as shown.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B.Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
C.Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into
masonry work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B.Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place
until building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.3 COURSING
A.Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal
joints of uniform thickness.
C.Concrete Masonry Units:
1.Bond: Running and as shown on drawings.
2.Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3.Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.4 PLACING AND BONDING
A.Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly
jointed with other work.
B.Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
E.Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.
F.Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight,
clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G.Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required.
3.5 BUILT-IN WORK
A.As work progresses, install items to be built-in the work and furnished by other
sections.
B.Install built-in items plumb and level.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A.Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4-inch.
B.Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16-inch.
C.Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet and 1/2-inch in 20 feet
or more.
D.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch per story noncumulative; 1/2-inch in
two stories or more.
E.Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet and 1/4-inch in 10
feet; 1/2-inch in 30 feet.
F.Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet.
G.Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4-inch.
3.7 CUTTING AND FITTING
A.Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with
other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B.Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Inspect and test all masonry work.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.9 CLEANING
A.Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B.Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed
external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
04720-A
CAST STONE MASONRY
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 04720-A CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide cast stone fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material
and product used.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction,
connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the
jurisdiction of the project.
C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual
characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Standard: Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute or has on file and
follows a written quality-control plan that includes all elements of the Cast Stone Institute's
"Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection."
C. Testing: Independent testing laboratory.
D. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship.
1. Full-size typical unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cast Stone Applications:
1. Manufacturers: CanyonRock; Owens Corning Cultured Stone, LLC; StoneCraft Offered by
Tapco; Worthington Millwork, LLC; or approved equal.
2. Application: Window sills.
3. Application: Lintels.
4. Application: Coping.
5. Application: Wall panels.
6. Application: Column covers.
7. Concrete Materials:
a. Portland cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
b. Fine Aggregate for Facing Mixes: ASTM C 33 and colors as needed to produce
required cast stone colors.
c. Coarse Aggregate: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33;
04720-A
CAST STONE MASONRY
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce
required cast stone colors.
d. Pigments: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments, color stable, nonfading,
and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
8. Concrete Admixtures:
a. Chloride Content: Containing less than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
b. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
c. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
9. Reinforcement:
a. Steel Bars: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615; galvanized or epoxy-
coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material.
b. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775.
c. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767.
10. Embedded Anchors and Inserts:
a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240, Type 304.
b. Steel: ASTM A 36 and hot-dip galvanized: ASTM A 123.
11. Mortar and Grout:
a. Mortar Mix: ASTM C 270, Type S, for reinforced masonry, masonry below grade and
masonry in contact with earth and ASTM C 270, Type N, for above-grade loadbearing
and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls and for interior loadbearing and
nonloadbearing partitions.
b. Mortar Materials: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
c. Mortar Aggregate: Natural color, ASTM C 144.
d. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.
e. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
f. Color: Colored pigmented mortar where exposed at building exterior and natural color
elsewhere.
12. Fabrication Tolerances:
a. Variation in Cross Section: Do not exceed 1/8 inch.
b. Variation in Length: Do not exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch.
c. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch.
d. Location of Grooves or Anchorages: Not greater that 1/8 inch on formed surfaces or
3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with
uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B. Installation Tolerance: 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet for plumb and level.
C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): 1/16 inch.
D. Replace damaged units. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
05120-A
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 05120-A - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide structural steel for building construction including sub-framing units which are part of the
general framing system. Include related anchors, fasteners, and connectors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material
and product used.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
C. Submit for approval test reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Standards: AISC, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, and applicable
regulations.
C. Testing: Independent testing laboratory
D. Erection Tolerances: AISC standards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Materials:
1. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 572, Grade 50.
2. Structural Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36, Grade 36.
3. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S.
5. Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35.
6. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1.1, Type B
7. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, non-headed type.
8. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A.
9. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, as applicable.
B. Auxiliary Materials:
1. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM A 959.
2. Electrodes for Welding: AWS Code.
3. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 13, compatible with topcoats.
4. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand.
5. Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed ferrous aggregate grouting compound.
6. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed nonmetallic grouting compound, CE
CRD-C621.
05120-A
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with AISC codes and specifications, and with AWS "Structural Welding Code".
B. Employ a registered engineer to check elevations and plumb and level tolerances; certify that
installed work is within AISC Standards. Owner may engage testing/inspection agency to
inspect welded and bolted connections.
C. Architecturally exposed steel: Fabricate with special care using materials carefully selected for
best appearance. Store materials off ground and keep clean. Cut, fit and assemble work with
surfaces smooth, square and with complete contact at joints. Set all cambers up. Weld all work
continuously; grind smooth and flush to make seams not visible after priming. Prepare surfaces
to comply with SSPC-SP6; apply prime coat within 24 hours after cleaning.
D. Touch-up field welds and abraded areas with shop primer.
END OF SECTION
05120-S
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 1 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A. Work Included: This section covers furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and
services in connection with the furnishings, fabrication and erection of all
structural steel work complete including:
1. Steel columns
2. Steel beams and purlins
3. Shelf angles
4. Bolts
5. Angle frames and openings
6. Leveling plates and anchor plates not cast in concrete or masonry.
7. Shop painting
B. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete the
structural steel frame, regardless of whether all such parts are definitely shown
or specified, and furnish all such bolts, gussets, plates, etc., as may be required
for the proper assembly of all items. Workmanship shall be of the best quality
known to the trade, and all work shall be carefully assembled, fabricated and
erected true to the lines, elevations and designs shown on the Drawings.
C. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Quality Requirements: Section 01410
2. Embedded metal assemblies: Section 03300
3. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500
4. Painting: Section 09912
5. Grouting structural steel: Section 03300
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - June 1, 1989, with
commentary.
2. Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges - September
1, 1986 with commentary.
B. American National Standards Institute (NASI)/American Welding Society (AWS):
1. ANSI/AWS D1.1-81 Structural Welding Code
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 36 Structural Steel (For areas not exposed to the weather)
05120-S
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 2 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. ASTM A 325 High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. Provide Type
III bolts for areas exposed to the weather.
3. ASTM A 500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
4. ASTM A 501 for hot-formed welded structural tubing.
5. ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) Standard Specification for Structural Steel
Shapes and Plates exposed to the weather.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
1. Contractor shall be responsible for fabrication and erection omissions and
errors and for conformance with the drawings and specifications relative
to the various details.
2. Architect's review will cover member sizes, methods of connections and
general arrangements but not dimensions or quantities. The strength of
the connections shall be the responsibility of the Structural Steel
Fabricator, unless otherwise shown on sections and details.
3. Shop drawings shall indicate shop and erection details, including cuts,
copes, connections, holes, thread fasteners and welds. A sealed letter
from a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas shall be
submitted by the Fabricator certifying that the shop drawings, including
the design of all connections, have been produced under his direct
supervision. Shop drawings submitted without the Fabricators PE letter
will not be reviewed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Bolts and other anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete and masonry
shall be delivered to the site before the start of concrete and masonry work.
Furnish setting drawings and templates for the installation of anchor bolts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel:
1. ASTM A 36, plates and bars for steel not exposed to the weather.
2. ASTM A 992, wide flange members for steel not exposed to the weather.
3. ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) for all shapes and plates exposed to the
weather.
B. Structural tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, cold-formed welded steel structural
tubing. Use ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) steel for steel exposed to the weather.
C. Pipe columns: ASTM A 501, hot-formed welded steel structural tubing. Use
ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) steel for steel exposed to the weather.
D. High-strength threaded fasteners: ASTM A 325, Bearing Type bolts, nuts and
05120-S
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 3 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
plain hardened washers for connections not exposed to the weather. Use ASTM
A 325, Bearing Bolts, Type III for connections of all members made out of Cor-
Ten B steel. Unless otherwise noted the minimum bolt diameter shall be 3/4".
E. Stud anchors: Headed stud anchors with a smooth shank, or carbon steel with a
minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, and as manufactured by Nelson Stud
Welding Div. or KSM Welding Systems Div.
F. Shop Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-86G. Provide fabricator’s standard rust inhibitive
metal primer with solids content not less than 55% by weight.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with referenced specifications.
1. Drawings indicate the design, sections and weight of members. Make no
substitutes except with the written permission of the Architect.
Dimensions scaled from the drawings shall not be used for fabrication.
Contractor shall, when necessary, measure and determine actual
dimensions at the building. All existing building dimensions that might
offset the fabrication of steel members shall be verified by the Contractor
prior to fabrication.
2. Workmanship shall conform to the best practice in structural steel shops.
Materials shall be clean and straight. Shop kinks will not be permitted.
B. Connections shall conform to the standard specifications of the American
Institute of Steel Construction. All bolted connections shall be friction type.
C. Punching: Shop-punch steel members for bolts and hanger rods needed to
support wood nailers and other items.
D. Marking: Components of high strength steel required to have a yield stress
greater than 36 kips/sq. in. shall be clearly marked with the ASTM designation
over any shop coat prior to shipment from the fabricator's plant.
E. Shop Painting:
1. Cor-Ten B steel and steel to be encased in concrete or sprayed with
fireproofing and steel surface to be welded shall not be painted. Clean
this steelwork of oil and grease with solvent cleaner and remove dirt and
other foreign matter by sweeping with brushes or with compressed air.
2. Steelwork to be primed shall be given one coat shop paint to a minimum
dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Clean this steelwork of loose mill scale,
rust, weld, slag, dirt and other foreign matter. Clean welds of spatter,
smoke and iron oxide film. Remove oil and grease with solvent cleaner.
3. Apply shop paint to dry surfaces thoroughly and evenly by brush, spray,
roller coating or dipping at the election of the fabricator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
05120-S
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 4 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Erection of structural metal shall comply with the requirements of referenced
codes and standards.
1. The use of a cutting torch for field connection of fabricating errors will be
permitted only with the approval of the Architect. For each fabrication
error the Contractor shall submit a drawing of existing conditions and the
proposed correction for the Architect's review.
2. Set column base plates to correct elevations and support temporarily on
shims until the columns have been plumbed and grouted.
3. Make field connections by electric arc welding or with friction type high
strength bolts.
B. Make high strength bolted connections in conformance with "Specifications for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts" as approved by the
Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints, August 14, 1980.
1. Prior to installation, clean bolts, nuts and washers, if required. Dirt and
noticeable rust on bolts, nuts and washers will not be allowed.
2. Where long slotted holes are used, provide plate washers or bars in
conformance with Article 3, paragraph (a) 3. of the above mentioned
specification.
C. Erect steel framing true and plumb and brace temporarily where necessary to
handle all loads to which the structure may be subjected. Such bracing shall be
left in place as long as required for safety, and finally shall be removed by the
Contractor as part of his equipment. Securely connect all work to take care of
dead load, wind and erection stresses.
D. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, field connections and abraded
areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same materials as used
shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils, equal to that of the original shop coat.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following testing and inspection: (Prior to placement of steel deck).
1. Check temporary bracing of steel frame.
2. Check location and condition of anchor bolts.
3. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame.
4. Visually inspect common bolts.
5. Inspection of high-strength bolting:
(a) Visually inspect connections.
(b) Check tightness of at least 33% of connections.
(c) Check at least two bolts of each girder to column connection.
6. Visually inspect field and shop welds.
7. Ultrasonic or X-ray testing of full penetration welds when requested by
the Architect or Structural Engineer.
8. Re-inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor.
9. Verify that no members are damaged.
10. Certify that materials and installation are according to Contract
05120-S
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 5 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Documents and industry standards.
B. Correction: The fabricator or erector shall correct deficiencies in structural steel
work which inspection and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance
with the specified requirements. Perform all additional tests required to
reconfirm non-compliance of the original work and to show compliance of
corrected work.
C. Verify that all welders employed during erection of structural steel are certified
for type of base materials and positions encountered. Certification testing to be
performed at Contractors expense.
END OF SECTION 05120 - S
05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1,
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide miscellaneous metal work as detailed and as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Drawings shall
indicate each item being furnished including materials, quantities, sizes, shapes,
size and types of anchors, locations finish types and installation details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Structural Steel: ASTM A-36.
B. Cast and Miscellaneous Loose Steel: ASTM A-36 (A-27).
C. Bolts: ASTM A-307, Grade A.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53 black seamless pipe, Grade B, Schedule 40, free of pits
and abrasions.
E. Aluminum Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5.
F. Primer: Tnemec Series 60 Hi-Build Epoxy Line 5.0 mils thick dry minimum coat.
G. Surface Paint: Tnemec Series 73 Endurashield III, 2 coats at a min. of 4.0 mils
thick per coat dry.
H. Setting Grout: Pro-Loc, non-shrink, setting grout.
I. Stainless Steel Bolts: Conform to ASTM F-593-91.
2.2 ITEMS OF WORK - FABRICATED
A. Miscellaneous Steel and Aluminum Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes,
angles, plates, pipe, tubing, connections and bolts where shown and detailed on
Drawings.
05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Shop fabricate sections in maximum lengths possible for final installation in the
field.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Shop Paint: Miscellaneous ferrous metal items, except those indicated to be
galvanized or those with a factory finish, shall be solvent cleaned (SSPC SP1)
and hand tool cleaned (SP2-63) and then given one coat of Specified Primer in
shop before delivery to job site.
B. Galvanized Finish: Zinc-coating conforming to ASTM A123 and ASTM A-385.
C. Decorative Shop Finishes: Decorative metal shall be solvent cleaned (SSPC
SP1) and then commercial blast cleaned (SP6-63) to completely remove mill
scale, rust and other foreign deposits and to provide a uniform satin finish to
exposed surfaces. Coat surfaces with the specified primer to minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils.
D. Anodizing:
1. Finish exposed surfaces in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes
Manual.
2. Aluminum: NAAMM AMP 501, (Clear anodized natural finish).
3. Mill Finish: AAMIO, as fabricated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Work shall be made and erected square, plumb, straight and true, accurate fitted, and
with tight joints and intersections. Work shall be adequately reinforced and anchored in
place. Welding shall conform to best modern practice to be of adequate strength and
durability, with jointing made tight, flush and in true plane with base metals, clean and
smooth. Form exterior joints to exclude water. Welded connections in exposed
members shall be ground smooth and polished. Install stock manufactured items in
accordance with manufacturers directions. Leave items plumb, level and securely
fastened.
3.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
Where aluminum surfaces will contact steel, other incompatible metals, masonry, stone
or concrete, keep the aluminum surfaces from direct contact with such dissimilar
material by painting the incompatible metal with prime coat of zinc chrome primer
followed by one or two coats of aluminum metal paint or other suitable protective coating
excluding those containing lead pigmentation.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
SECTION 05500-A - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide the following metal fabrications:
1.Rough hardware.
2.Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3.Shelf and relieving angles.
4.Miscellaneous framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles.
5.Miscellaneous steel trim.
6.Edgings.
7.Metal fabrications where noted on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for
each material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Ferrous Materials:
1.Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
2.Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786.
3.Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or A 501.
4.Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611 or A 570.
5.Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 or A 569.
6.Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 and G90.
7.Steel Pipe, Black Finish: ASTM A 53.
8.Steel Pipe, Galvanized Finish: ASTM A 53.
9.Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
10.Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510.
11.Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
12.Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
13.Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type.
14.Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS specifications.
15.Zinc-Coating: Hot-dip galvanized coating for materials in exterior assemblies or
exterior walls.
B.Stainless Steel Materials:
1.Bar Stock: ASTM A 276, Type 302 or 304.
2.Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304.
C.Aluminum Materials:
1.Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221 aluminum alloy.
2.Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632 aluminum alloy.
3.Rivets: ASTM B 316, aluminum alloy.
4.Sheet for Expanded Aluminum Grating: ASTM B 209.
5.Fasteners: ASTM A 153.
6.Finish: Mill finish.
7.Finish: Clear anodized.
D.Fasteners:
1.Bolts and Nuts: Hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
2.Lag Bolts: Square head, FS FF-B-561.
3.Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
4.Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
5.Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
6.Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325.
7.Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588.
8.Lock Washers: Spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
9.Zinc-Coating: Fasteners in exterior assemblies or exterior walls.
E.Auxiliary Materials:
1.Nonshrink Metallic Grout: CE CRD-C621.
2.Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: CE CRD-C621.
3.Interior Anchoring Cement: Hydraulic expansion cement.
4.Exterior/Interior Anchoring Cement: Erosion-resistant hydraulic expansion
cement.
5.Shop Primer: Alkyd primer, FS TT-P-645, compatible with topcoats.
6.Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC - Paint 20.
7.Bituminous Paint: Asphalt mastic, SSPC - Paint 12.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do
not delay job; allow for cutting and fitting if field measurement not practical.
B.Form work true to line with sharp angles and edges. Weld continuously, grind flush
and make smooth on exposed surfaces.
C.Install work plumb and level with hairline joints and ground flush welds.
D.Touch-up damaged coatings with shop primer and galvanize repair paint or paint as
specified.
E.Paint items scheduled in accordance with painting section.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 06110-A - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Section Includes:
1.Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.
2.Wall and roof sheathing.
3.Curbs, cants, and blocking.
B.Related Sections:
1.Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-place Concrete.
2.Section 06 17 53 – Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses
1.2 REFERENCES
A.American Forest & Paper Association
B.American Wood Council
C.ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber
Standards.
D.APA (American Plywood Association).
E.AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products -
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process
F.NFPA (National Forest Products Association).
G.SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau).
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Mill and Producers Mark: Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be
gradestamped indicating type, grade, mill, and grading agency certified by
the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee. Mark
shall appear on unfinished surface, or ends of pieces with finished surfaces.
B.Pressure Preservative Treated Material: Accredited agency quality mark on
each piece of wood indicating treatment.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Keep materials dry during delivery. Store materials 6 inches minimum
above ground surface. Protect against exposure to weather and contact
with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air
circulation between stacks.
B.Cover stored materials until ready for use for protection from moisture.
Place and anchor covering in a manner which will assure good ventilation
under the covering.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A.Refer to framing drawings for specific member design
B.Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA and SPIB.
C.Beam Framing: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, No. 2 grade, 19
percent maximum moisture content.
D.Joist Framing: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, No. 2 grade, 19
percent maximum moisture content.
E.Rafter Framing: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, No. 2 grade, 19
percent maximum moisture content.
F.Studding: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, grading per sheet
S1.1, 19 percent maximum moisture content.
2.2 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A.Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, 23/32” Span Rating 40/20;
Exposure Durability 1; unsanded
B.Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, 7/16” Span Rating 24/0; Exposure
Durability 1; unsanded.
C.Floor and Flat Roof Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Underlayment,
23/32” Span Rating 48/24; Exposure Durability 1; sanded.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
A.Treat lumber and plywood where indicated and as specified. Comply with
applicable AWPA U1 Standards and quality control and inspection
requirements.
B.Fasteners and anchoring devices to be used with wood treated with
waterbourne preservatives shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel
if the wood will be exposed to moisture.
C.Complete fabrication of items to be treated to the greatest extent possible
prior to treatment. Where items must be cut after treatment, coat cut
surfaces with heavy brush coat of the same chemical used for treatment or
other solution recommended by AWPA Standards for the treatment.
D.Inspect wood after treating and drying. Discard warped or twisted items.
E.Wood Treatment: Compatible with galvanized metal connector plates,
unless other compatible protective finish for connector plates is approved by
the Director for use with approved treatment.
1.Preservative Treatment: Category UC3A for Exterior Construction
above Ground; coated and exposed to rapid water runoff.
2.Preservative Treatment: Category UC3B for Exterior Construction
above Ground; uncoated and exposed to poor water runoff.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.Nailers, blocking, cants, shim stock, and similar members used in
conjunction with roofing (including related flashings, trim and vapor
barrier), coping, and waterproofing.
4.Nailers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members
in contact with exterior masonry and concrete (including interior
wythe of exterior walls), and all sills for framing.
5.Wood items indicated or scheduled on the Drawings to be
preservative treated.
F.Wood Treatment: Compatible with galvanized metal connector plates,
unless other compatible protective finish for connector plates is approved by
the Director for use with approved treatment.
1.Preservative Treatment: Category UC4A for Ground Contact or
Freshwater; Non-critical components.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A.Fasteners: Hot dipped or electro galvanized steel for high humidity and
treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
B.Structural Framing Connectors and Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized
steel, sized to suit framing conditions, manufactured by Simpson.
C.Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry, expansion
shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete, bolts or
ballistic fasteners for anchorages to steel.
D.Spacer panel clips: Install mid-span of each sheet.
E.Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed
F.Drywall Screws: Bugle head, steel, power driven type, length 3 times
thickness of sheathing.
G.Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate and supporting structure on
which rough carpentry is to be installed for defects that will adversely affect
the execution and quality of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected
3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.Do not use units of material with defects which impair the quality of the Work
and units which are too small to fabricate the Work with minimum joints or
with optimum joint arrangement.
B.Install Work accurately to required lines and levels with members plumb and
true, accurately cut and fitted and securely fastened. Closely fit rough
carpentry to other associated construction.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
C.Securely attach carpentry Work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as
indicated or, if not indicated, as required by the referenced standards.
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate through members where
opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make
tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood; predrill as required. Set nail heads in exposed Work which is to be
painted or stained and fill resulting holes.
D.Treated Wood: Apply heavy brush coat of treatment material to field cut
surfaces. (Not required for pressure treated wood materials)
3.3 WOOD FRAMING
A.Install framing members of nominal sizes indicated or of units built-up to
dimensions indicated, on spacings shown. Unless otherwise indicated,
comply with the recommendations of the AFPA “Manual for Wood Frame
Construction”. Construct required openings for installation of related work.
Do not splice structural members between supports.
B.Anchor and nail members as indicated. If not indicated, comply with the
“Recommended Nailing Schedule - Table 1” of the “Manual for Wood Frame
Construction” and other applicable recommendations of the AFPA.
C.Install miscellaneous blocking and framing indicated and as required for
attachment and support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and
trim.
D.Erect wood framing members level and plumb. Place horizontal members
laid flat, crown side up. Construct framing members full length without
splices.
E.Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to
maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of
erection and installation of permanent bracing.
F.Double or triple members at openings as required by design. Space short
studs over and under opening to stud spacing.
G.Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Construct
double joists under wall studding.
H.Bridge joists in excess of 8 ft span or as detailed, at mid-span members. Fit
solid bridging at ends of members.
I.Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious
foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inch.
J.Construct load bearing framing and curb members full length without
splices.
K.Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form
corners by alternating lapping side members.
L.Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck
openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet construction.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
M.Coordinate installation of wood decking, glue laminated structural units, and
prefabricated wood trusses.
3.4 SHEATHING
A.Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends
staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing. Use sheathing clips
between sheets between roof framing members.
B.Secure wall sheathing horizontally perpendicular to wall studs, with ends
staggered, over firm bearing.
C.Install plywood two span minimum continuous.
D.Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing
material where required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of
electrical panel.
E.Comply with printed installation requirements of the APA Design/
Construction Guide, Residential & Commercial for plywood application
required, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 BLOCKING, CURBS, AND CANTS
A.Construct curb [and cants] members of single pieces per location.
B.Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form
corners by lapping side members alternately.
C.Coordinate work with installation of decking and support of decking at
openings.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A.Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B.Surface Flatness of Roof: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30
feet maximum.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 06175-A - SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide shop fabricated and pre-engineered wood trusses.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.BCSI: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses jointly produced by WTCA – Representing
the Structural Building Components Industry and the Truss Plate Institute.
B.Building Designer: The person that contracts with the Owner for the design of the
Framing Structural System and/or who is responsible for the preparation of the
Construction Documents. When mandated by the Legal Requirements, the
Building Designer shall be a Registered Design Professional.
C.Building: Structure used or intended for supporting or sheltering any use or
occupancy.
D.Building Code: As it applies to a Building, any set of standards set forth and
enforced by a Jurisdiction for the protection of public safety.
E.Building Official: Officer or other designated authority charged with the
administration and enforcement of the Building Code, or a duly authorized
representative.
F.Construction Documents: Written, graphic and pictorial documents prepared or
assembled for describing the design (including the Framing Structural System),
location and physical characteristics of the elements of a Building necessary to
obtain a Building Permit and construct a Building.
G.Contractor: Owner of a Building, or the person who contracts with the Owner, who
constructs the Building in accordance with the Construction Documents and the
Truss Submittal Package. The term "Contractor" shall include those
subcontractors who have a direct contract with the Contractor to construct all or a
portion of the construction.
H.Cover/Truss Index Sheet: Sheet that is signed and sealed, where required by the
Legal Requirements, by the Truss Design Engineer, and depending on the Legal
Requirements shall be permitted to contain the following information: (1)
identification of the Building, including Building name and address, lot, block,
subdivision, and city or county; (2) identification of Construction Documents by
drawing number(s) with revision date; (3) specified Building Code; (4) computer
program used; (5) roof dead and live loads; (6) floor dead and live loads; (7) wind
load criteria from a specifically defined code (e.g., ASCE 7) and any other design
loads (such as ponding, mechanical loads, etc.); (8) name, address and license
number of Registered Design Professional for the Building, if known; (9) a listing
of the individual identification numbers and dates of each Truss Design Drawing
2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
referenced by the Cover/Truss Index Sheet; and (10) name, address, date of
drawing and license number of Truss Design Engineer.
I.Jurisdiction: Governmental unit that is responsible for adopting and enforcing the
Building Code.
J.Legal Requirements: Any applicable provisions of all statutes, laws, rules,
regulations, ordinances, codes, or orders of the governing Jurisdiction.
K.Owner: Person having a legal or equitable interest in the property upon which a
Building is to be constructed, and: (1) either prepares, or retains the Building
Designer or Registered Design Professional to prepare the Construction
Documents; and (2) either constructs, or retains the Contractor to construct the
Building.
L.Registered Design Professional: Architect or engineer, who is licensed to practice
their respective design profession as defined by the Legal Requirements of the
Jurisdiction in which the Building is to be constructed.
M.Standard: National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Construction (ANSI/TPI 1).
N.Truss: Individual metal-plate-connected wood component manufactured for the
construction of a Building.
O.Truss Design Drawing: Written, graphic and pictorial depiction of an individual
Truss that includes the information required in the Standard.
P.Truss Design Engineer: Person who is licensed to practice engineering as defined
by the Legal Requirements of the Jurisdiction in which the Building is to be
constructed and who supervises the preparation of the Truss Design Drawings.
Q.Truss Designer: Person responsible for the preparation of the Truss Design
Drawings.
R.Truss Manufacturer: Person engaged in the fabrication of Trusses.
S.Truss Placement Diagram: Illustration identifying the assumed location of each
Truss.
T.Truss Submittal Package: Package consisting of each individual Truss Design
Drawing, and, as applicable, the Truss Placement Diagram, the Cover/Truss Index
Sheet, Lateral Restraint and Diagonal Bracing details designed in accordance with
generally accepted engineering practice, applicable BCSI defined lateral restraint
and diagonal bracing details, and any other structural details germane to the
Trusses.
1.3 DESIGN
A.Trusses shall be designed in accordance with the Standard and where any
applicable design feature is not specifically covered herein, design shall be in
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
accordance with the applicable provisions of the latest edition of the American
Forest & Paper Association's (AF&PA’s) National Design Specification® (NDS®) for
Wood Construction and all applicable legal requirements.
B.Truss Manufacturer shall furnish Truss Design Drawings prepared in accordance
with all applicable legal requirements.
C.Truss Manufacturer shall furnish a Truss Placement Diagram which shall provide
at a minimum the location assumed for each Truss based on the Truss
Manufacturer's interpretation of the Construction Documents.
D.Truss Manufacturer shall submit the Truss Submittal Package to the Building
Designer and/or the local Building Official for review and approval prior to the
manufacturing of the Trusses.
E.The Truss Design Drawings shall include, at a minimum, the information specified
below (per the Standard):
1.Building Code used for Design, unless specified on Cover/Truss Index Sheet.
2.Slope or depth, span and spacing.
3.Location of all joints and support locations.
4.Number of plies if greater than one.
5.Required bearing widths.
6.Design loads as applicable, including:
a.Top Chord live load (for roof Trusses, this shall be the controlling case of
live load or snow load);
b.Top chord dead load;
c.Bottom chord live load;
d.Bottom chord dead load;
e.Additional loads and locations;
f.Environmental Load Design Criteria (wind speed, snow, seismic, and all
applicable factors as required to calculate the Truss loads); and
g.Sprinkler Loads: Obtain sprinkler drawings from sprinkler design
company and design roof trusses for the concentrated loads of the
sprinkler piping to meet the loading criteria of NFPA 13
h.Other lateral loads, including drag strut loads.
7.Adjustments to Wood Member and Metal Connector Plate design values for
conditions of use.
8.Maximum reaction force and direction, including maximum uplift reaction
forces where applicable.
9.Metal Connector Plate type, manufacturer, size, and thickness or gauge, and
the dimensioned location of each Metal Connector Plate except where
symmetrically located relative to the joint interface.
10.Size, species and grade for each Wood Member.
11.Truss-to-Truss connection and Truss field assembly requirements.
4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
12.Calculated span to deflection ratio and/or maximum vertical and horizontal
deflection for live and total load and KCR (creep factor) as applicable.
13.Maximum axial tension and compression forces in the Truss members.
14.Fabrication tolerance per the Standard.
15.Required Permanent Individual Truss Member Restraint location and the
method of Restraint/Bracing to be used per the Standard.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for
each material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details
of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. Cut
sheets (profiles) for each truss shall be included with show grade of wood,
member sizes, plate connections, loads, forces, dimensions, etc; Legible plan
sheets of the truss layout shall be provided which show bracing/bridging, member
labels, truss spacing, etc.
1.Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer
licensed in the State of the project. Truss design drawings shall conform with
section 2303.4 of the current version of the International Building Code
2.Deflection Under All Loads: 1/240th of span, maximum.
3.Deflection Under Live Loads: 1/480th of span, maximum for floor trusses,
1/360th of span maximum for roof trusses.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three
years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Standards: TPI, Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses;
TPI, Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood
Trusses.
C.Design Engineering: Registered engineer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Wood Trusses:
1.Lumber Standard: PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard.
2.Dressing: Dressed four sides.
3.Species: Manufacturer's option.
4.Moisture Content: Seasoned, 19 percent maximum, 7 percent minimum.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
5.Grade for Chord and Web Members: As determined by truss manufacturer.
B.Metal Connector Plates:
1.Metal connector plates shall be manufactured by a Truss Plate Institute (TPI)
member plate manufacturer and shall not be less than 0.036 in. thick (20
gauge) and shall meet or exceed ASTM A653/A653M grade 33, and
galvanized coating shall meet or exceed ASTM A924/924M, coating
designation G60. Working stresses in steel are to be applied to effectiveness
ratios for plates as determined by test and in accordance with the Standard.
2.In highly corrosive environments, special applied coatings or stainless steel
may be required.
3.At the request of the Building Designer, a TPI member plate manufacturer
shall furnish a certified record that materials comply with steel specifications
C.Connectors, Fasteners, and Metal Framing Anchors:
1.Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
2.Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
3.Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
4.Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A; ASTM A 563.
5.Metal Framing Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G60.
6.Connectors: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G60.
7.Connectors: Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653; ASTM A 591,
Coating Class C.
2.2 MANUFACTURING
A.Trusses shall be manufactured to meet the quality requirements of the Standard
and in accordance with the information provided in the final approved Truss
Design Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B.Do not allow any trades (ie-plumbing) to cut through truss members, unless
approved by the structural engineer and truss manufacturer.
C.Bracing (both temporary and permanent) shall be installed per the truss
manufacturer’s specifications.
D.Trusses shall be handled during manufacturing, delivery and by the Contractor at
the job site so as not to be subjected to excessive bending.
6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E.Trusses shall be unloaded in a manner so as to minimize lateral strain. Trusses
shall be protected from damage that might result from on-site activities and
environmental conditions. Trusses shall be handled in such a way so as to prevent
toppling when banding is removed.
F.Contractor shall be responsible for the handling, installation, and temporary
restraint/ bracing of the Trusses in a good workmanlike manner and in accordance
with the recommendations set forth in the latest edition of BCSI.
G.Apparent damage to Trusses, if any, shall be reported to Truss Manufacturer prior
to erection.
H.Trusses shall be set and secured level and plumb, and in correct location. Each
Truss shall be held in correct alignment until specified permanent restraint and
bracing is installed.
I.Cutting and altering of Trusses is not permitted. If any Truss should become
broken, damaged, or altered, written concurrence and approval by a Registered
Design Professional is required.
J.Concentrated loads shall not be placed on top of Trusses until all specified
restraint and bracing has been installed and decking is permanently nailed in
place. Specifically avoid stacking full bundles of plywood or other concentrated
loads on top of Trusses.
K.Truss Submittals and any supplementary information provided by the Truss
Manufacturer shall be provided by the Contractor to the individual or organization
responsible for the installation of the Trusses.
L.Trusses shall be permanently restrained and braced in a manner consistent with
good building practices as outlined in BCSI and in accordance with the
requirements of the Construction Documents. Trusses shall furthermore be
anchored or restrained to prevent out-of-plane movement so as to keep all Truss
members from simultaneously buckling together in the same direction. Such
permanent lateral restraint shall be accomplished by: (a) anchorage to solid end
walls; (b) permanent diagonal bracing in the plane of the web members; or (c)
other suitable means.
M.Materials used in temporary and permanent restraint and bracing shall be
furnished by Contractor.
3.2 Quality Control
A.A representative from the wood truss manufacturer shall inspect all wood roof
trusses and verify that they are installed and braced per the manufacturer’s
requirements and the requirements of the WTCA/ TPI guidelines. The
representative shall look for and identify any truss defects or damage that may
have occurred during manufacturing, transportation, or installation. The costs
associated with these inspections shall be paid for by the contractor and included
in the bid pricing from the truss manufacturer / supplier. The truss company shall
provide a letter that states that the installation and bracing of the trusses has been
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
inspected and appears to be per the truss manufacturer’s guidelines, instructions,
and specifications.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07213-A - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide thermal insulation and vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Submit for approval test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Blanket/Batt Insulation:
1.Manufacturers: Johns Manville Building Insulations; Knauf Insulation; Thermafiber,
Inc.; Thermal Design; or approved equal.
2.Application: Thermal insulation at underside of roofs, over all interior spaces.
3.Type: Kraft paper-faced mineral fiber.
a.Standard: ASTM C 665
b.Accessories: Fasteners and tapes.
c.Minimum R value = 36
B.Roof and Deck Insulation:
1.Manufacturers: Hunter Panels; Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp. - Engineered
Wood Products; or approved equal.
2.Application: Exterior roofs and decks.
3.Type: Polyisocyanurate.
C.Foamed in place CMU Wall Insulation:
1.Manufacturers: Core-Fill, or approved equal.
2.Application: Open Cells and Voids in exterior CMU walls.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D.Rigid Cellular Extruded Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
1.Manufacturers: Owens Corning, Styrofoam, or approved equal.
2.Application: On interior side of walls in conditioned spaces.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide full thickness in one layer
over entire area, tightly fitting around penetrations.
B.Protect installed insulation and vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07410-A - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide sheet metal roofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
C.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual
characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Sheet Metal Roofing:
1.Manufacturers: CAP-SEAM; Berridge Manufacturing or approved equal.
2.Seam Type: Standing-seam.
a.Panel profile, size and color to be approved by Architect.
3.Metal: Hot-Dipped Galvanized.
a.Standard: ASTM A446-85 Grade C G90 Coating A525-86 24 Gauge core
steel.
4.Finish: Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating
a.Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the
finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be
removed before installation.
B.Auxiliary Materials:
1.Provide components required for a complete panel system, including trim,
closures, clips, gaskets, fillers, and similar items. Match materials and finish of
preformed panels.
2.Rosin-sized building paper.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.Asphalt saturated organic felt underlayment.
4.Polyethylene underlayment.
5.Rubberized asphalt underlayment.
6.Bituminous isolation coating.
7.Batten bars and strips.
2.2 FABRICATION
A.Panels shall have 18" on-center seam spacing with a seam height of 1".
B.Snap-on seams shall be 1" in height and shall contain a Weather Seal.
C.Concealed anchor clips shall be spaced as required to meet uplift loads
(maximum of 24" on center).
D.When required, Panel assembly shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories Label
UL90, pursuant to Construction Number 296 and applicable Fire Ratings.
E.Certification shall be submitted, based on independent testing laboratory,
indicating no measurable water penetration or air leakage beyond allowable
tolerances through the system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-331-86
and E-283-84.
F.Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with
indicated profiles and dimensional requirements.
G.Metal Gauge: Fabricate panels and accessories with not less than 26 gauge
steel sheet.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Comply with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual recommendations. Comply with accessory
manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with roofing
system to ensure weathertight performance.
B.Anchor securely to structure to withstand inward and outward loads.
C.Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion.
D.Clean and grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07530-A - ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide elastomeric membrane roofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating
visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is
anticipated.
C.Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to
repair or replace defective materials.
1.Warranty Period: 10 years.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Listing: UL Class A external fire exposure.
C.Listing: FM Class I construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.EPDM Membrane Roofing:
1.Manufacturers: Carlisle SynTec; Firestone Building Products Company; GAF
Materials Corporation; GenFlex Roofing Systems; Johns Manville International,
Inc.
2.Type: Fully adhered.
3.Membrane: EPDM, 60 mils, internally reinforced.
a.Standard: ASTM D 4637, II.
4.Walkways: Walkway board.
5.Ballast: Washed, rounded riverbed gravel where indicated on drawings.
6.Cover Board over Insulation: Glass-mat, water resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4”
thick.
7.Color: White
8.Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
9.Insulation Substrate Board: 5/8” thick Glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum, Type X.
a.Standard: ASTM C 1177.
10.Vapor Retarder: Reinforced polyethylene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Inspect substrate and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means
acceptance of substrate.
B.Comply with roof system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations; clean,
prime and prepare substrate.
C.Install insulation with tightly butted joints and neatly fitted around penetrations.
D.Begin roof installation only in presence of manufacturer's representative. Minimize
seams and shingle overlaps to shed water.
E.Where applicable, distribute ballast uniformly to 10 pounds per square foot or more as
required by FM. Obtain approval of ballast weight before loading roof.
F.Install walkway protection or pavers over an additional layer of membrane at locations
indicated and where required to provide access to roof mounted equipment.
G.Restore or replace damaged components. Protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07620-A - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Flashings and counter flashings, and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated on
drawings.
B.Accessories
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.Sheet Metal Flashings: Conform to the following criteria of SMACNA Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual.
1.Coping: SMACNA, Detail Figure 4-12B similar
2.Roof Penetration Flashing: SMACNA Figure 4-19A.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work
with 5 years documented experience.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion. Provide ventilation.
Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A.Concealed locations - Galvanized Steel: ASTM A526/A526M, G90 zinc coating; 24
gage thick steel.
B.Exposed locations – Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000 Prefinished Steel: 24 gauge thick, color
to be selected by Architect.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.Fasteners: Galvanized steel or same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft
neoprene washers.
B.Primer: Zinc molybdate or galvanized iron type
C.Protective Backing Paint: FS TT-C-494, Bituminous
D.Sealant: Type A specified in Section 07900
E.Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I
F.Solder: ASTM B32; 50/50 type
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.3 FABRICATION
A.Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or
defects.
B.Fabricate cleats of type sheet metal; same material as sheet, minimum 2 inches
wide, interlocking with sheet.
C.Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D.Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
E.Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving
joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
F.Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity,
seal with sealant.
G.Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to
form drip.
H.Seal metal joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly
set and nailing strips located.
C.Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B.Paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only
where permitted.
B.Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
C.Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in
planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
D.Seal metal joints watertight.
E.Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean
with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
F.Seal metal joints watertight.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance
with specified requirements.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A.Flashings associated roofing including valley, hip, ridge, eave, gable edge, as
required by roofing manufacturer for roofing system
B.Counter flashings at roofing terminations (over roofing base flashings)
C.Roofing penetration flashings, for pipes and equipment supports
D.All flashings that are visible shall be prefinished or painted to match adjacent
materials as approved by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07710-A - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide manufactured roof specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
C.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual
characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Insurance Requirements: FM approval or acceptance.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Gravity Air Vents:
1.Manufacturers: Berger Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal.
2.Material: Aluminum.
B.Vent Stack Flashing:
1.Manufacturers: Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., or approved equal.
2.Material: Aluminum.
C.Fascia Systems, Extruded Aluminum:
1.Manufacturers: ATAS International, Inc.; Metal-Era, Inc.; MM Systems Corporation,
or approved equal.
2.Materials: 0.60 inch thick, extruded aluminum.
3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel.
D.Fascia Batten and Panel Systems, Extruded Aluminum:
1.Manufacturers: ATAS International Metal-Era Inc., or approved equal.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.Materials: 0.60 inch thick, extruded aluminum.
3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel.
E.Fascia for Single-Ply Roofing, Extruded Aluminum:
1.Manufacturers: ATAS International, Inc.; Metal-Era, Inc. or approved equal.
2.Materials: Fascia, resilient gasket or compression spring, 28 gauge (.018 inch)
zinc-coated steel water dam, and aluminum fascia clip.
3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel.
F.Fascia and Gravel Stops, Aluminum Sheet:
1.Manufacturers: ATAS International, Inc.; Metal-Era, Inc. or approved equal.
2.Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick interlocking with 28 gauge (.018 inch) formed
zinc-coated steel water dam/hold down clip, compression clamp, and compression
pad.
3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel.
G.Fascia Panel Support Systems:
1.Horizontal girts and vertical framing members sized for required wind pressure
loading.
2.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel.
H.Elastic Roof Expansion Joint Covers:
1.Metal flanged elastic-sheet bellows-type joint system, membrane, and metal
flanges compatible with substrate.
2.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Comply with accessory manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate
installation with roofing system to ensure weathertight performance. Anchor securely to
structure to withstand inward and outward loads.
B.Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion.
C.Test and operate units; clean, lubricate and adjust moving parts.
END OF SECTION
07720-A
ROOF ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07720-A - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide roof accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material
and product used.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction,
connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Heat and Smoke Vent Insurance Requirements: UL and FM approval or acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ridge and Soffit Vents:
1. Manufacturers: Trimline Building Products, a Division of Diversi-Plast; or approved equal.
2. Material: Corrugated plastic.
B. Portable Rooftop Pipe, Duct and Equipment Supports:
1. Manufacturers: Advanced Support Products, Inc.; MAPA Products; MIRO Industries, Inc.;
PHP Systems and Design; Universal Support Systems, LLC; or approved equal.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
C. Insulated Roof Hatches with Metal Lid:
1. Manufacturers: Bilco; Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal.
2. Material: Zinc coated steel.
D. Insulated Heat and Smoke Vents with Plastic Dome:
1. Manufacturers: Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal.
2. Material: Aluminum with clear anodized finish.
E. Insulated Heat and Smoke Vents with Metal Lid:
1. Manufacturers: Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal.
2. Material: Zinc coated steel.
07720-A
ROOF ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
F. Safety Railing System for Roof Hatches:
1. Manufacturers: Alaco Ladder Co.; or approved equal.
2. Material: Zinc coated steel.
G. Rooftop Ladders and Platforms:
1. Manufacturers: Alaco Ladder Co.; or approved equal.
2. Material: Aluminum, painted.
H. Rooftop Pedestal Paver Supports:
1. Manufacturers: Bison Deck Supports; Reed & Graham, Inc. Geosynthetics Division; or
approved equal.
2. Material: Thermoplastic polypropylene.
I. Prefabricated Curb and Equipment Support Units:
1. Manufacturers: ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation; or approved equal.
2. Material: Steel, 14 gauge (.0747 inch), hot dip galvanized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with accessory manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate
installation with roofing system to ensure weathertight performance. Anchor securely to structure
to withstand inward and outward loads.
B. Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion.
C. Test and operate units; clean, lubricate and adjust moving parts. Leave units ready for field
painting.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 07900-A - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide joint sealers and fillers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating
visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is
anticipated.
1.Include manufacturer’s full range of color and finish options if additional selection is
required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Each joint type.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces, Silicone:
1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Dow Corning; GE Silicones; or approved equal.
2.Materials: Two component silicone sealant.
B.Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces, Urethane:
1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Pecora Corp.; Sika Corp.; or approved equal.
2.Materials: Two-component urethane sealant.
C.Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces, Preformed Compression Seals:
1.Manufacturers: Watson-Bowman Acme Corp.; or approved equal.
2.Materials: Preformed precompressed foam sealant.
D.Exterior Joints in Horizontal Surfaces, Urethane:
1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Pecora Corp.; Sandell Construction Solutions; Sika Corp.;
Sonneborn; or approved equal.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.Materials: Self-leveling urethane sealant, ASTM C 920.
E.Exterior Paving Joint Fillers, Bituminous:
1.Manufacturers: As submitted.
2.Materials: Bituminous fiber.
F.Interior Joints, Limited Movement, Acrylic:
1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Bostik; Pecora Corporation; Polymeric Systems, Inc.;
Sonneborn Building Products; or approved equal.
2.Materials: Acrylic-emulsion, ASTM C 834.
3.VOC Content: Less than 50 g/L. interior Joints, Sanitary Silicone:
4.Manufacturers: Tremco; Dow Corning; GE Advanced Materials; or approved equal.
5.Materials: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920.
6.VOC Content: Less than 50 g/L.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means
acceptance of substrates.
B.Provide sealants in colors as selected from manufacturer's standards.
C.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
Clean and prime joints, and install bond breakers, backer rods and sealant as
recommended by manufacturers.
D.Depth shall equal width up to 1/2 inch wide; depth shall equal 1/2 width for joints more
than 1/2 inch wide.
E.Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged
sealants. Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 08111-A – STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide steel doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Standards: ANSI/SDI-100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
C.Performance Standards:
1.Thermal-Rated Assemblies at Exterior: ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976.
2.Sound-Rated Assemblies at Mechanical Rooms: ASTM E 1408, and ASTM E 413.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Exterior Steel Doors:
1.Manufacturers: Amweld Building Products; Presray Critical Containment Solutions,
a Division of Pawling Corp.; Steel Door Institute; Steelcraft Manufacturing; Windsor
Republic Doors; or approved equal.
2.Material: Minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel sheet.
3.Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, thermally insulated.
4.Finish: Factory finished.
5.Accessories:
a.Sightproof stationary louvers.
b.Glazing stops.
c.Silencers.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B.Exterior Steel Frames:
1.Manufacturers: Amweld Building Products; Steel Door Institute; Steelcraft; Windsor
Republic Doors; or approved equal.
2.Material: Minimum 14-gauge galvanized steel sheet.
3.Corners: Mitered or coped.
4.Type: Welded.
5.Finish: Factory finished.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Fabricate work to be rigid, neat and free from seams, defects, dents, warp, buckle, and
exposed fasteners. Install doors and frames in compliance with SDI-100, NFPA 80, and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.Provide thermally improved doors with maximum U-value of 0.24 BTU/hr./square foot
degree F (ASTM C 236) for all exterior doors and elsewhere as noted.
C.Provide acoustically improved doors with minimum STC of 33 (ASTM E 90 and ASTM E
413) where indicated.
D.Hardware: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware on final schedule. Provide for
3 silencers on single doorframes; 2 on double doorframes.
E.Shop Finish: Clean, treat and prime paint all work with rust-inhibiting primer comparable
with finish paint specified in Division 9 section. Provide asphalt emulsion sound
deadening coating on concealed frame interiors.
F.Touch up damaged coatings ready to receive finish painting.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08560-A - SPECIAL FUNCTION WINDOWS
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide aluminum, medium-duty commercial sliding service windows.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Manufacturers: C. R. Laurence, or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A.Model: Basis of design is SW5600A
1.Frames: Extruded aluminum
2.Finish: Clear anodized
3.Glazing: ½” insulated
4.Screens: Provide at both openings
5.Security: Keyed Lock
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1.Fabricate windows to conform to AAMA standards and to accept glass specified.
2.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
3.Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work
from damage.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 08710-A - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide door hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications sections.
B.Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of door
hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts are finish, and other
information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C.Final Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below.
Schedule shall be coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper
size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize
hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every
item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:
a.Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item
b.Name and manufacturer of each item.
c.Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d.Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
e.Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc contained in schedule.
f.Mounting locations for hardware.
g.Door and frame sizes and materials.
h.Keying information and Door index.
i.Detailed information of existing conditions as they relate to new hardware
being installed in existing doors and frames.
2.Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly
where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work
which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the
product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware,
and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule.
3.Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the
Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
D.Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, exit
devices, closers, stops, coordinators & flushbolts, etc.) from a single manufacturer. No
exceptions.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are
not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.Cylinders
a.Best – No substitutions.
2.Locksets
a.Schlage
b.Corbin Russwin
3.Push/Pull Units
a.Rockwood
b.Trimco – BBW – Quality
4.Hinges
a.Hager
b.Stanley
5.Closers
a.Norton
6.Door Holders
a.Glynn-Johnson
7.Flushbolts
a.Glynn-Johnson
8.Kick, Mop and Armor Plates
a.Rockwood
b.Trimco – BBW – Quality
9.Door Stripping and Seals
a.National Guard Products
b.Zero
10.Hardware Finishes: Satin chrome unless noted otherwise.
a.Non-Metal products such as seals and frame silencers shall be gray or black.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
11.Auxiliary Materials:
a.Door Trim Units: Edge trim, viewers, knockers, and mail drop, and related trim.
b.Stops and overhead door holders.
c.Weatherstripping and thresholds.
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A.Each Door opening indicated in the Door Schedule is designated a hardware set
corresponding to the sets below. The required hardware elements are listed without
specific brand or part number. The Final Hardware Schedule described above shall
indicate this detailed specification based on the elements listed in the hardware sets.
The contractor shall include all pieces and accessories necessary for the complete and
correct operation of the door assembly whether or not they are listed in the hardware
sets.
B.The standard of quality for different hardware elements is listed in the following articles.
This only represents a standard and the specific product or series is not required. If the
door opening requires a product superior to the quality standard in order to achieve
proper function, that product should be submitted. If a quality standard is not listed for a
particular required hardware element, the architect reserves the right to reject a product
for reasons of quality or aesthetics.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A.Manufacturer’s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer’s products that have
manufacturers’ name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable
nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
1.Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders and arms of
closers.
B.Base Metals: Products, hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated
using manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in
no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable
hardware units for finish designations indicated
C.Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,
generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has
been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
D.Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed
under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other
work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including “prepared for
paint” surfaces to receive painted finish.
E.Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed
except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed
fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face
is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work
adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of
reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
F.Provide all necessary filler plates as required for complete and professional installation.
2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.Match owners standard lock cylinder. Coordinate with the Owner prior to submitting
finished hardware sets.
B.Equip locks with cylinder type as indicated. Furnish construction cores for all locksets
and cylinders. Provide security functions as indicated.
C.Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel or nickel
silver.
D.Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated,
provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike
with a group of related locks.
E.Key Materials: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F.Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master
system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. Deliver keys to Owner.
2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS
A.Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt,
with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors . Comply with
UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
2.6 CLOSERS:
A.Size of units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer’s
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to
weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Factory hand, tag, and pre-size all springs
prior to jobsite delivery. No exceptions.
2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A.General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors. Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
B.Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C.Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal
retainer strips, surface applied.
D.Thresholds: provide Accessibility Code compliant type at entrance and exit doors.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Contractor to provide cores and keys.
B.Follow guidelines of DHI “Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware” and
hardware manufacturers' instructions.
C.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
D.Adjust operation, clean and protect.
3.2 SCHEDULE
A.Hardware Schedule:
HW-1 105, 106, 109, 110A
3 Ea.Butt Hinges
1 Ea.Classroom Lockset
1 Ea.Deadlock
1 Ea.Overhead Stop
1 Set Silencers
1 Ea.Door Bottom
1 Ea.Threshold
1 Set Weatherstrip
HW-2 103
3 Ea.Butt Hinges
1 Ea.Deadlock
1 Set Silencers
HW-3 107
4 Ea. 180° Butt Hinges
2 Ea. Flushbolts
1 Ea. Deadlock – keyed only, no thumbturn on inside
1 Ea. Bottom sweep mount on inside face
1 Ea. Weatherstrip
HW-4 102A, 104A
3 Ea.Butt Hinges
1 Ea.Pull
1 Ea.Push plate
1 Ea.Closer
1 Ea.Deadlock – Keyed only, no thumbturn on inside
1 Ea.Wall Stop
1
1
1
Set
Ea.
Ea.
Silencers
Threshold
Weatherstrip
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
HW-5 102B, 102C, 102D, 102E, 104B, 104C
3 Ea.Butt Hinges
1 Ea.Privacy Lockset
1 Ea.Wall Stop
1 Set Silencers
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 08920-A - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide louvers and vents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
C.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating
visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is
anticipated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Aluminum Wall Louvers:
1.Manufacturers: Airline Products, Airolite; Construction Specialties; Industrial
Louvers; McGill Architectural Products; Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or
approved equal.
2.Material: Aluminum extrusions.
3.Blades: Horizontal sightproof drainable blades.
4.Blade Type: Fixed.
5.Finish: As selected by Architect.
6.Auxiliary Materials:
a.Bird screens.
b.Insect screens.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B.Steel Wall Louvers:
1.Manufacturers: McGill Architectural Products; or approved equal.
2.Material: Galvanized steel.
3.Blades: Horizontal drainable fixed blades.
4.Blades: Horizontal non-drainable, fixed blades.
5.Blade Type: Fixed.
6.Finish: As selected by Architect.
7.Auxiliary Materials:
a.Bird screens.
b.Insect screens.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B.Comply with AMCA Standard 500 and provide units with AMCA Certification rating seal.
Comply with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual except as otherwise indicated.
C.Provide separate continuous sills where needed to prevent water penetration. Maintain
equal blade-to-blade and blade-to-frame spacing for uniform appearance. Provide
concealed vertical mullions and reinforcement as needed.
D.Provide anchors, supports and accessories as needed. Provide gaskets, flashings and
fillers as necessary to make installation watertight.
E.Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/172016
SECTION 09670-A – DECORATIVE MORTAR SYSTEM FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.Furnish and install the mortar flooring system as specified and indicated. Prior to
installation, provide decontamination and cleaning as specified. The term “mortar
flooring system” as used in this section will include the primers, resin systems and
aggregate materials, topcoats, cove building materials, and any related materials
for the project.
2.Complete the mortar flooring system installation in strict accordance with these
specifications, the coating system manufacturer’s most current requirements for
surface preparation, application and inspection, and the instructions for safety. In the
event of a conflict between these specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions,
the more stringent requirements will apply.
3.The Contractor shall be responsible for providing ventilation, initial cleaning,
inspection, supervision, dust control and equipment protection as specified herein
and related sections for the work associated with this Section. The Contractor is
responsible for all other work associated with this Section including protection of
existing equipment and structures in the work area, surface preparation, flooring
application, curing, coating repair, rework, inspection and supervision.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
Division 1 General Requirements
1.3 REFERENCES:
1.Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Specifications and Standards:
1. SSPC-PA-3:“A Guide to Safety in Paint Application”.
2.SSPC-SP-13: “Surface Preparation of Concrete”.
2.NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers)
1.NACE Publication 6D-173, “A Manual for Painter Safety”.
2.NACE Publication 6G-164, “Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial
Maintenance Painting”.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2016
3.ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
1.ASTM D4541 - L.R. “Standard Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings
using Portable Adhesion Testers”.
2.ASTM E337 - L.R. “Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity
with a Psychrometer”.
3.ASTM D4263-83 (1999), “Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in
Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method”.
4.ASTM F1869-98, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor
Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride”.
5.ASTM D4414-95, “Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film
Thickness by Notched Gages”.
6.ICRI Guide No. 03732, “Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface
Preparation for Sealers, Coatings and Polymer Overlays,” International
Concrete Repair Institute, Sterling, VA.
7.ASTM 4262, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface pH of Acid
Etched Concrete”.
8.ASTM D4259, “Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete”.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.Terms used in this Section are defined as follows:
1 Mortar System
Flooring Work
The aspects involved with proper application
of the specified high solids flooring system,
including but not limited to cleaning, surface
preparation, mixing, application, curing, and
quality control.
2.Approved Materials The coating system, blast media, and
specified materials for this coating work.
3.Wet Film Thickness The primer or coating films’ actual thickness
immediately following application. Wet film
thickness is measured in mils or
thousandths of an inch (0.001”) and is
abbreviated WFT.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
4.Dry Film Thickness The primer or coating films’ actual thickness
following curing and drying. Dry film
thickness is measured in mils or
thousandths of an inch (0.001") and is
abbreviated DFT.
5.Coating System Refers to the approved coating Manufacturer,
Manufacturer abbreviated as CSM in this Section.
6.Manufacturer’s Technical
Representative(s)
Refers to the technical representative(s) of the
approved CSM.
7.A/E Architectural or Engineering Firm.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.The Contractor shall meet the following requirements:
1.The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the workmanship and
quality of the mortar flooring system installation. Inspections by the
Owner, the Engineer, or others do not limit the Contractor’s
responsibility.
2.Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials for
flooring.Do not use materials from previously opened containers.
3.Use only products of the approved CSM. Provide the same
products for repairs as for the original coating.
4.If any requirements of this specification are contradicted by a
referenced standard or vice-versa, the matter shall be resolved in
writing by the A/E or its representative.
5.Make available at all times all locations and phases of the work for
access and inspection by the Engineer, the Owner, or other personnel
designated by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide ventilation,
egress, and whatever other means are required for the Owner,
Engineer, or designated personnel to access and exit the work areas
safely.
6.Conduct work so that the mortar flooring system is installed as
specified herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the coating
system is installed as specified herein. The A/E shall inspect the work
to determine conformance with the contract documents.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
7.The Contractor’s Supervisor shall be on site at all times and will
be thoroughly familiar with the work in progress. This Supervisor shall
have authority to receive and execute all direction provided by the A/E
or the Owner.
8.The methods of construction shall be in accordance with all
requirements of this specification and the best trade practices. Any
changes in the mortar flooring system installation requirements shall
be allowed only with the written approval of the A/E.
9.Installation shall be performed by an applicator having
satisfactory experience in the application of these or similar materials
or with on-site consultation by a qualified field service representative of
the CSM.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work covered
by this Section:
1.Manufacturer’s current printed recommendations and product data
sheets for all mortar flooring system products including performance
criteria, surface preparation and applications, volatile organic
compound (V.O.C.) Data, and safety requirements.
2.Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials brought on-
site including all coating system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast
media.
3.Contractor’s written verification that the personnel who will perform
this work have the required experience as specified in 1.05 1.9. This
document must list the names of all of the Contractor’s supervisors
and tradespeople who will work on the project covered by this Section.
4.List of cleaning and thinner solutions allowed by the CSM.
5.Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation
for Coating System Materials.
2.Owner, contractor, and manufacturer’s representative shall review and
mutually agree upon color, grade, and final texture of coating system
before starting installation. The acceptance of a sample will constitute the
job standard by which installation will proceed.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.Material shall be delivered to project site in manufacturer’s original
unopened containers.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct
sunlight and temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
3.Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Owner solely for
this purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean-up and associated operations,
and storage of coating materials related debris before authorized disposal, to
these areas. All materials are to be stored on pallets or similar
storage/handling skids off the ground.
4.Mix all coating materials in a designated enclosed mixing area. This enclosed
area must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct sunlight,
inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or contamination.
Protect all other concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes from any spillage
of material(s) within the mixing area.
5.Do not use drain piping for disposal of coating materials.
6.The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures
necessary to avert potential hazards associated with the mortar flooring
system materials as described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or
container labels.
7.Deliver all materials to the job site in new, unopened containers. Each
container shall bear the CSM’s name and label.
1.Labels on all material containers must show the following information:
1.Name or title of product.
2.Manufacturer’s batch number.
3.Manufacturer’s name.
4.Generic type of material.
5.Application and mixing instructions.
6.Hazardous material identification label.
7.Shelf life date.
2.All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel
safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials.
3.All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of
label.
4.Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened,
diluted materials, or materials which have exceeded their shelf life.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.Surfaces and surrounding air temperatures must exceed 55 degrees F but must
be less than 90 degrees F, with materials at not less than 70 degrees F during
application.
2.Do not apply coating materials when dust is being generated.
3.If existing facility lighting is not adequate for flooring system application,
the Contractor shall provide all temporary lighting during the work equivalent to
one 200 watt explosion proof incandescent lamp per 100 square feet of work
area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1.Primer: Series 201 Epoxoprime, two-component, moisture tolerant,
penetrating modified polyamine cured epoxy primer.
2.Intermediate Mortar: Series 223 Deco-Trowel. Series 223 is an aggregate
filled, modified polyamine cured epoxy resin decorative mortar flooring system.
3.Grout and top Coat: Series 284 two-component, modified polyamine cured
epoxy glaze. Thickness and number of coats will vary depending on desired
finish.
4.Coving: Use Series 223 Deco-Trowel mortar to form cant or rolled radius
coves.
2.2 MANUFACTURER
1.Tnemec Company,
Incorporated. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
1.Protection
Mask, cover, or otherwise protect all surfaces, equipment, and finishes not to
receive the mortar flooring system specified in this Section.
2.Strictly follow the approved CSM’s written instructions and the requirements of
this specification regarding all aspects of mortar flooring work including:
mixing, application, recoat times and curing.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.Mock-up
1.Prior to commencing the installation, the Contractor shall install with
the owner’s approval, a mutually agreed upon mock-up test sample to
show final color and appearance of the mortar flooring system.
3.2 PREPARATION
1.Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days. Verify dryness by testing for moisture
with a “plastic film tape-down test”. (Reference ASTM D4263)
2.Shot-blast or mechanically abrade to remove laitance, curing compounds,
sealers and other contaminants and to provide surface profile. (Reference
ASTM D4259, ICRI CSP 4-9).
3.Vacuum clean concrete to remove all dirt, dust, and other loose materials.
4.After mechanically abrading, verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of
any contaminants, which could adversely affect the adhesion of the flooring
system.
5.If between final surface preparation work and mortar flooring system
application, contamination of the prepared and cleaned substrates occurs,
recleaning shall be required until the requirements of this Section are met.
3.3 INSTALLATION
1.Primer: The primer shall be mechanically mixed, applied and cured in
strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply uniformly
at a film thickness of 6 to 8 dry mils.
2.Cant Cove or rolled radius cove bases shall be installed in accordance with
the
CSM’s written instructions and as indicated on the Standard Flooring Details.
3.Intermediate Mortar: The material shall be mixed, applied and cured in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply by
trowel to 1/4" thickness.
Note to Specifier: Floor and wall transitions can be formed to have a cant
cove or rolled radius cove. This will provide a seamless wall to floor transition.
4.Top Coat: The high-solids, top coat shall be mechanically mixed, applied and
cured in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and
applied at a film thickness of 8 to 10 dry mils. Skid resistance properties can
be adjusted by the film thickness and number of topcoats and should be
determined at the time the mock-up is completed.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
5.Finish Coat (Optional): The high-solids, orange-peel, epoxy finish coat shall
be mechanically mixed, applied and cured in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply at a film thickness of 4 to 6 dry
mils.
6.Fill all crack and recessed joints, such as control and construction joints, with
Tnemec Series 201 Epoxoprime and fumed silica. When filled, joint should be
flush with the floor surface.
3.4 CLEANUP
1.Remove waste materials, rubbish, and debris and dispose of them at the
owner’s direction. Leave work areas in a clean and tidy condition.
3.5 PROTECTION
1.Protect the completed work from water, airborne particles or other surface
contaminants until cured for a minimum of 24 hours after application.
2.Protect from traffic, physical abuse, immersion and chemical exposure until
the complete system has thoroughly cured for 24 hours at 75 degrees F. For
different temperatures, consult the manufacturer’s representative about curing
times.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING
1.Inspection by the Engineer, Owner or others does not limit the Contractor’s
responsibilities for quality as specified herein or as required by the CSM’s
instructions.
2.The Contractor shall perform the Q.C. procedures listed below in conjunction
with the requirements of this Section. The Engineer will inspect the work to
determine conformance to the contract documents.
1.Degree of Cleanliness.
Visually inspect the degree of cleanliness of substrates to meet the
requirements of this Section. The pH of the concrete substrates will
be measured using pH indicating papers. pH testing is to be
performed once every 100 sq. ft. of surface area to be coated.
Acceptable pH values shall be between 8.0 and 11.0 as measured by a
full- range (1-12) color indicating pH paper with readable color calibrations
and a scale at whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion Insta-Chek Jumbo
0-13 or 1-12 or equal. The paper shall be touched to the surface once using
moderate finger pressure. The surface shall not be wiped or moved laterally
to disturb the surface during pH testing. Following the one touch, lift the
paper vertically to not “wipe” the surface. Compare the color indicated
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
with the scale provided and record the pH.
Note: If the surface of the concrete is dry, it is not possible to take a pH
measurement. However, pH values are still important on dry surfaces. When
a dry concrete substrate is encountered for a pH test, the surface where
the pH test is to be performed shall be sprayed lightly with distilled,
deionized water from a commercially available spray bottle that has been
properly rinsed to preclude any dissolved solids. The spray shall just wet
the surface to a “shiny” appearance. Wait 60 seconds to allow chemical
equilibria to be established and then test the pH of the water on the surface.
Perform this test in accordance with ASTM D4262.
2.Concrete Surface Profile
Using the replicate rubber specimens inspect the concrete surface profile in
accordance with ICRI Guide No. 03732. This should be performed once for
every 100 square feet of surface area to be coated.
3.Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of
each shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate
temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer.
4.Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift using a
sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337.
5.Inspect correct mixing of coating materials in accordance with the CSM’s
instructions.
6.Inspect and record that the “pot life” of coating materials used are not
exceeded during installation.
7.Measure and record the thickness of the coating system using a
notched gauge in accordance with ASTM D4414 for Wet Film Thickness at
least once every 10 sq. ft. of coating area.
8.Perform moisture tests on concrete as follows:
1.Once for every 500 square feet of surface area to be coated,
perform the plastic sheet test in accordance with ASTM D4263. If
moisture is indicated, proceed to step 2 below.
2.Perform calcium chloride moisture tests in accordance with ASTM
D1869 once for every 1000 square feet of surface area to be
coated. The maximum limit for moisture vapor emissions rate
should be
3.0 lbs. per 24 hours per 1000 sq. ft. If tests indicate rates higher than
3.0, consult with Tnemec’s Technical Service Department for further
evaluation.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
9.Inspect to verify proper curing of the mortar flooring system as
recommended by the CSM.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 09700-A - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide wall coverings and surface preparation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating
visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is
anticipated.
C.Extra Stock: Submit extra stock equal to 2 unopened rolls of each type of wall covering
used.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Performance: Fire performance meeting requirements of building code and local
authorities.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels:
1.Manufacturers: Crane Composites; or approved equal.
2.Material: Glasbord Panels:
a.Type Fire-X
b.Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full range.
c.Size: as required to cover areas indicated on drawings
d.Moldings: Provide harmonizing PVC moldings.
3.Surfaseal Surface Protection: Provide manufacturer’s surface protection for
fiberglass reinforced panels.
4.Division Bars, Corner Trim: Panel manufacturer’s standard length extruded vinyl
pieces; longest length possible to eliminate joints.
5.Fasteners: Noncorrosive drive rivets
6.Adhesive: provide panel adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Acclimatize materials, prime and seal substrates, test substrates for moisture content
and prepare surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply adhesive and install with
seams plumb and overlapped and double-cut to ensure tight closure except where
pattern would not match. Do not place seams within 6 inches of corners.
C.Remove air bubbles, blisters, wrinkles and other defects; horizontal seams are not
permitted. Remove excess adhesive immediately; clean walls and protect surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 09800-A - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide high performance coatings and surface preparation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating
visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is
anticipated.
C.Extra Stock: Provide 2 unopened gallons of each coating and color used in the project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Regulations: Compliance with VOC and environmental regulations.
C.Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship.
1.Provide 4 foot x 4-foot mock-ups of each type of surface.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Floor and Wall Coatings:
1.Manufacturers: Duron Paints & Wallcoverings; Key Resin Co.; Rodda Paint; or
approved equal.
2.Type: Acrylic component floor coating systems.
3.Type: Epoxy wall coatings.
B.Sealers for Concrete and Masonry:
1.Manufacturers: Triangle Coatings, Inc.; or approved equal.
2.Type: Non-visible penetrating sealer, graffiti guard.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Coatings for Concrete and Masonry:
1.Manufacturers: Dur-A-Flex, Inc.; ICI Dulux Paint Centers, Inc.; Modac Products
Sonneborn Building Products; Key Resin Co.; PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. -
Pittsburgh Paints; Rodda Paint; SGM, Inc.; Tamms Industries, Inc.; Tnemec;
United Gilsonite Laboratories; or approved equal. First-line commercial-quality
products for all elastomeric coating systems.
2.Type: Alkali-resistant primers/sealers.
3.Type: Acrylic coatings.
4.Type: Elastomeric coatings.
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Inspect surfaces, report unsatisfactory conditions in writing; beginning work means
acceptance of substrate.
B.Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming
and coating work. Coordinate with work of other sections.
C.At existing areas to be repainted, remove blistered or peeling paint to sound substrates.
Remove chalk deposits and mildew and wash all surfaces with mild detergent. Perform
related minor preparation including caulk and glazing compounds. Spot prime bare
areas before priming and painting as specified.
D.Match approved mock-ups for color, texture, and pattern. Re-coat or remove and
replace work which does not match or shows loss of adhesion. Clean up, touch up and
protect work.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 09900-A - PAINTING
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide painting and surface preparation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating
visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is
anticipated.
1.Include manufacturer’s full range of color and finish options if additional selection is
required.
C.Extra Stock: Submit 2 unopened gallons of each paint and color used in the project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Regulations: Compliance with VOC and environmental regulations.
C.Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship.
1.Provide 4 FT x 4 FT mock-ups of each type of surface.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Painting:
1.Manufacturers of Regular Paints: Benjamin Moore; Duron Paints & Wallcoverings;
ICI Devoe Coatings; Kelly-Moore Paints; Miller Paint Co. / Devine Color; PPG
Architectural Finishes, Inc. - Pittsburgh Paints; Pratt & Lambert Paints; Rodda
Paint; Sherwin-Williams; United Gilsonite Laboratories; or approved equal.
2.Manufacturers of Multicolor Coatings: Polomyx; Zolatone; or approved equal.
3.Application: Interior unfinished surfaces.
4.Application: Exterior unfinished surfaces.
5.Primary Coating Type: reference room finish schedule.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Inspect surfaces, report unsatisfactory conditions in writing; beginning work means
acceptance of substrate.
B.Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming
and coating work. Coordinate with work of other sections.
C.At existing areas to be repainted, remove blistered or peeling paint to sound substrates.
Remove chalk deposits and mildew and wash all surfaces with mild detergent. Perform
related minor preparation including caulk and glazing compounds. Spot prime bare
areas before priming and painting as specified.
D.Match approved mock-ups for color, texture, and pattern. Re-coat or remove and
replace work which does not match or shows loss of adhesion. Clean up, touch up and
protect work.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 10425-A - IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.The work of this section includes signs and identifying devices.
B.Related work:
1.Documents affecting work of this section include but are not necessarily
limited to: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections in
Division 1 of these specifications.
2.Section 09800 - Special Coatings
3.Section 09900 - Painting
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A.Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 sections.
B.Product data: after the contractor has received the owners notice to proceed,
submit:
1.Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this section;
2.Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show sign copy, required mounting
locations, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this section
with the work of adjacent trades.
3.Color chart showing colors and patterns available in the specified
products from the proposed manufacturer.
4.Manufacturers recommended installation procedures, which when
approved by the architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this section.
1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Store products immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Protect until installed.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by Architectural
Signing, Inc., 4082 Glencoe Avenue, Marina Del Ray, California 90261, and
trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
B.Provide the products upon which design is based or provide equal products of
another manufacturer approved in advance by the Architect.
C.Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this
Section from a single manufacturer.
2.2 WALL SIGNS
A.Provide wall sign plaques with the following attributes:
1.Size:8” x 8”
2.Type style: Raised 1/8" Upper Case San Serif;
3.Plaque color: Selected by Architect
4.Type color: Contrasting color (Selected by Architect)
5. Mounting: Silastic adhesive, (mounting location as shown on
approved shop drawings)
6. Material: Cast brass
B.Messages: “Men”, and “Women”.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Architect, using only the approved
mounting materials, and locating all components firmly into position, level and
plumb and in accordance with ADA requirements.
END OF SECTION
10430
SITE SIGNAGE
PAGE 1 OF 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 10430 – SITE SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1,
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Site Signage
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate proposed fabrications, mounting details, color
separations, and font styles for each sign.
B. The graphic representations shown in the Drawings are intended to depict the
design intent. Final artwork shall be prepared by the sign manufacturer and
submitted to Owner’s Representative for approval.
C. Technical data: manufacturer data and product information.
D. Color samples: Paint color samples. The Owner’s Representative will make all
sign color selections.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
1.5 MOCK-UP SAMPLES
A. Submit samples of the proposed fastener hardware. Samples shall be submitted
for each installation application.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Review location of signs with owner prior to installation.
10430
SITE SIGNAGE
PAGE 2 OF 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle signage in order not to damage or mar surfaces of signs or adjacent
finish surfaces as applicable.
B. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration or staining.
C. Store signage material in a safe, dry, above-ground.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation with adjacent finish materials in manner not to destroy
adjacent surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. iZone Imaging
2526 Charter Oak Drive, Suite 100
Temple, TX 76502
Phone (888) 464-9663
Fax (254)778-0938
Contact: David Gloriosa
B. Or Approved Equivalent
2.2 SIGN PANELS
A. Paint: High-grade polyurethane paint specially formulated for the exterior sign
industry. All graphics and text shall be painted. Adhesive applied graphics or text
are not acceptable.
B. Refer to Drawings for signage information.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Utilize stainless steel, tamper resistant bolt and nut assemblies.
B. Where exposed adjacent to the sign face or back, the fasteners shall be painted
to match the sign color adjacent to the fastener.
10430
SITE SIGNAGE
PAGE 3 OF 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that areas are ready to receive signage.
B. Notify owner in writing of unacceptable conditions in surfaces or substrates.
C. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs in accordance with good construction practices. Avoid warps,
buckles, distortions, opening up of joints, or overstressing of fasteners.
B. Locate and install signage in locations as indicated on the signage schedule and
in accordance with approved shop drawings.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed signs from damage and vandalism until project completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10800-A - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Provide toilet, bath and laundry accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of
construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
ITEM MANUFACTURER MODEL #
TA1 Wall Mounted Electric Hand Dryer Bobrick B-7128
TA2 Toilet Tissue Holder (Double)Bobrick B-2892
TA3 36” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806x36
TA4 42” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806x42
TA5 Soap Dispenser (Lav Mounted)Bradley 6315
TA6 Frameless Mirror (24”x36”)Bobrick B-1556 2436
TA7 Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit Bobrick B-270
TA8 Mop and Broom Holder Bobrick B-224
TA8 Diaper Changing Station Bobrick KB110-
SSWM
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B.Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from
damage.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
11510
SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 11510 – SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1, Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General
1. Furnish and supply all labor, equipment, materials and incidentals necessary to
assemble, install and otherwise construct park equipment as listed under products.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations
1. Each type of site furnishing(s) shall be obtained through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Safety
1. All equipment shall be free of sharp edges and corners, and extremely rough
surfaces.
2. All raised platforms shall have handrails.
3. Wood shall be pressure treated with a non-toxic preservative.
C. Allowable Tolerances
1. Metals shall be straight or at design radii or bends, without kinks, bents, and
crimps and shall be true to shape.
2. All metal parts and hardware shall be hot dip galvanized, have electrostatically
bonded colors, or have an approved corrosion-resistant coating.
3. Wood shall be structurally sound and free of heart centers.
4. Wood shall not be noticeably warped or bowed and shall be free of large checks,
splinters and waves.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect from inclement weather; wet, damp, extreme heat or cold.
11510
SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Keep manufacturers labels, installation instructions, and warranty information.
C. Store wood in a manner to prevent warpage and/or bowing.
D. Delivery times for equipment will be taken into account by the Contractor as work
proceeds. Late deliveries will not be accepted as a reason to extend the completion date
for the project.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect manufacturers catalog
information sheets, installation details and a listing of model numbers, option
numbers, and color charts of each piece of equipment that the Contractor
proposes to install.
2. The Contractor's submittals shall be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to
ordering of equipment.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of unfinished work and shall be responsible for
the safety of park users utilizing unfinished equipment.
PA RT 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. All equipment and materials shall be new, unused and the standard product of one
manufacturer.
B. Site Furnishings
1. Products supplied per construction drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Install site furnishings and park equipment in the exact locations shown on the drawings and in
strict conformation with the manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
15010-A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
Page 1 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15010-A -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1. The Conditions of the Contract.
2. Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.02 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with the Conditions of the Contract, each Mechanical Contractor
executing work in Division 15 is acting in the capacity of a sub-contractor.
However, throughout Division 15, the mechanical sub-contractor is hereinafter
referred to as the Contractor.
B. The Contractor is duly bound to all applicable requirements of the prime
contractor as stipulated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter specified or indicated on
accompanying drawings, and provide equipment and labor as required in
connection with his work and systems.
1.03 SITE INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall visit the site and verify the following:
1. Items shown or indicated as "existing" on the drawings, including
structures, trees, utilities, obstructions, etc.
2. Work conditions.
3. Hazards.
4. Soil grades and conditions.
B. Acceptance of a contract shall be deemed as evidence that the site visit has
been made and that the Contractor has familiarized himself with the conditions
noted above.
1.04 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required utility connections, meters
and meter boxes, utility extensions and/or relocations and shall pay all costs and
15010-A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
Page 2 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
inspection fees for all work included therein.
1.05 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Except as hereinafter modified in individual sections of Division 15 and contract
drawings, materials and installation shall meet the requirements prescribed in the
latest editions of the applicable manuals and standards of the following codes
and standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA):
a NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code
b NFPA No. 90A, Air Conditioning Systems
c NFPA No. 91, Blower & Exhaust Systems
d NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code
e NFPA No. 200 Series, Building Construction
f NFPA No. 14, Standpipes and Hose Systems
2. United States of America Standards Institute (ASA) Standards:
a International Plumbing Code
b B31.1 and B31.1a, Code for Pressure Piping
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE).
5. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI).
6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,
Inc. (SMACNA).
7. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
8. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
10. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
11. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
12. Fire Department as applicable to construction on this site.
13. Building Code for Construction.
15010-A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
Page 3 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
14. Occupational Safety and Hea0lth Act (OSHA).
15. State and Local safety and health standards.
16. All work shall be in accordance with all regulations and requirements of
the Standards and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the
Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas
Usable by Physically Handicapped and Disabled Persons.
17. See individual sections for additional codes, standards, and special
requirements.
B. Where materials or equipment are specified to be approved, listed, tested, or
labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or constructed and/or tested in
accordance with the standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, the Contractor shall submit proof
that the items furnished under this section of the specifications conform to such
requirements. The ASME stamp, AMCA label, or the U.L. label, will be
acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to the respective
requirements.
C. It is the intent of Division 15 and the related drawings to comply with the above
mentioned requirements, standards and codes. However some discrepancies
may occur. Where discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall notify the
Architect/Engineer in writing of discrepancies and request an interpretation.
1. Request for interpretation shall be made before any work is performed or
material is fabricated.
2. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or
workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable
codes, standards, and/or regulations, the Contractor shall bear all costs
arising in correcting the deficiencies to comply with the codes, standards
and/or regulations.
3. Should a conflict or discrepancy occur between codes, standards and/or
regulations, the Contractor shall be obligated to comply with the most
stringent, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The specifications and accompanying drawings of the building indicate plans and
details showing installations and locations of equipment, piping, ductwork,
outlets, controls, etc. Due to the intricacies of construction it is impractical to
specify or indicate every detail; in such cases the current rules of good
construction practices and applicable specifications shall govern.
15010-A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
Page 4 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. If departures from the drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details
of such proposed departures shall be made to the Architect/Engineer in writing.
Each request shall state reasons and recommended correction for proposed
departure. No departure shall be made without prior written approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all drawings and specifications and
properly use information found on the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and
Electrical drawings and specifications affecting his work.
D. Dimensional information pertaining to new work in the structure shall be taken
from the appropriate drawings. Dimensional information pertaining to existing
conditions and outside the structure shall be made by the Contractor on the site.
E. Should the drawings or specifications disagree within themselves, or with each
other, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be
performed or furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Interrelation of the specifications and drawings and schedules is as follows:
1. Specifications determine type and installation of material.
2. Drawings establish location, quantities, dimensions and details.
3. Schedules establish performance characteristics of equipment.
G. Dimensions indicated on drawings govern scaled measurements. Large scale
details govern small scale drawings.
1.07 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT
A. The size of mechanical equipment indicated on the drawings is based on the
dimensions of the equipment by the manufacturer indicated on the drawings, in
the specifications and/or as listed in equipment schedules. Other manufacturers
may be acceptable if equal in design and function.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment proposed to
be furnished will fit in the allotted space.
C. Space is critical; therefore, equipment of larger sizes than shown, even though of
specified manufacturer, will not be acceptable unless Contractor can
demonstrate that ample space exists for proper installation, operation, and
maintenance.
D. Equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces and
accessory items such as valves, pumps, motors, drives, filters, gauges, controls,
etc. Accessories shall be installed to allow removal for service without
disassembly of another part.
15010-A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
Page 5 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. If requested by Architect/Engineer, Contractor shall prepare and furnish detailed
installation drawings indicating arrangement and installation of proposed
equipment, and submit to Architect/Engineer for approval. Approval, in writing,
shall be obtained before ordering equipment.
1.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All mechanical (plumbing, fire protection and HVAC) equipment shall be
furnished and installed complete and ready for use. The Contractor or
Subcontractor furnishing the equipment item shall furnish and install all auxiliary
piping, valves, controls, control wiring, conduit, alarms, etc., required. All
necessary devices, control wiring, conduit, etc., will not necessarily be shown on
the drawings. Control wiring, conduit, etc., for equipment items provided by the
General Contractor shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor
unless shown on the mechanical and electrical drawings or so stated in the
specifications.
1.09 SUPERINTENDENT
A. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all Contract
Documents and familiarize himself with the work to be done by other trades.
The superintendent shall coordinate his work with other trades and before
material is fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause any
interference that cannot be resolved without major changes to the Contract
Documents.
1.10 PROJECT OBSERVATION
A. Project observation by the Architect/Engineer is for the express purpose of
verifying compliance by the Contractor with the Contract Documents, and shall
not be construed as construction supervision nor indication of approval of the
manner in which the work is being performed.
1.11 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. The Architect/Engineer will make a final observation of the project in accordance
with the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation, it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to personally make a detail observation of the
complete project assuring himself that the Work on the project is ready for final
acceptance.
C. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Project Closeout before
receiving final acceptance of the Work.
15010-A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
Page 6 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15020 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current
U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective
kinds.
B.Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise
damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or
materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite.
C.Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed
as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the
Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and
supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the
equipment being installed.
D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties,
Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread
and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof.
E.The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any conflict
between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's
directions and shall obtain the Architect/Engineer's instructions before proceeding
with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply
with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect/Engineer,
he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies.
F.Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating
parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall
be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A.It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in
every respect. If additional work is required for Work indicated or specified, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide
material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or as required to
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
complete the installation.
B.The Contractor shall be responsible for placing his material and equipment into the
building and shall carefully lay out his work in the project to conform to the
structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the
installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed and
thereby provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
C.Investigate structural and finish conditions and coordinate all work with the various
trades to avoid interferences between the different phases of Work. Harmonize
work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without
hindering or handicapping each other.
D.Unless specifically noted to be exposed, lay out work in finish portions of the
building so that it will be concealed in chases, suspended above ceilings, etc.
Allow proper clearances where pipes and ducts are to be insulated. Bending or
installing pipes in a strain in order to insulate or to clear obstructions will not be
permitted.
E.Lay out work as required to avoid crippling of structural members. Inserts for pipe
hangers are to be set before concrete is poured. Provide and properly lay out
sleeves in concrete for penetrating pipes and ducts. Hold pipes and ducts as tight
to structure as possible and provide proper and required sloping to pipes.
F.Lay out and install equipment as required to provide convenient and safe
maintenance and access for future replacement as well as providing easy access
to oiling devices and parts requiring adjustment.
1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from
the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust,
rain, humidity and dust.
B.Do not receive equipment or materials on the job site until adequate space has
been provided for storage.
C.Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required
shelters for items stored in the open.
D.Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with
tarpaulins or other protective covering.
E.Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their
tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and
other finish surfaces.
F.Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will
be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.5 PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS
A.The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of his equipment and
material into the allotted spaces in the structure so as to provide complete and
acceptable systems.
B.Piping interferences shall give precedence to pipe lines which require a stated
grade for proper operation.
1.6 Furnish a suitable trap on each drain not provided with a trap.
A.All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to
chrome-plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match.
1.7 INSTALLATION METHODS
A.Unless noted otherwise, piping and ductwork may be run exposed in mechanical
rooms and janitor's closets. Piping and ductwork exposed in mechanical rooms
and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the
Architect/Engineer.
B.Conceal piping and ductwork to be installed as hereinbefore specified.
C.Where piping must be exposed in finished areas, install to meet the following
requirements:
1.Do not expose unless so indicated on the drawings.
2.If piping must be exposed because of unforeseen interferences or job
conditions, obtain approval in writing from the Architect/Engineer.
3. Exposed domestic water pipe (copper) shall be chrome plated (insulation
shall be omitted if approved by Architect/Engineer) and no joints shall
appear in pipe line if at all possible. If insulation must remain, insulated
pipe shall be in chrome plated sleeve.
4. Exposed sanitary sewer or drainage piping shall be DWV copper (or DWV
PVC if code allows) and shall be inside chrome plated sleeve or cast iron
piping housed inside gypboard furring.
D.Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into
position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or
otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections.
E.No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be
permitted, unless joint is of the welded type.
F.Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to
permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper
drainage.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
G.Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take
into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any
unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after
approval from the Architect/Engineer.
H.All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as
to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to
equipment.
I.All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed.
J.Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut
using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the
ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and
hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing.
K.Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth
elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the
manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints.
L.For additional requirements for installation of mechanical work, refer to individual
sections in Division 15.
1.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A.Where pipes penetrate walls and/or floors in exposed areas, provide stainless steel
escutcheon plates.
B.Escutcheon plate shall be set screw type and sized to fit pipe and to cover
penetration opening.
1.9 WELDING PROCEDURES
A.Welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding method, using a metallic
arc or gas welding process.
B.Pipe shall have the ends beveled 37-1/2 degrees with joints aligned true before
welding.
C.Except as otherwise specified, all changes in direction, intersection of lines,
reduction in pipe size and the like shall be made with factory-fabricated welding
fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, or
any similar construction will not be permitted.
D.All welding operations shall conform to the latest recommendations of the
American Welding Society and to Section Six of the Code for Pressure Piping,
ANSI B31.1, current edition. All qualifying tests, welding and stress relieving
procedures shall, moreover, be in accordance with Standard Qualification for
Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators, Appendix A of the Code,
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
current edition.
E.Schedule 40 pipe shall be welded with not less than three passes including 1 tack,
1 filler and 1 lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than 4 passes
including 1 tack, 2 fillers and 1 lacer.
1.10 UNIONS
A.Unions shall be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, traps, and at
all pieces of equipment (pumps, condensers, tanks, etc.), so that equipment may
be readily disconnected.
B.Unless written approval has been obtained from the Architect/Engineer, no unions
are to be placed in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the
building.
1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by
failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and
patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work.
B.Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws
and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
1.6 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A.Pipes and/or ducts penetrating the roof shall be installed as directed by roofing
supplier/installer and shall be compatible with roofing system.
1.13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work and upon its completion, test
his work and make all tests as required by the specifications, State, Municipal and
other authorities having jurisdiction of the work. Piping pressure tests shall be
made before pipe is concealed or covered.
1.14 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP
A.The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the other trades on the job to help keep
the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each
trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean
his debris from the job.
B.Upon the completion of the job, the Contractor shall immediately remove all of his
tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of the
work.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Refer to section on Cleaning, for additional cleaning requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15070 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
FOR PIPE, CABLES AND DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING
A.General:
1. Trenching shall be in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health
Document, Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction;
1926-652 - General Trenching Requirements.
a.Banks more than 5 feet high shall be shored, laid back to a stable
slope, or some other equivalent means of protection shall be
provided where employees may be exposed to moving ground or
cave-ins. Refer to drawings for standard trenching details.
b.The Contractor may also have supporting systems, pilings, cribbing,
shoring, etc., designed by a Registered Professional Structural
Engineer and submitted to the Architect/Engineer as a shop
drawing submittal before any trenching work is done. Submittal
drawings shall be sealed by the Engineer.
2.Excavate to the depths indicated or as otherwise specified.
3. Pile materials suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient
distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent
slide or cave-ins.
4. Remove excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill.
5. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and
remove any water accumulating therein.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
6. Sheeting and shoring shall be done as may be necessary.
7. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that
short sections of a trench may be tunneled if the pipe, cable, or duct can be
safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such
tunnel sections.
8.Excavate all materials encountered including rock and filled-in material.
B.Trench Excavation:
1. Sides and Bottom: Trenches shall be of the necessary width for proper
laying of pipe, cables, or ducts. The banks of pipe trenches shall be as
nearly vertical as practicable. Do not over-excavate. Grade bottom of the
trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the
pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for the
portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes
and for the proper sealing of pipe joints and as hereinafter specified. Dig
bell holes and depressions for joints after the trench bottom has been
graded. In order that the pipe rest on the prepared bottom for as nearly its
full length as practicable, bell holes and depressions shall be only of such
length, depth, and width as required for properly making the joint.
2. Stones: Remove stones necessary to avoid point bearing. Where rock
excavation is required in trenches for pipe, excavate rock to a minimum
overdepth of 6 inches below the trench depths indicated or specified.
Except as hereinafter specified for wet or otherwise unstable material,
overdepths shall be backfilled as and with materials specified for backfilling
the lower portion of trenches.
3. Unstable Material: Remove wet or otherwise unstable material encountered
beyond the depths indicated on the drawings or specified herein and
replace with satisfactory material.
4. Sanitary Sewers: The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe
shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of the pipe and the
trench wall shall not exceed 8 inches on either side of the pipe. The width of
the trench above that level shall be as wide as necessary for sheeting and
bracing and the proper performance of the work. The bottom of the trench
shall be rounded so that at least the bottom quadrant of the pipe shall rest
firmly on undisturbed soil for as nearly the full length of the barrel as proper
jointing operations will permit. Excavate this part manually only a few feet in
advance of the pipe laying by men skilled in this type of work.
5.Water Supply and Distribution Lines: Unless otherwise indicated, grade
trenches to avoid high points with the necessity of placing vacuum and
relief valves in the water lines. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate
trenches to a depth to provide a minimum cover over the top of the pipe of
2 feet in unpaved areas and 2-1/2 feet under paved areas; excavate
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
deeper to avoid interference of the water lines with other utilities.
C. Excavation for Appurtenances: Excavate for manholes and similar structures
sufficiently to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and
the embankment or timber that may be used to hold and protect the banks.
Overdepth excavation below such appurtenances shall be refilled with sand, gravel
or concrete.
D. Excavation Beneath Buildings: Exercise care and minimize disturbance to the
capillary water barrier or compacted subgrade.
3.2 REMOVAL OF UTILITY LINES
A.When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of
operations, notify representatives of the Utility, the Owner, and others in ample
time for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of the service.
3.3 BACKFILLING
A.General: The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required pressure tests are
performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements
specified in the several sections covering the installation of the various utilities.
Where damage is likely to result from withdrawing sheeting, leave the sheeting in
place. Except as otherwise specified for special conditions of overdepths, backfill
the trenches to the ground surface with selected material that is suitable for the
specified compaction and as hereinafter specified. Reopen improperly backfilled
trenches, and trenches that show sinking within 12 months after Substantial
Completion to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill and compact as
specified. The meaning of "density of the adjacent soil" when the adjacent
formation is rock shall be interpreted as maximum density. The surface shall be
restored to its original condition as near as practicable and as hereinafter
specified. Replace sidewalks, curbs, gravel, pavement, base course, and
compacted subgrade disturbed by trenching operations.
B.Lower Portion of Trench: Deposit backfill material in 6-inch-maximum-thickness
layers and compact with suitable tampers to the density of the adjacent soil or
grade as hereinafter specified until there is a cover of not less than 2 feet over
sewers and l foot over other utility lines. The backfill material in this portion of the
trench shall consist of a selected material at a moisture content that will facilitate
compaction, free from stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension and hard clods
and frozen conglomerates larger than 6 inches in any dimension, except that
where the pipe is coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion the backfill
material shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension. If any
portion of the cover in the lower portion of the trench is in the depth of special
compaction and materials requirements under pavement, the special requirements
shall control. Special care shall be taken not to damage the coating or wrapping of
pipes.
C.Remainder of Trench: Except for special materials for pavements, the remainder
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
of the trench shall be backfilled with material that is free of stones larger than 6
inches or 1/2 the layered thickness, whichever is smaller, in any dimension.
Backfill material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding the thickness specified,
and each layer shall be compacted to the minimum density specified as applicable
to the particular area except that in areas other than under roadways, parking
areas, shoulders of roadways and parking areas, and other paved areas subject to
vehicular movement, settling of granular, non-cohesive material with water will be
permitted.
1. Under Pavements: Six-inch layers, 90 percent CE 55 maximum density for
cohesive soils and 95 percent CE 55 maximum density for cohesionless
soils up to the elevation at which the requirements for pavement subgrade
material and compaction control or up to the bottom of the concrete backfill.
2. Under Turfed or Seeded Lawn Areas and Sidewalks: Twelve-inch layers,
85 percent CE 55 maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent CE
55 maximum density for cohesionless soils. This requirement also applies
to areas designated to be turfed or seeded.
3. Under Other Areas: Two-foot layers, density equal to the adjacent soil.
3.4 TEST FOR DISPLACEMENT OF SEWERS
A. Sewer mains shall be checked to determine whether any displacement of the pipe
has occurred after the trench has been backfilled to 2 feet above the pipe and
tamped as specified. The test will be as follows: A light will be flashed between
manholes, or, if the manholes have not as yet been constructed, between the
locations of the manholes, by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a
mirror. If the illuminated interior of the pipe line shows poor alignment, displaced
pipe, or any other defects, the defects shall be remedied.
3.5 LANDSCAPE
A.Routing:
1.Stake the route jointly with the Owner.
2. Mark trees, shrubbery and other landscaping to be saved, jointly with the
Owner.
3.Avoid the drip line of other trees and large shrubbery.
B.Repair: Place topsoil in top 6 inches of trench in areas of existing cultivated ground
cover.
C.Sod: Plant sod in areas of existing sod.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.This work covers the requirements for the valves as indicated and required for the
various systems throughout the project.
B.The requirements of this section apply to all piping work specified in other sections
of these specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Special Tests and Quality Requirements:
1. Bronze ball valves shall be rated for 150 SWP/600 WOG. Ball valves shall
be equipped with blowout proof stems and adjustable packing glands and to
be of a two piece screwed end cap design. Packing shall be teflon or glass
filled teflon. Seats to be glass filled teflon. Ball valves are acceptable
alternates for gate valves when used for on/off services provided valve is
suitable for service.
2.Iron valves shall have pressure containing parts conforming to ASTM
Specification A-126, Grade B. Wedge and seat ring material for iron valves
shall conform to ASTM Specification B-584 Alloy C84400.
3. Stem materials for bronze valves shall conform to ASTM B-99 Alloy
C65100, ASTM Specification B-371, Alloy 694 (rolled silicon brass) or other
approved materials with less than 15% zinc. Stem material for IBBM valves
shall conform to ASTM B-371 Alloy 694 or ASTM B-16 Alloy C36000 brass.
B. Valves of the same type shall be furnished by the same manufacturer, unless
approved by Engineer. If approval is requested, substitution must be one of
approved manufacturer on approved list.
1. Submittal data for substitute shall consist of manufacturer's name, size,
figure number, detailed technical drawings and appropriate engineering
information to substantiate quality.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.4 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.Where a manufacturer has been listed, it is for quality, design and function.
B.Products equal in quality, design and function by one of the following will be
acceptable.
1.Valves:
a. Crane
b. Nibco
c. Homestead
d. Stockham
e.Mueller
No Substitutions
2. Hydrants:
a. Josam
b.Wade
c.Zurn
No Substitutions
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVE TYPES AND SIZES
A.Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated valves of the type, body
material and pressure class indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide
valve size same as connection pipe size.
B.Ball Valves bronze: Class 150# steam/600 WOG; Nibco T-580-70, Stockham
S-216-BR-R-T.
C.Wall Hydrants: Non-freeze type with integral vacuum breaker. Josam 71050.
1.The following equal in design and function are acceptable (no substitutes):
a.Wade
b.Zurn
D.Wall Hydrants (box type): Non-freeze type with integral vacuum breaker. Josam
71000 Hydrosan I.
1.The following equal in design and function are acceptable (no substitutes):
a.Wade
b.Zurn
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.2 VALVE HANDLES
A.All valves installed in insulated pipelines shall have handle stem extensions of a
length required to allow operation of the handle without contacting the outside
surface of the insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.General Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following
requirements:
1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,
including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of
piping.
a. Locate valves so as to be accessible.
b. Provide separate support where required for a rigid installation.
2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position wherever
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal
plane, unless approved by Engineer. If approved, install valve drains with
hose-end adaptor for each valve with stem below horizontal plane.
3.Where insulation is required or indicated, install extended-stem valves and
arranged in the proper manner to receive insulation.
4. Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast-iron where thermal or
mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
5.Do not install bronze valves and bronze valve components in direct contact
with steel, unless the bronze and steel are separated by a dielectric
insulator. Install bronze valves in steam and condensate service and in
other services where corrosion is indicated or can be expected to occur.
6. Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, and
where valves 4" and larger are mounted more than 7'-0" above the floor,
and where recommended by the valve manufacturer because of valve size,
pressure differential or other operating condition making manual operation
difficult.
3.2 VALVE ENDS AND CONNECTIONS
A.Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves with the following ends or
types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Pipe size 2" and smaller shall have threaded valves.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged valves.
3. Install threaded adapters at each valve and component such that the item
can be removed without the use of a torch. Unions at valves and equipment
shall be Elkhart 102M wrought copper, or equal.
3.3 SPECIAL VALVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Except in fire protection systems and boiler isolation installations, non-rising stem
gate valves may be used where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A.Check and adjust valves and accessories for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15120 - PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.Furnish and install pipe, fitting and connection for the various systems throughout
the project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Piping, fittings, and installation to meet or exceed the requirements of applicable
codes and standards, latest editions.
B.See Basic Materials and Methods for welding requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND TUBE
A.Steel: ASTM A 120 and A 53, welded black or hot-dipped galvanized, Schedule 40
(standard weight), plain or screwed end.
B.Copper:
1. Seamless Water Tube:ASTM B 88, Type K, L, or M, drawn temper,
furnish straight, or coil (only when enclosed in concrete).
2. Seamless Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, drawn temper, standard weight.
3. Seamless Pipe: ASTM B 42, drawn temper, regular strength.
C.Plastic:
1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS):
a. Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM D-1527, ABS 1210.
b.SDR-PR, ASTM D 2282, non-threaded, SDR 17, ABS 1210.
c. Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV):ASTM D 2661, Class S-2-2 of
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
ASTM D 1788.
d.Sewer Pipe: ASTM D 2751, SDR 23.5 for 4" and 6"; SDR 42 for
over 6".
2.Polyvinylchloride (PVC):
a. Schedule 40, 80 or 120, ASTM D 1785, PVC 1220.
b.SDR-PR, ASTM D 2241,non-threaded, SDR 17, PVC 1220.
c. Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV): Class 12454-B/ASTM D 1784.
d.Sewer Pipe: ASTM 2729, PVC 1220.
e. Bell end, Schedule 40 or SDR, ASTM D 2672, PVC 1220.
3.Polyethylene (PE):
a. Schedule 40, ASTM D 2104, Grade PE 2306.
b.SDR-PR, ASTM D 2239, SDR 11.5, PE 2306.
D.Cast Iron:
1. Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, coated, service weight, and extra heavy weight.
2. Hubless Pipe: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, Standard 301.
3.Water Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C105, centrifugally cast.
4. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151.
5.Water Pipe, Flanged: ANSI/AWWA C151.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A.Steel:
1. Cast iron drainage, ANSI B16.12 coated.
2.Malleable iron, ANSI B16.3, 150 lb., hot-dipped galvanized or black finish.
3.Forged steel, socket welding, ANSI 16.11.
4. Butt welding, ANSI B16.9.
5. Cast iron flanged, ANSI B16.1, 125 lb.
6. Unions: Malleable iron, threaded, FSWW-U-531, Class 1, Type A or B.
B.Copper:
1.Wrought copper and bronze, solder-joint pressure, ANSI B16.22, wrought
copper material.
2. Cast bronze threaded, ANSI B16.15, 125 lbs. class.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Cast bronze solder-joint pressure, ANSI B16.18 and ANSI B16.18a.
4. Cast bronze solder-joint drainage (DWV), ANSI B16.23.
5. Cast bronze flange and flange fittings, ANSI B16.24, 150 lbs. class.
6. Cast bronze, flared copper tube, ANSI B16.26.
C.Plastic:
1. ABS, socket type, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM D2468/Schedule 40 and
ASTM D 2469/Schedule 80.
2. ABS, threaded, Schedule 80, ASTM D 2465.
3. ABS, DWV, ASTM D 2661.
4. ABS, sewer, ASTM D 2751.
5. PVC socket-type, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM D 2466/Schedule 40 and
ASTM D 2467/Schedule 80.
6. PVC threaded, Schedule 80, ASTM D 2464.
7. PVC, DWV, ASTM D 2665.
8. PVC, sewer, ASTM D 2729.
9. PE, Schedule 40 and 80, butt fusion, ASTM D 2610/Schedule 40 and
ASTM D 2611/Schedule 80.
10. PE, insert, ASTM D 2609.
11.PE, SDR, 11.5-PE 2306, ASTM D 2683.
D.Cast Iron:
1. Soil pipe, ASTM A 74, ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint.
2. Hubless, Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301.
3.Grey iron, ANSI A21.10.
4. Ductile iron, ANSI A21.10.
2.3 ACCESSORIES FOR PIPE AND TUBE JOINTING
A.Steel Pipe: Rector Seal No. 5 joint compound, teflon tape for threads.
B.Copper:
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. Solder Metal: ASTM B32.
2. Brazing Flux: FSO-F499, Type B.
3. Soldering Flux: FSO-F506, Type 1.
4. Brazing Filler: AWS 5.8.
C.Plastic:
1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2. ABS Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.
3.Thread lubricant, as recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer.
D.Cast Iron:
1. Jute: FS H-P-117, Type I.
2. Rubber Gaskets, Lubricant, Glands, Bolts and Nuts: ANSI A21.11.
3.Gaskets for Soil Pipe: ASTM C564.
4. Neoprene Sleeve Gaskets for Hubless Pipe and Retaining Clamp: Cast
Iron Soil Pipe Institute, Standard 301; fitting coupling, ASTM A 48, Class
30-A.
5.Gasket lubricant as recommended by gasket manufacturer.
2.4 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
A.Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psi, malleable iron for threaded steel piping;
bronze for copper pipe, soldered joints.
B.Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psi, forged steel slip-on flanges for steel piping;
bronze flanges for copper piping; synthetic rubber gaskets for gas service; 1/16
inch thick preformed synthetic rubber bonded to asbestos elsewhere.
C.Grooved and Shouldered Pipe Ends: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and
lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction and expansion; C-
shape composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts and washers; galvanized
couplings for galvanized pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A.Thread and clean pipe and fitting as specified in Basic Materials and Methods
section.
B.Not more than three threads shall be exposed after making connection.
C.Use thread tape or approved joint compound on male threads only.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D.Flanged Connections:
1.Tighten flanged bolts so that gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed.
Do not distort flanges.
2. Ends of bolts to project 1/8" to 3/8" beyond face of nut after tightening.
E.Clean ends of pipe with steel wool as required for making connections.
F.Welding: ANSI B31.1.
G.Clean and polish contact surfaces of copper before flux.
H.Clean and polish contact surfaces of plastic before applying cement.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.General:
1.Grade water, and condensate lines to point of drainage collection and/or as
indicated on drawings.
2. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction of pipe.
3. Anchor horizontal runs over 50 feet, at midpoint, to force expansion equally
towards ends.
4. Exterior underground water lines, except with welded joints, shall have
concrete thrust blocks or an approved type anchor in accordance with
NFPA 24, Chapter 8-6, Appendices A and B.
a. Install thrust blocks at changes in direction, elevations, plugs, tees,
crosses, etc.
5. Piping runs designed for the purpose of carrying gaseous materials shall
be cleaned by pulling a swab through the pipe during installation.
3.3 PIPING
A. Vertical:
1. Install supports for vertical piping at each floor and at intervals not to
exceed:
a. Steel: 10 feet.
b. Copper: 10 feet.
c. Plastic: 10 feet.
d. Cast Iron: 15 feet.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Provide supports no more than 8 feet from end of risers.
3. During construction, if support is not available, support and secure piping
using stakes and metal braces.
4. Provide watertight threaded connections at roof drains.
B.Horizontal - Suspended:
1. Install supports for suspended horizontal piping at sufficiently close
intervals to maintain alignment and prevent sagging, but not to exceed the
following:
a. Steel and Copper: 1-1/4" and smaller, 6 feet; 1-1/2" and larger, 10
feet.
b. Plastic: 4 feet.
c. Cast Iron: 5' length of pipe, 5 feet; 10' length of pipe, 10 feet.
2. Provide supports maximum 18" from each joint, ends of runs, change in
directions or alignment.
C.Horizontal - Underground:
1.Lay on firm bed of sand for entire length of trench.
2. Backfill evenly on both sides to maintain alignment. Employ partial
backfilling for cradling pipe during backfilling.
3. Anchor piping on grade prior to embedment in concrete.
3.4 JOINTING
A.Steel:
1. Die-cut screwed joints with full cut standard tapered pipe threads. Use an
approved cutting oil.
2. Unless noted otherwise, screw joint steel piping 2-1/2" and smaller. Weld
piping 3" and larger, including branch connections.
B.Copper:
1. Soldered and/or brazed joints to be inserted to full depth after applying flux.
Bring joint to temperature as quickly as possible and apply continuous bead
of solder or filler material.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Flared joints to be made by flaring end of tube to retain fitting. Tighten
fitting.
C.Plastic:
1. Joints to be as follows:
a. ABS: Threaded.
b. ABS: Solvent cemented.
c. PVC: Threaded.
d. PVC: Solvent cemented.
e. PE: Fusion welded.
f. PE: Insert fittings.
2. Connections and jointing with other materials shall be made with use of
adapter as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
D.Cast Iron:
1.Mechanical Joint Installation: Per manufacturer's instructions.
2. Push-On Joint Installation: Per manufacturer's instructions.
3. Junction with Other Materials:Use type of adapter and technique
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
4. Compression Joint Installation:
a. Clean hub and insert gasket.
b. Apply gasket lubricant to spigot and inside of gasket.
c. Drive spigot into gasketed hub with pulling tool or suitable device.
5. Hubless Joint Installation:
a. Place gasket on end of one pipe and retaining clamp on end of
adjoining pipe.
b. Firmly seat pipe ends against integrally molded shoulder inside
neoprene gasket.
c. Slide retaining clamp into position over gasket and tighten evenly to
4 ft.-lbs. of torque.
d. Firmly stabilize connections at water closets, trap arms and
horizontal branches by use of strapping and blocking.
3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING OF WATER SYSTEMS
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A.Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent dirt and other
foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of systems. Pipe stored on the
project shall have open ends capped and equipment shall have openings fully
protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually
examined and dirt removed.
B.Systems shall be cleaned with a chemical compound specifically formulated for the
purposes of removing the above listed foreign matter. These chemicals shall be
injected into the systems, circulated and completely flushed out. Repeat the
process if required. After each flushing, remove and thoroughly clean all strainers.
Contractor shall furnish all valves, pumps and fittings required for flushing.
C.Final connection is not to be made to the system until the Contractor and/or a
Chemical Subcontractor has filed with the Owner's representatives, a report stating
that the systems are clean.
3.6 TESTING
A.See individual sections on the various mechanical systems for testing.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15250 - INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.Installation of insulation of piping, equipment, ductwork as herein indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Fiberglass Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas
b.Schuller
c.E. O. Wood
d. Certain Teed
e.Knauf
2. Elastomeric Insulation: Armstrong (Armaflex)
3.Mastics:
f.Benjamin Foster
g.Insul-Coustic
h.Chicago Mastic
i.Childers Products
4. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc.
1.4 GENERAL
A.All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical
fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction.
Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection.
B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned.
C.All material shall be finished with surfaces having a maximum flame spread rating
of 25 under ASTM Method 84.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D.Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to
eliminate through metal conductance.
E.Sizing, paint, pipe shield or saddle, and internal duct insulation shall be provided
under other sections of Division 15.
F.Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed.
G. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed. However, sufficient insulation
shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a
maximum exterior insulation surface of 125F (OSHA Standard) on the hot
surfaces.
H.Insulation shall be applied to all parts of a system which contains hot or cold water,
air, or liquids. The piping systems include all valves, fittings, devices, etc. Do not
omit insulation on any valve or device when that valve or device is part of a system
specified to be insulated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE INSULATION
A.Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping:
1. Owens/Corning Fiberglas 25ASJ/SSL or approved equal, one piece pipe
insulation (3 lb/cu. ft. density) with all service jacket.
a. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
1/2" Pipe - 1/2" Thick
3/4" - 1-1/2" Pipe - 1" Thick
2" and Larger Pipe - 1-1/2" Thick
b. Use pre-formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts.
Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation.
c.Where insulation is exposed to weather, use J-M Flame-Safe ML,
or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation.
B.Drain Lines: All sections of condensate drain lines from air conditioning
equipment; P-traps and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving
air conditioner drainage where such traps are above ceiling or finished floors.
1. Armstrong "AP Armaflex", or approved equal, flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be 1/2" thick.
C.Refrigerant Suction Piping:
1. Armstrong "AP Armaflex", or approved equal, flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be 3/4" thick.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.Where insulation is exposed to weather, paint entire surface with 2 coats
UL Classified, Elastomeric finish, WB finish.
2.2 HEAT TRACING
A.ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1.XL - Trace by Raychem Corporation.
2.Nelson Type LT
3.Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B.HEATING TRACING; The self-regulating heater shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel
coated-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that
varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater
to be crossed over itself without overheating to be used directly on plastic pipe, and to be
cut to length in the field. The heater shall be covered by a radiation cross-linked modified
polyolefin dielectric jacket.
C.In order to provide energy conservation and to prevent overheating, the heater
shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation
factor is defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the
heater output going from 40 degrees F pipe temperature operation to 150
degrees F pipe temperature operation.
D.The heater shall operate on line voltage of 120 volts without the use of
transformers.
E.The heater shall be sized according to this table. The required heater output
rating is in watts per foot at 50 degrees F. (Heater selection based on 1"
fiberglass insulation on metal piping).
PIPE SIZE WATTS PER LIN.FT.
3 inches or less 5 watts
4 inches 5 watts
6 inches 8 watts
8 inches 2 strips - 5 watts
10 inches to 14
inches
2 strips - 8 watts
F.Power connection, end seal, splice and tee kit components shall be applied in
the field.
G.The system shall be controlled by a bulb-sensing thermostat set at 40 degrees F
either directly or through an appropriate contactor.
H.Ground fault circuit breakers shall be provided as required by section 427-22 of
the NEC-1987.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.3 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A.All un-lined supply, return air and outside air duct systems located in spaces above
ceilings not used as return air plenum and in non-conditioned spaces shall be
insulated with 2" thick fiberglass flexible ductwrap with vapor barrier. (Duct
systems with less than 1" thick liner are to be considered as un-lined.)
B.All lined (minimum 1" thick liner) supply, return air and outside air duct systems
located in spaces above ceilings not used as return air plenum and in non-
conditioned spaces shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick fiberglass flexible ductwrap
with vapor barrier.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A.A water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and
glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50.
B.A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment
adhesive; Foster 85-15 or Childers CP-85.
C.Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82.
D.A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible
elastomeric insulation; Armstrong 520.
2.5 DUCT SEALANTS
A.A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, high velocity duct sealer; Foster 32-14
or 3M EC-800.
B.Same sealer, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 30-02.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A.Equipment: Insulation shall be cut to fit the contour of the equipment and secured
by means of bands, stick clips, weld pins and lugs or adhesives as required for
each individual piece of equipment.
B.Piping: Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with a contact
cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where
insulation terminates, it shall be neatly bevelled and finished.
C.Ductwork:
1. Fiberglass board insulation shall be applied to duct with mechanical
fasteners such as stick clips or weld pins spaced as required to install full
pieces of board insulation (approximately 12" centers on bottom). Joints
and seams in vapor barrier facing shall be covered with 3" wide matching
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
tape or with vapor barrier mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh
reinforcement. Where duct standing seams exceed the insulation
thickness, an additional layer of board will be required.
2.Flexible fiberglass insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured
with outward clinching staples. Ducts 24" wide and larger shall have the
insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18" centers or with 4" wide
bands of adhesive applied on 18" centers. Insulation shall be lapped a
minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with an
approved mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where
insulation terminates, all raw glass shall be sealed to duct.
3.Flexible elastomeric insulation shall be adhered to clean, oil-free surface by
compression fit method and full coverage of 520 adhesive. Seal butt joints
with same adhesive. Apply same thickness on standing metal duct seams
as installed on the duct surface.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Furnish and install plumbing fixtures.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fixtures:By same manufacturer for each type product specified throughout
unless noted otherwise.
B.Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout unless noted
otherwise.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Deliver and store fixtures in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B.Handle fixtures with care to insure against breakage.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Stainless Steel Security Fixtures
1.Acorn.
2.Bradley.
3.Metcraft.
B.Fixtures
1.American Standard.
2.Crane.
3.Eljer.
4.Kohler.
5.Universal-Rundle.
C.Fixture Trim
1.American Standard.
2.Chicago.
3.Kohler.
4.Speakman.
5.T&S.
D.Flush Valves
1.Delany.
2.Sloan.
3.Zurn.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E.Water Closet Seats
1.Church
2.Kohler.
3.Olsonite.
F.Fixture Carriers
1.Josam.
2.Jay R. Smith.
3.Wade.
4.Zurn.
G.Drinking Fountain
1.Elkay.
2.Halsey Taylor.
3.Haws.
4.Oasis.
5.Sunroc.
2.2 WATER CLOSET (WC-1)
A.Bowl: Acorn 1680-1-ULF 1.6 gallons per flush, elongated toilet fabricated from
Type 304 stainless steel with 14 gage cabinet, bowl, and flushing rim and 16
gage trap covers. Welds shall be ground smooth with exterior surfaces polished
to No. 4 satin finish. Toilet shall be siphon jet type with elongated bowl and self-
draining rim with hinged plastic seat. Trap shall pass 2 5/8 inch ball. Exterior of
trap shall be fully enclosed. Interior coated with fire resistant sound deadening
coatings. Fixture shall withstand loading to 2000 pounds with no measurable
deflection and up to 5000 pounds with no permanent damage. Complete with
1500 Series wall sleeve for concrete block walls.
B.Flush Valve: Sloan Model No. 152-1.6 ES-S, 1.6 gallons per flush, concealed
closet flushometer, rough brass with nonhold-open actuator, 1 inch IPS wheel
handle back-chek angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker, elbow flush
connection and spud coupling for 1-½ inch concealed back spud. Include H-532
sweat solder adapter. Sensor Activated with pushbutton assembly with wall panel
and sleave for up to 8 inch wall. Provide piping fittings in chase. Provide 120v
single phase transformer to provide 24 VAC power to controller.
2.3 WATER CLOSET (WC-2) HANDICAP
A.Same as specified for WC-1 except add suffix (-HC) for handicapped height
adjustment.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.4 URINAL (UR-1)
A.Urinal: Acorn 1709HEU Series wall-hung straddle urinal with washout flushing
action and continuous four-wall flushing rim; 16 gage Type 304 stainless steel
with exposed surface, polished to No. 4 satin finish. Exposed welds shall be
ground smooth, construction shall be free of visible voids, seams, and crevices.
Trap shall provide 2 ½ inch seal and shall pass 1.9 inch ball. Fixture shall be
fitted with beehive dome strainer. Back and underside of fixture supplied with
sound deadening fire resistant material. No. 1500 wall sleeve for concrete block
wall. Unit shall be designed for back supply. Provide pipefittings in chase.
B.Flush Valve: Sloan Model No. 195 ES-S, concealed urinal flushometer, rough
brass with nonhold-open actuator, 3/4 inch IPS wheel handle back-chek angle
stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection and spud
coupling for 3/4 inch concealed back spud. Include sweat solder adapter. Sensor
Activated with pushbutton assembly with wall panel and sleave for up to
8 inch wall. Provide piping fittings in chase. Provide 120v single phase
transformer to provide 24 VAC power to controller .
2.5 URINAL (UR-2) HANDICAP
B. Same as specified for UR-1 except add suffix (-HC) for handicapped height
adjustment.
2.6 LAVATORY (L-1) HANDICAP
A.Lavatory: Bradley LVSD2, barrier-free lavatory constructed of Evero Geo Series
natural quartz. Two bowl, 60 inches by 21 inches by 12 inches tall. Provide
Bradley sensor activated faucet for single temperature with deck mounted spout,
and 120v transformer mounted in apron. Provide grid strainer, No. 1110 elbow
drain fitting with tubing drain to wall and No. 1116, 1 ¼ inch P-trap waste for
mounting in chase.
2.7 SINK (S-1) HANDICAP
A.Sink: Advance Tabco 7-PS-20, Series barrier-free lavatory constructed of Type
304 stainless steel. Bowl, countertop, skirt, and backsplash, 14 gage. Oval bowl,
14 ½ inches by 9 ½ inches by 5 inches deep. Surfaces polished to No. 4 finish.
Provide Advance Tabco K-210 faucet, satin finish, wrist blades, 4” O.C. deck
mounted. Provide grid strainer, 1 ¼ inch P-trap waste. McGuire 165 trim.
B.Trap Wrap/Supply Insulation: Handilav-Guard Model No. 102.
2.6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (EWC-1) - HANDICAP
A.Halsey Taylor Model HRFSEBP, ADA rated and barrier free, two units mounted
at heights as shown on drawings. High unit shall be standard depth. Satin finish
stainless steel. Self-closing pushbar, and automatic stream regulator.
B.Cooling System: Remote chiller refrigeration system shall be hermetically sealed
and shall employ a 1/5 hp, 115 volt, single phase, 60 hz motor rated at 4.5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
amperes. Refrigerated water cooler; shall deliver 8.0 gph of 50 water at 90
ambient and 80 inlet water, shall be UL listed and comply with ARI Standard 1010-
84; Halsey-Taylor No. SJ8-Q.
C.P-Traps: McGuire 8872 cast body with tubular wall bend and escutcheon; 1 ¼-
inch by 1 ¼-inch, 17 gage.
D.Stops: McGuire 167LK supplies with loose key stops 3/8-inch nominal by ½-inch
outside diameter.
2.7 MOP SINK (MS-1):
A.Basin: Size 24" x 24" x 12" precast terrazzo basin with 12" curb all around,
integrally cast stainless steel cap and rim guard on exposed sides. Drain shall be
3" IPS hub outlet, chrome plated brass drain, with removable strainer plate,
integrally cast. Seal between sink and wall with a bead of Fiat No. 833-AA silicon
sealant; Fiat Model No. MSBID2424.
B.Faucet: Chrome plated with vacuum breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace,
pail hook and 3/4" hose thread on spout. Body inlets 8" center to center, lever
handles, 1021 flow control. Center to spout outlet from back of wall flange 8";
Chicago No. 897.
C.Hose and Hose Bracket: 30" long flexible, heavy-duty 5/8" rubber hose, cloth
reinforced with 3/4" coupling at one end. Bracket is 5" long by 3" wide, 18 gauge
Type 302 stainless steel with rubber grip; Fiat No. 832-AA.
D.Drain: 3" cast iron pipe and p-trap by Contractor.
E.Mop Hanger: 24" long by 3" wide 18 gauge Type 302 stainless steel mop hanger
with three (3) rubber tool grips; Fiat No. 889-CC.
2.8 FLOOR DRAIN
A.Wade 3” W-1100 with W-2400 trap. Primer and funnel as required.
2.8 TRENCH DRAIN
A.Zurn Z-890 with slotted stainless steel grate, bottom outlet and end caps.
2.10 CLEAN-OUT
A.Wade W-6000-TY
2.11 HOSE BIBB
A.Wade W-8620
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location with Drawings and size of
fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
B.Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.Install each fixture with trap, unless provided integral with fixture or noted
otherwise on Drawings, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B.Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops
reducers, and escutcheons.
C.Install components level and plumb.
D.Install and secure fixtures in place with all carriers and bolts.
E.Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900;
color shall match fixture.
F.Mount fixtures to following heights above finished floor:
1.Water Closet
a.Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
b.Handicapped: 17 to 19 inches to top of seat.
2.Urinal
a.Standard: 24 inches to top of bowl rim.
b.Handicapped: Maximum of 17 inches to top of bowl rim.
3.Lavatory Wall-Hung
a.Standard: 31 inches to top of bowl rim.
b.Handicapped:Maximum of 34 inches to top of bowl rim; 29
inches clear to bottom of apron.
4.Electric Water Cooler
a.Standard: 40 inches to top of basin rim.
b.Handicapped: Maximum of 36 inches to spout.
5.Water Closet Flush Valves
a.Standard: 11 inches minimum above bowl rim.
b.Handicapped: Maximum of 44 inches to control device.
c.Install control on wide side of stall.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,
noise, or overflow.
B.At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
C.Solidly attach water closet carrier feet to floor with all screws, as recommended
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Eemax
2. Chronomite
3.Rheem
B.Certifying Agency: Certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A.Guarantee for five years from date of project acceptance.
B.Repair or replace all faulty equipment within guarantee period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS
A.Heater Type: Electric.
B.Heater Style: Standard Self-contained.
C.Water Heater:
1.Weight: 8 lbs
2.Operating Pressure: 25 min PSI, 150 max PSI
3.Cover: Enameled Steel
4.Heater : Glass reinforced Heater Bodies and Ni Chrome elements
5.Color: White
6.Element: Dual replacement cartridge inserts
7.Microprocessing temp control (+/-1°) accuracy, adjustable range 100° -
140°F Pipe Fitting: 3/4 npt at bottom of unit (□□” OD) UL listed:
E86887(M) US Patent #’s: 4,960,976 and 4,762,9801.
D.Heaters to be free of:
1. Sharp edges.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Scratches on enameled surfaces.
3. Loose screws.
4. Loose panels.
5. Dents on shell.
E.Service Conditions:
1. Nominal Capacity: As scheduled on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Install heater, piping and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3.2 TESTING AND FLUSHING
A.Flushing: After piping, valves and accessories are connected, but prior to start-up
and testing, flush heater unit under full system pressure.
B.Start-up and Testing:
1. Start-up: After flushing, drain heater tank, refill tank, and start-up unit in
accordance with manufacturer's operating instructions.
2. Operations Test:
a.Test heater unit after field adjustments have been made.
b. Retest until specification requirements have been met.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.Adjust:
1. Adjust thermostat to desired outlet water temperature.
B.Clean: Upon completion of testing and adjusting, clean parts of heater unit to
remove grease, sludge and foreign substances.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15720
PACKAGE ROOFTOP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.Furnish and install package type heating and cooling units as indicated on the
drawings, in schedules, and by the requirements of this section.
B.Units shall have electric heat with direct expansion cooling, or package heat pump
units.
C.Units shall be a complete package with all operating controls including room
thermostat. Refer to controls sections for detailed temperature control
requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Units shall be as manufactured by one of the following:
1. Lennox
2. Carrier
3. Trane
4. Yor
k PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGE ROOFTOP ELECTRIC HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
A.Furnish and install a one-piece air-to-air DX mechanical heat pump system
complete with automatic controls. The equipment shall be shipped completely
factory assembled, precharged, piped and wired internally ready for field
connections. In addition, manufacturer shall test operate system at the factory
before shipment.
B.Furnish and install a steel roof mounting frame. It shall mate to the bottom
perimeter of the equipment. When flashed into the roof, it shall make a unit
mounting curb and provide weatherproof duct connection and entry into the
conditioned area.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Equipment shall be capable of [bottom] [front] handling of conditioned air.
D.Furnish and install complete with all controls, an air mixing damper assembly,
including fresh air, recirculated air, and exhaust air dampers. The fresh air section
shall be equipped with cleanable air filters. The assembly shall mount within the
confines of the unit casing. Units shall have full vent cycle.
E.The total certified cooling capacity shall not be less than scheduled capacities.
The total compressor power input shall not exceed scheduled FLA.
F.The coils shall be non-ferrous construction with aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to copper tubes. Outdoor coil shall have sub-cooling rows.
G.The total certified heating capacity shall not be less than scheduled capacities.
H.The compressor shall be resiliently mounted, have built-in 3 mode crankshaft
lubrication, crankcase heater, discharge temperature limiter, current and
temperature sensing motor overloads. The system shall be protected by high
pressure switches and a compressor timed off cycle controller.
I.Furnish and install a nichrome bare wire electric heat section of Kw capacity,
equipped with fusible links. Sections having more than one circuit shall be step
started in 40 second increments per circuit.
J.Centrifugal air blowers shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, adjustable
belt drives and be capable of delivering scheduled cfm at an external static
pressure scheduled. The outdoor unit fans shall be direct driven. All motors shall
have inherent protection devices.
K.The frame shall be of welded construction. The casing shall be of galvanized
panels with a baked-on outdoor enamel finish. The entire bottom of cabinet shall be
insulated with not less than 1" thick fiberglass. Cabinet panels shall be insulated
with not less than 1-1/2" thick fiberglass.
L.Furnish 2" thick fiberglass replaceable filters.
M.All components, wiring and inspection areas shall be completely accessible
through removable panels.
N.The units shall have the additional following features:
1. Suction line accumulator, factory installed and piped.
2. High pressure switches, factory installed and wired.
3.Wall mounted combination heating-cooling thermostat with a clear
unbreakable plastic guard.
4. Start kit to allow compressor to start under loaded conditions or low voltage
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
O.System controls shall include room thermostat, night set-back thermostat, time
clock, and remote readout and control panel.
P.Units shall be thoroughly tested and approved according to ARI Standard 240 and
270 Conditions.
Q.Compressor shall have five year warranty, including parts and labor.
R.Units rated at 2000 cfm and larger shall have a duct mounted smoke detector
mounted in the unit per the mechanical code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNITS
A.Install units in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Rooftop units shall be installed and proved completely water tight.
C.The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the correct power wiring to the AC
units. He shall instruct the Electrical Contractor as to the proper connection point,
disconnect location, over-current, short circuit protection, minimum circuit amps,
the proper internal routing of wire and conduit and the proper connection methods
inside the unit. Wire size shall in no case be smaller than that indicated on the
electrical drawings and/or in the electrical specifications. The HVAC Contractor
shall assure proper and complete unit manufacturer's data is available and is used
for installation by the Electrical Contractor. Wiring, conduits and disconnects not
installed correctly shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
D.All control wiring and conduit shall be furnished and installed by the HVAC
Contractor. Wiring inside the unit shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's
wiring diagrams. All wiring must be sized, color coded and connected in strict
accordance with Division 16 sections of these specifications. Minimum wire size
inside unit cabinet shall be No. 16, copper, stranded. Wiring within the unit shall
be bundled and neatly trained. Terminal connections shall be properly made-up
using connector devices and each connection point clearly identified as to function.
Submit connector devices for review. Control wiring installation shall be supervised
and approved by the unit manufacturer's authorized representative.
E.Start-up and initial adjustments shall be done by the unit manufacturer's authorized
service personnel.
F.When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to equipment.
Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc., for each item
of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15820 - EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.Direct drive inline exhaust fan
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fans shall be as manufactured by one of the following:
1.Penn
2. Acme
3.Cook
4. Jenn Air
5. Greenheck
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INLINE EXHAUST FAN
A.Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Should motor fan or fan
bearings have appreciable noise or vibration, the motor, fan wheel, bearings or all
shall be replaced. Should fan have objectionable noise or vibration the fan shall be
replaced. Fan tip speed shall not exceed the values in schedule.
B.Fan bearings shall be self-aligning type ball bearings. Bearings shall be heavy duty
type for long life.
C.Fan and motor shall be mounted on a rigid frame assembly. Fan housings shall be
constructed of heavy gauge metal. Fans with exposed motors and drive shall have
a belt guard rigidly secured to the fan assembly.
D.Fans shall have automatic dampers to open and close with fan operation.
Dampers shall be rigidly constructed and not vibrate or rattle when fan is operating.
E.Fan motors shall be open drip proof design and with "Electrical" item of this section.
F.Capacity shall be as scheduled.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Fans shall be mounted as indicated. They shall be securely mounted.
B.Provide spring isolators.
C.When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to equipment.
Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc., for each item
of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15830 - LOW VELOCITY METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.Extent:
1.The extent of low velocity metal ductwork is indicated on the drawings and
in the schedules, and by the requirements of this section.
2.Low velocity ductwork is hereby defined to include work with velocities not
exceeding 2000 fpm and static pressures not exceeding 2" w.g.
B.The types of ductwork specified in this section include, but are not necessarily
limited to the following:
1. Heating supply and return air systems
2. Air conditioning supply and return air systems
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Industry Standards:
1. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and
details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers) recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A.Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view
in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections
including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations,
and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.
B.Ductwork Metal and Gages:
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from
galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, G90 zinc coating, mill
phosphatized.
2.Gages, Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork (galvanized and stainless, if
any) from the following minimum gages for diameters and sizes up to the
corresponding maximum dimensions indicated:
Round Duct Rectangular Duct
26 gage up to 13" diameter 26 gage up to 12"
24 gage up to 22" diameter 24 gage 13" to 30"
22 gage up to 36" diameter 22 gage 31" to 54"
20 gage up to 50" diameter 20 gage 55" to 84"
18 gage up to 60" diameter 18 gage 85" up
16 gage up to 84" diameter
Larger diameter round ductwork
not permitted.
C.This Contractor shall furnish and install complete systems of ductwork shown,
including plenums, casings, splitters, extractors, dampers, etc. Unless otherwise
indicated or specified, ductwork and plenums shall be constructed of new
galvanized prime grade lock forming steel sheets.
D.Ducts and plenums shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of the
ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA Manual. The Contractor shall present the
Architect's representative with a copy of the SMACNA Manual at start of project.
E.All flat panels of ducts 12" and larger shall be crossbroken or machine beaded.
F.At each duct or plenum connection to fan and coil units, or fans, provide a flexible
connection of Ventfabrics "Ventglass" (30 oz.) installed with sufficient slack to
render it flexible.
G.In each square elbow, provide airfoil pattern double thickness turning vanes.
Turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance with the SMACNA Manual.
H.At each low pressure ductwork branch from a low pressure duct and at each
sweeping elbow take-off to a grille or ceiling diffuser, provide a splitter damper
consisting of blade on a square operating rod fitted with an adjusting device.
Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the adjusting devices located in finished
ceilings shall be Ventfabrics, Inc., No. 666, with the adjusting device securely
fastened to the furring and ceiling and cover shall be painted to match ceiling.
Where splitters occur above removable ceiling, the damper quadrant shall be
above the ceiling against the duct and shall be Ventfabrics, Inc., No. 637.
I.Each individual air supply unit, whether sidewall, floor or ceiling diffuser, shall be
fitted with a device to permit the adjustment of the amount of air supplied to the
unit independent of any other outlet. These devices may take the form of outlet
boots with extractors, or of branch ducts with splitter dampers, as installation
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
conditions dictate, but in any case, each shall be fitted with a means of manual
adjustment of the amount of air delivered to the outlet.
J.Where internal acoustical lining is indicated on the drawings, the duct sizes shown
have allowed for the lining thickness.
K.Install flexible ductwork as indicated on the plans. Install flexible ductwork such
that continuous bends do not exceed 90 and bend radius is no less than 3D.
1.Low pressure flexible duct shall conform to the Class 1 requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association. A nominal 1" thickness of fiberglass
insulation shall be enclosed in a factory applied and sealed vapor barrier
jacket. Insulated flexible duct shall be Thermaflex Type M-KE manufactured
by the Flexible Tubing Corp. Flexible duct shall be installed per
manufacturer's recommendations. All joints and connections shall be made
with positive locking steel straps. Flexible ductwork shall conform to
mechanical code.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A.General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types and sizes
indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to
comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of
ductwork and equipment.
B.Duct Liner: Flexible acoustical insulating liner, complying with FS HH-I-545, Type I
for round ducts and Type II for rectangular ducts and for pre-molded round duct
linings, complying with NFPA Standard 90-A, one inch (1") thickness unless
otherwise indicated. See Section 15848, Acoustical Lining.
C.Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type
applicable for the fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended
by the manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
D.Ductwork Support Materials:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel
fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
E.Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASC-A-7001A by The Adhesive and Sealant
Council, Inc. (see SMACNA standards).
F.Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA Mechanical Fasteners Standard, MF-
l971.
2.3 FABRICATION
A.Shop Fabricated Ductwork:
1. Fabricate in 4, 8, 10 or 12-foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
required to complete runs.
2. Pre-assemble work in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to
minimize field assembly of systems.
3. Disassemble systems only to the extent necessary for shipping and
handling.
4. Match-mark sections for re-assembly and coordinated installation.
B.Fabricate rectangular ductwork with joints, seams and reinforcements as indicated,
complying with SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards".
C.Fabricate round ductwork with girth joints and girth reinforcements as indicated,
complying with SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards".
1. Provide girth joints of the following types (type is fabricator's option where
more than one type is indicated):
a. Continuously welded
b. Flanged
c. Beaded sleeve
2. Reinforce round ductwork with either angle frames or flanged girth joints (or
combination of both) as follows for the corresponding diameter, and space
as indicated:
Up to 36"; no reinforcing required
Up to 60"; 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8", 72" o.c. spacing
Over 60"; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8", 48" o.c. spacing
D.Duct Fittings:
1. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings.
2. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius
equal to associated duct width.
3. Fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is
necessary.
4. Limit angular tapers to 15 degrees.
E.Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest
extent possible.
F.Ductwork with Duct Liner: Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct
where required. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with
SMACNA "Duct Liner Application Standard".
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK
A.General:
1. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "Low Velocity
Duct Construction Standards", which will achieve air tight and noiseless
systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with
a minimum of joints.
2. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment
tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.
3. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of the
type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and will prevent buckling.
B.Locations and Runs:
1. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and
horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible.
2. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run ductwork in the shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access servicing the building and its
equipment.
3. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other
structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building.
4. Limit clearance to 0.5" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment
of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
5.Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1.0" clearance outside of
insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal
ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings.
6.Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically
shown.
7. Coordinate the layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and
similar finished work.
C.Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and
other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
D.Penetrations Through Walls and Partitions:
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. Conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct-
plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gage as the duct.
2. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1/2".
3.At mechanical rooms, caulk the flange to the wall and stuff compressed
mineral fiber insulation into the space between duct and flange.
E.Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,
equipment, controls and other associated work of the ductwork system.
F.Support ductwork from building structure as required and, where not otherwise
indicated, anchor with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion anchors, welded
studs, C-clamps or special beam clamps.
G.Support for Horizontal Ducts:
1. Support ducts located against structural walls and other similar adjacent
vertical surfaces, at 8'-0" spacing for ducts up to 40" horizontal dimension
and 4'-0" spacing for larger ducts.
a.Where width is less than height, support duct with 1-1/2" x 16 gage
straps.
b.Where width is more than height, support duct with shelf-type
fabricated angle brackets of the following sizes:
Up to 18" duct width; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle brackets
Over l8" duct width; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle brackets
2. Hang other horizontal rectangular ducts from overhead structure, at 10'-0"
spacing for duct widths up to 60" and 8'-0" spacing for larger ducts.
a. Support ducts directly with 1" x 16 gage straps for ducts up to 60"
width, and with 1-1/2" x 12 gage straps for ducts up to 96" width,
bolted or screwed to ductwork.
b. Support ducts with trapeze-type hangers with horizontal angle
members and vertical support members of the sizes indicated for
the corresponding duct sizes (long-side dimension):
Up to 30" size; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle and 1" x 18 gage strap or
1/4" diameter hanger rods.
Up to 60" size; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle and 1-1/2" x 16
gage strap or 3/8" diameter hanger rods.
Up to 84" size; 2" x 2" x 1/8" angle and 1-1/2" x 14 gage
strap or 1/2" diameter hanger rods.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
Over 84" size; 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle and 5/8" diameter
hanger rods, except as otherwise shown.
G.Horizontal Round Ducts:
1. Hang with encircling strap and strap hanger (of same size); except for
sizes over 50" in diameter, install a pair of strap hangers bolted to opposite
sides of angle reinforcing rings or flanged joints.
2. Support ducts at 10'-0" spacing with hangers as follows for the
corresponding duct diameters:
Up to 30" diameter; 1" x 16 gage strap hanger
Up to 50" diameter; 1-1/2" x 16 gage strap hangers
Up to 84" diameter; pair of 1-1/2" x 16 gage strap hangers
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.Cleaning:
1. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris.
2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause
corrosive deterioration of the metal or, where ductwork is to be painted,
might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.
B.Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever
it has been damaged.
C.Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air
distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure
of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent the entrance of dust and
debris until the time connections are to be completed.
3.3 All duct penetrations through walls forming air plenums shall have sheet metal flange to
seal opening. Seal gap between flange and wall with polysulphide sealant.
3.4 Construct acoustical lined plenums as detailed on the plans.
3.5 Ductwork from showers shall be constructed of 3003-H14 (3S-1/2 hard) aluminum.
Aluminum ductwork shall be two gauges heavier than scheduled for steel ducts. Slope
shower exhaust duct to exhaust grilles.
3.6 All horizontal ductwork exhausting warm humid air shall have the seams sealed watertight
with EC800 and imbedded glass fabric tape.
3.7 The Contractor shall provide locally fabricated air deflection devices at duct taps into fan
and coil unit plenums. Deflectors shall be constructed and adjusted to assure even air
velocity across filter assembly.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
SECTION 15850 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.The extent of ductwork accessories work is shown on drawings and by the
requirements of this section.
B.The types of ductwork accessories required for the project include the following:
1. Turning vanes.
2. Splitter dampers.
3. Access doors.
4. Straightening grids.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Unless otherwise indicated, comply with latest SMACNA recommendations
pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A.Provide ductwork accessories and ductwork materials as required by applicable
sections of Division 15. Except as otherwise indicated for each ductwork
accessory, provide metal type, gauge thickness, weight, construction and
reinforcing as required by size limitations, and applicable SMACNA standards,
including fittings, supports, and appurtenances.
2.2 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A.Provide turning vanes in the size and type indicated with the following additional
construction features:
1. Blades: 2" galvanized steel for up to and including 18" ducts.
2. Construction: Double wall blade.
3. Types: Fixed blades for 90 degree elbows.
B. Flexible Duct Connectors:
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
3. Provide sound and vibration flexible duct connectors on the inlet and outlet
of each fan and/or fan housing to which ductwork or plenum connections
are made.
4.Material:
a.Flexible duct connectors, except those exposed to the weather,
shall be Ventfabrics "VENTGLAS" Neoprene coated glass fabric.
5.Flexible duct connector shall be 6" wide with at least 1" of slack to insure
that no vibration is transmitted.
6.Flexible connector shall be either folded in with the metal or attached with
metal collar frames to provide an airtight installation capable of
withstanding the system pressures.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A.Provide miscellaneous materials for ductwork accessories, including, hinges,
refrigerator latches, sash locks, bolts and wing nuts, gaskets, and pitot tubes as
recommended by the ductwork accessories manufacturer for the application
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A.Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories
are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to
the proper and timely completion of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications for installation
of ductwork materials. Install ductwork products in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, with applicable portions of the details of
construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
B.Install access doors so that the doors open against the system air pressure
wherever feasible, and their latches are operable from either side except where the
duct is too small to be entered.
C.Coordinate work with ductwork installer.
3.3 TESTING
A.Check installed ductwork accessories for required operation and leakage during
the system's operational test. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to
obtain proper operation and leakproof performance
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 15870 - AIR DIFFUSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.
1.The Conditions of the Contract.
2.Other applicable sections of the specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.Titus
2.Tuttle and Bailey
3. Barber-Colman
4. Carnes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Furnish and install air diffusers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. All units
shall be constructed to have a neat, well-made appearance. Grille framework shall be
rigidly constructed; flange corners shall be mitered and supported for a hairline crack. All
face bars shall be of heavy gauge metal to adequately resist bending or twisting and fit
tightly and closely within the framework. The units shall have a neck to slip inside ductwork
for an airtight noiseless connection. Units not meeting the above specifications shall be
rejected at the jobsite.
2.2 It is this Contractor's responsibility to check the architectural drawings to supply the proper
air diffusers and adapting framework for the type of construction at each outlet. The frame
shall be of the same finish as the unit and be of a configuration the manufacturer
recommends for the construction involved. The outlets shall fit the construction with no
additional expense to the Owner. All registers and grilles shall have a separate mounting
frame in gypsum board walls and ceilings.
2.3 The manufacturer furnishing the air diffusers shall verify sizes against cfm requirements for
each device to get the intended throw and be without objectionable noise when the device
is applied to the system. He shall coordinate any approved differences from the drawings
with the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish proper framework,
boots and install the devices approved.
2.4 All return and discharge air diffusers shall be installed in the same configuration; i.e., all
return grilles, shall be mounted to have prominent bars horizontal.
2.5 Return grilles in corridors and other areas subject to damage shall be constructed with 1/8"
thick bar louvers supported on 6" center.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.6 Supply units shall have a volume control device at locations where more than one unit is
connected to the same supply duct unless otherwise noted in the schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Units located in surfaces having a factory finish shall be painted off-white. Units without
plating shall be coated with rust-proofing primer. Plated units shall be covered with a thick
coat of plating for a complete dense coat. Check other sections of the General and
Mechanical specifications to determine if painting of wall and ceiling units is to be done by
another Contractor.
3.2 The Contractor shall furnish the air diffusers as scheduled.
3.3 The Contractor shall install all air diffusers securely, true and plumb. All screw holes shall
have screws in them.
END OF SECTION
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 1 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The general requirements for electrical work are intended to be complementary
to and not instead of the General Requirements of the Construction Contract of
these Specifications.
B. Work Included: Provide complete electrical service where shown on the
drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper
installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of
work:
1. Underground secondary electric service.
2. Main distribution panelboards.
3. Pole mounted sports lighting fixtures and lamps.
4. Lighting circuits and controls.
5. Transformers, contactors and timeclocks.
6. Wiring devices.
7. Branch circuit wiring.
8. Pole mounted area lighting
9. Other items and services required to complete the systems.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. Codes: All electrical work shall conform with the requirements and
recommendations of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all
local codes and ordinances. In conflicts between codes, the more stringent
requirements shall govern.
B. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organization are by
reference made a part of these specifications and all electrical work, unless
otherwise indicated, shall comply with their requirements and recommendations
wherever applicable:
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (A.E.I.C.) Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers (I.E.E.E.)
American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.)
American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.)
Certified Ballast Manufacturers (C.B.M.)
Electrical Testing Laboratories (E.T.L.)
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (I.P.C.E.A.)
National Bureau of Standards (N.B.S.)
National Electrical Contractors Associations (N.E.C.A.)
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (N.E.M.A.)
National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.)
Radio-Television Manufacturer’s Association (R.T.M.A.)
Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers (R.L.M.)
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.)
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 2 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act are by reference made a part of these specifications and
all electrical work shall comply with their requirements and recommendations
wherever applicable.
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other divisions of the contract documents. Refer to each division’s
specifications and drawings for all requirements including but not limited to the
following:
Section 01110 Summary.
Section 01300 Administrative Requirements.
Section 01400 Quality Requirements.
Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls.
Section 01700 Execution Requirements.
Division 2 Site Work.
Division 3 Concrete Work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 16.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when
reviewed by the Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the work.
C. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section includes the
following:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Branch circuit panelboards.
3. Safety switches.
4. Transformers.
5. Circuit breakers.
6. Lighting fixtures.
7. Lamps.
8. Conductors.
9. Conduit and fittings.
10. Cabinets.
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 3 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
11. Contactors, relays, timeclocks and controls.
12. Wiring devices; receptacles, switches.
13. Grounding system.
14. Light poles.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The use of manufacturers’ names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase
“or equal” is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the
specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction
documents that are drawn to scale.
B. Submittals for “equal” items shall, where applicable, include the following data
which are not necessarily required for specified items:
1. Performance characteristics.
2. Materials.
3. Finish.
4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards.
C. Submittals of “equal” components or systems may be rejected if:
1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion
of the mechanical, electrical, architectural, or structural design.
2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a
manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other
trades is adversely affected.
D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10)
days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise,
such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be
made only by the bidders. Manufacturers, distributions, and sub-contractors
shall not make proposals to the Owner for substitutions.
E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Owner. Should
a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or
otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee
period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or
equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
F. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also
submit a bid on the “as specified” materials and equipment.
G. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also
provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials
and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the
Owner.
1.7 UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY POWER
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 4 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of
Division 16. The location and sizes of electrical lines are shown in accordance
with data secured from the Owner’s survey. Data shown is offered as an
estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy.
B. Temporary Power:
1. Provide temporary power in strict accordance with the provisions of these
specifications.
2. Provide temporary lighting and power system required by the building
trades installed in accordance with OSHA requirements and described in
the General Requirements Division 1.
1.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform excavation and backfilling associated with the work in strict accordance
with the provisions of these specifications.
B. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work.
This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition
until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation
and safeguard employees shall be properly performed.
C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for
floor slabs, forms, beams etc. Ground under conduits shall be well compacted
before conduits are installed.
D. Exterior conduits shall be installed with a minimum of 24 inches of cover below
the finished grade, unless otherwise indicated or required by local ordinances.
All exterior conduit shall be installed with a minimum of 12" of cover below the
finished paving grade, unless otherwise indicated or required by local
ordinances.
E. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall
be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 90
percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-58T (Proctor Soil Compaction
Test).
F. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed
from the site.
G. Coordinate and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing
these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall
be repaired at no cost to Owner.
H. In a line stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the
excavation is complete.
I. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 5 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
excavation to their original condition.
1.9 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES AND INSERTS
A. Furnish and install flashings where conduits pass through outside walls.
Flashings shall be properly formed to fit around conduit and shall be caulked,
with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation, so as to make a
watertight seal between conduit and building.
B. Unless otherwise specified, install sleeves for each conduit where it may pass
through interior walls or floors. Galvanized 22 gauge sheet iron sleeves shall be
used. Finish flush with each finished wall surface. In pipe chases, they shall
extend 1-1/2" above the floor slab and be watertight cemented. The sized of
sleeves shall be such as to readily permit the subsequent insertion of the proper
size conduits of raceways.
C. The conduits and raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and
masonry exterior walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe
sleeves. The inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least ½ inch greater
than the outside diameters of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed in
these sleeves, fill the annular space between pipes and sleeves with 790
Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. The completed
installation shall be watertight.
D. All roof penetrations shall be provided with counter flashings arranged to provide
a weatherproof installation.
E. Penetration through walls floors and ceilings shall be done in such a manner to
maintain the integrity of the fire rating of the respective wall, floor or ceiling.
1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with
the provisions of these specifications and the following:
1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching of work.
2. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with
the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of the work.
3. Request for Architect’s Consent:
a. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written
request to the Architect for permission to proceed with cutting.
b. Should conditions of the work, or schedule indicate a required
change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify
the Architect and secure his written permission and the required
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 6 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
change order prior to proceeding.
4. Perform cutting by methods which will prevent damage to other portions
of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair
and new work.
5. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation
complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.
1.11 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide stamped steel access doors at each location where access is required
for junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes and conduit boxes that contain
electrical wiring. Access doors shall be fully insulated complete with mounting
flange, double thickness door, cam latch, gasket, and retaining wire. No tools
shall be required to open the access door.
B. The minimum size of each access door shall be sufficient to provide adequate
access for the intended purpose of installation.
C. Access door finish shall match adjacent architectural finishes.
D. Provide access doors equal to Nailor-Hart Industries, Inc., series 0800.
E. Access doors shall be coordinated with the architect prior to installation.
1.12 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be
performed. Work required to correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the work shall be included as part of the work of this section. Do
not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1.13 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions
necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a
better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding
with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed
arrangement for the Engineer’s review.
B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions
other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume
responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Engineer
review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such a
change shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question.
C. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots,
holes, or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work, and for the
correct locations of pipe sleeves.
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 7 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.14 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these
specifications and the following:
1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and
adequate provision for interface with the work in this Section.
2. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the schedule for work of
other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total work.
3. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict
with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment,
provide required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment.
4. Install all power and control wiring for the installation of equipment
furnished under Division 15 sections of work. The Contractor shall
furnish all disconnect switches and other equipment as required for the
proper operation of the equipment unless such equipment is specified to
be factory mounted.
5. Coordinate equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with
work affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment
changes are the responsibility of the Contractor making the change.
B. Data indicated on the drawings and in these specifications are as exact as could
be secured, but their absolute accuracy is not warranted. The exact locations,
distances, levels, and other conditions will be governed by actual construction
and the drawings and specifications should be used only for guidance in such
regard.
C. Where outlets are not specifically located on the drawings, locate as determined
in the field by the Architect. Where outlets are installed without such specific
direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
D. Field verify all measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed because
of differences between work shown on the drawings and actual measurements
at the site of construction.
E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs have been designed for
maximum economy consistent with adequate sizing for voltage drops and other
considerations. Install the wiring with circuits arranged exactly as shown on the
drawings, except as otherwise approved in advance by the Engineer.
F. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but are required to be followed as
closely as actual construction and other work will permit.
1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Provide project record documents associated with the work of Division 16 in strict
accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 8 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Throughout progress of the Division 16 Work, maintain an accurate record of
changes in the contract documents that apply to work of Division 16.
C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of record documents to one person
on the Contractor’s staff as approved by the Architect.
D. Accuracy of Records:
1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the record documents, making
adequate and proper entries on each page of specifications and each
sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to
show the change properly.
2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in
the contract documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from
the approved project record documents.
E. Maintain the job set of record documents completely protected from deterioration
and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all
recorded data to the final project record documents.
F. Making Entries on Drawings:
1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly
describe the change by graphic line and note as required.
2. Date all entries.
3. Call attention to the entry by a “cloud” drawn around the area or areas
affected.
4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the
overlapping changes.
5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change
has occurred.
G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts:
1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, and
similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray
precise physical layout. Final physical arrangement is determined by the
Contractor, subject to the Engineer’s approval. However, design of future
modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the
final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the
drawings.
2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension the centerline of
each run of items such as all sleeves and conduit below grade, in walls,
or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact
location:
a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as “Rigid Conduit”
and the like.
b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item “under
slab,” “in ceiling plenum,” “exposed,” and the like.
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 9 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related
reliably to the specifications.
H. Final Project Record Documents:
1. The purpose of the final project record documents is to provide factual
information regarding all aspects of the work, both concealed and visible,
to enable future modification of the work to proceed without lengthy and
expensive site measurement, investigation and examination.
2. Present a clean, neat set of reproducible mylars showing “as-build”
conditions in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph “Project
Record Documents”.
1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the
Engineer for review and comments.
B. Unless otherwise directed in other sections, or in writing by the Architect, submit
three copies of the final manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of
operation and maintenance personnel.
C. Where instruction manuals are required to be submitted under other sections of
these specifications, prepare in accordance with the following.
Format:
Size: 8 ½" x 11"
Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb. Weight
Text: Neatly written or printed
Drawings:11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable;
larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the manual and
provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text.
Flysheets:Separate each section of manual with neatly prepared flysheets
briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may
be in color.
Bindings:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding
mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be
acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect’s approval.
Measurements:Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-
and-inches, lbs, and cfm; where items may be expected to be
measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae,
provide additional measurements in the “International System of
Units” (SI).
D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved
by the Architects, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the
following information:
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 10 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Name and Address of Work
General subject of this manual
Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date
E. Contents: Include at least the following:
1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate
information as to location within the manual of all emergency information
regarding the installation.
2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all
equipment involved including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly.
3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment.
4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name
and address of nearest vendor and all other data pertinent to
procurement procedures.
5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued.
6. Manufacturer’s bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent,
clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and
deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers’ data with
which this installation is not concerned.
7. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of three specifications.
1.17 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work of Division 16 in
accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
B. Provide concrete bases for main switchboard, distribution panels, and floor
mounted transformers. Bases shall be four inches (4") above finished floors or
grades (unless otherwise noted) and shall protrude two inches (2") beyond all
sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases
from ready-mixed hardrock concrete, ASTM C94, reinforced with #3 rebars,
ASTM A615, Grade 40, at 18" on center each way.
C. Field verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted electrical equipment with the
Architect. Supply necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away
from equipment.
1.18 PAINTING
16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Page 11 of 11
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the
finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match
appearance of original finish.
1.19 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required
approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the
following stages of construction:
1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered.
2. At completion of the work of this section.
3. In the underground condition prior to placing backfill, concrete floor slab,
and when all associated electrical work is in place.
C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified
requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace
them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost
to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written
notice of noncompliance.
D. In the Architect’s Presence:
1. Test all parts of the electrical system and prove that all such items
provided under this section function electrically in the required manner.
1.20 PROJECT COMPLETION
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, thoroughly clean all exposed
portions of the electrical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease,
oil, and other foreign material, and using only the type cleaner recommended by
the manufacturer of the item being cleaned.
B. Thoroughly indoctrinate the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel in the
contents of the operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted as
part of this section of these specifications.
C. All new lighting fixtures shall be operational at final inspection including replacing
all lamps that do not operate.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to encompass a system that
will not interfere with the structural and architectural design of the building.
Coordinate the work to avoid interferences between conduit, equipment,
architectural and structural work.
B.Coordinate with architectural features, trim and millwork details, and install
equipment in cabinets or other special areas as directed by A/E.
C.Drawings are based on equipment specified. Make adjustments, modifications or
changes required, due to use of other equipment, at no additional compensation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform work in accordance with the latest editions, revisions, amendments or
supplements of applicable statutes, ordinances, codes or regulations of Federal,
State and Local Authorities having jurisdiction in effect on the date bids are
received.
B.Where approval standards have been established by OSHA, Underwriter's
Laboratories, American Codes, ASME, AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, NFPA 70, State
Fire Insurance Regulatory Body, and FM, these standards shall be followed
whether or not indicated on Drawings and Specifications. Include the cost of all
work required to comply with the requirements of these authorities in the original
proposal. Comply with ANSI C2 where applicable.
C.Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all
equipment, material and work. In instances where capacities, size or other
features of equipment, devices or materials exceed these minimums, meet listed or
shown capacities.
D.Resolve any code violation discovered in contract documents with the A/E prior to
award of the contract. After award of the contract, make any correction or addition
necessary for compliance with applicable codes at no additional compensation.
E.Arrange with local and state authorities and utility companies for permits, fees and
service connections, verifying locations and arrangement, and pay all charges
including inspections.
1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.Provide new materials and equipment by those regularly engaged in the production
and manufacture of specified materials and equipment. Where Underwriter's
Laboratories or other agency has established standards for materials, provide
materials which are listed and labeled accordingly. The commercially standard
items of equipment and the specific names mentioned herein are intended to
identify standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning
of the work.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B.Perform work by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. Install all
materials and equipment to present a neat appearance when completed and in
accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best
practices of the trade and in conformance with the Contract Documents.
C.Provide all labor, materials, apparatus, and appliances essential to the complete
functioning of the systems described or indicated herein, or which may be
reasonably implied as essential whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or
not.
D.In cases of doubt as to the Work intended or in the event of need for explanation
thereof, make written request for supplementary instructions to A/E.
E.Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor variations are expected;
however, performance and material requirements are the minimum standards
acceptable. The right to judge the quality of equipment that deviates from the
Contract Documents remains solely with A/E.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Follow the manufacturer's directions completely in the delivery, storage, and
handling of equipment and materials.
B.Store equipment in a clean, dry place, protected from other construction. While
stored, maintain factory wrappings or tightly cover and protect equipment against
dirt, water, construction debris, chemical, physical or weather damage, traffic and
theft.
C.Adequately brace and package equipment to prevent breakage and distortion while
in transit.
1.5 SERVICE
A.Immediately prior to final acceptance of project, inspect, clean and service all light
fixtures. Replace all incandescent lamps. Replace all fluorescent or HID lamps if
utilized for construction lighting.
B.Clean and polish all fixtures, equipment, and materials thoroughly, and return to "as
new" condition.
C.Remove all excess material and debris. Place all electrical systems in complete
working order before request for final review. Broom clean all areas.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Documents at the job site for the purpose of
recording the final size, location and interrelation of all work under this Division.
Mark-up this set of drawings as the job progresses to indicate "as-built" location of
all equipment, including concealed conduit, equipment and the like.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1.7 FINAL REVIEW
A.Obtain all necessary Certificates of Occupancy from local authorities.
B.Prior to requesting final payment, submit final approved operation and maintenance
manuals including approved submittals, test reports and "AS-BUILT" drawings.
Delivery of operation and maintenance manuals is a condition of final acceptance.
1.8 GUARANTEE
A.Guarantee materials, parts and labor for all work for one year from the date of
issuance of occupancy permit. During that period make good any faults or
imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in materials or
workmanship with no additional compensation and to the complete satisfaction of
A/E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
16030-A
TESTING
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16030-A - TESTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Test electrical systems and equipment.
B. These tests are required to determine that the equipment involved may be safely
energized and operated.
C. Perform tests by and under the supervision of fully experienced and qualified
personnel. Advise each respective manufacturer’s representative of tests on
their equipment.
D. Record all test data.
E. Each section of Division 16 – Electrical that has products or systems listed herein
incorporate this section by reference and is incomplete without the required tests
stated herein.
1.2 REPORTS
A. Submit test report forms for review a minimum of 90 days prior to requesting a
final review by A/E.
B. Furnish six individually bound copies of test data. Neatly type and arrange data.
Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, weather conditions,
nameplate record of test instrument and list all measurements taken, both prior to
and after any corrections are made to the system. Record all failures and
corrective action taken to remedy incorrect situation.
C. A/E will retain one copy. Remaining copies will be returned to Contractor for
inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Section 16012.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish proposed test procedures, recording forms, list of personnel and test
equipment for A/E review.
16030-A
TESTING
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. Follow recommended procedures for testing as published by test equipment
manufacturer.
C. Follow IES recommended procedures for testing ballfield lighting.
3.2 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Test insulation resistance of each main feeder and service after the installation is
complete but before the connection is made to its source and point of
termination.
B. Test insulation resistance using Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a
voltage not less than 1,000 volts DC. Measure resistance from phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground. In circuits where insulation test value is lower than 1
megohm, remove and replace conductor and retest.
C. Visually inspect connections of every branch circuit for tightness.
D. Insure that grounding conductor is electrically continuous.
E. Test branch circuits against grounds, shorts or other faults.
F. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness
and proper installation.
G. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance
to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment.
H. Test the system for stray currents, ground shorts, etc. If stray currents, shorts,
etc., are detected, eliminate or correct as required.
3.3 WIRING DEVICES
A. Operate switches at least twice.
B. Test every convenience outlet with plug-in device for proper phasing and
grounding.
C. Demonstrate operation of lighting circuits and lighting control systems.
3.4 SECONDARY GROUNDING
A. Test service entrance ground resistance.
B. Provide additional made-electrodes if resistance is more than 3 ohms.
END OF SECTION
16111
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16111 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of a complete and operating electrical raceway system
as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included:
1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings.
2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings.
4. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit and fittings.
5. Non-metallic conduit and fittings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
16111
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, fittings, and couplings of types, grades, sizes, and
weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are
not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring
requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.
B. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings:
1. Rigid steel conduit: ANSI C80.1.
2. Fittings and conduit bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to
match conduit.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings.
1. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing.
2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1: steel compression type.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings:
1. Conduit: FS WW-C566; steel.
2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit and Fittings:
1. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
F. Plastic Conduit and Fittings:
1. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Conduit Clamps, straps and supports: Steel or malleable iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT
A. Size of conduit shall be as scheduled on the drawings or sized for conductor type
installed, whichever is larger.
B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance.
C. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and
perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping.
16111
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch
clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and
heating.
E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling
operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,
clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of
steel channel with conduit straps or clamps.
G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for
temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled.
3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to
sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations.
D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes.
E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit
larger than 2 inch size.
G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with
drain fitting at conduit low point.
H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and
moisture.
I. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit.
J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints and for
seismic considerations.
K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, provide mechanical firestop
fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Seal opening around
conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound.
L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible;
otherwise route through roof jack with pitch pocket.
16111
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
M. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade: 3/4 inch.
N. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer
than 100 feet or in plastic conduit runs which have more than two bends
regardless of length.
O. Make joints in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
P. Provide plastic warning tape for underground conduit installation.
3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Underground installations more than two feet from foundation wall: Schedule 40
plastic conduit.
B. Installations in or under concrete slab, or underground within two feet of foundation
wall: Rigid steel conduit.
C. In slab above grade: Rigid steel conduit.
D. Exposed outdoor locations: Rigid steel conduit or EMT with weathertight fittings.
E. Wet interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing with weathertight fittings or where
allowed by code, PVC.
F. Concealed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
G. Exposed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
H. Where allowed by local authorities having jurisdiction, PVC schedule 40 may be
installed in exposed locations at the filtration building.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Furnish and install raceway systems, including:
1.Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
2.Flexible metal conduit and fittings.
3.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings.
4.Nonmetallic conduit and fittings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated.
B.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C.NEMA TC 2 - Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
D.NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings
1.EMT: ANSI C80.3; hot-dipped galvanized tubing.
2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type.
B.Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings
1.Conduit: Galvanized steel strips, spirally wound.
2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1.
C.Liquidtight Flexible Conduit and Fittings
1.Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket and integral grounding
conductor.
2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; liquidtight, zinc coated steel.
D.Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings
1.Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT
A.Minimum size of conduit is 1/2-inch. Indicated sizes are minimum based on THW
copper wire and larger sizes may be used for convenience of wire pulling.
B.Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Conceal conduit in ceiling of all finished areas and in walls of all areas of the
building. In unfinished areas without ceilings, conduit may be run exposed
overhead. Install all conduit, including conduit above accessible ceiling, parallel or
perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. Neatly route conduit in a common rack
where possible.
D.Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch
clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and
heating appliances.
E.Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling
operations. Fasten conduit securely to building structure using clamps, hangers
and threaded rod.
F.Refer to Section 16190 for support of conduit.
3.2 GENERAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends before joining.
B.Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
C.Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes.
D.Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
E.Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with
drain fitting at conduit low point. Seal conduit which crosses a boundary between
areas of extreme temperature difference.
F.Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and
moisture.
G.Drawings indicate intended circuiting and are not intended to be scaled for exact
conduit location.
H.Install conduit such that it does not interfere with fireproofing of steel.
I.Do not install conduit in floor slab of ground floor of building.
3.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.Wipe nonmetallic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of
cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes
minimum.
3.4 METALLIC CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.Make joints mechanically tight and all conduit electrically continuous.
B.Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet
locations. Use sealing locknuts and other approved techniques for moisture
proofing raceway in wet areas.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger
than 2-inch size.
D.Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints and at 150
foot intervals in straight runs.
E.Provide fire-stop compound at all penetrations of floor slabs or firewalls such that
fire-rating integrity of barrier is not lessened.
3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A.Exterior
1.Exposed
a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit for connection to vibrating equipment
including motors, transformers and control devices.
2.Underground
a.Rigid nonmetallic conduit for all branch circuits.
b.Rigid nonmetallic conduit for all feeders.
B.Interior
1.Exposed
a.Electrical metallic tubing.
2.Concealed
a.Electrical metallic tubing.
3.Cast-in-Concrete: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
4.Connections to Equipment
a.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit in areas subject to moisture, high
humidity, or corrosive agents.
b.Flexible metal conduit in dry, noncorrosive areas.
END OF SECTION
16112
SURFACE RACEWAYS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16112 - SURFACE RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 16110 - General requirements for Electrical Work.
2. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of a completed surface raceway system as indicated on
the drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included;
1. Auxiliary Gutters (Wireways).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials
meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for such materials,
provide only materials bearing the UL label.
2.2 AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Auxiliary Gutters: General purpose or Rain-tight type wireway, with knockouts.
B. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
16112
SURFACE RACEWAYS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Cover: Hinged screw applied cover with full gasketing.
D. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws and drip
shield.
E. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - AUXILIARY GUTTER
A. Bolt auxiliary gutter to wall using two-piece hangers or steel channels fastened to
the wall or in self-supporting structure. Install level.
B. Gasket each joint in oil-tight gutter.
C. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.
END OF SECTION
16120
WIRE AND CABLE
Page 1 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications
and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following;
1. Section 16111 - Raceways and Fittings.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of conductors as indicated on the Drawings and/or as
specified.
B. Work included;
1. Building Wire.
2. Cable.
3. Wiring connections and terminations.
4. Underground wire installed in conduit.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials
meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn annealed copper with conductivity not less
than that of 98% pure copper; Anaconda, Triangle Cable Company, or approved
equal.
B. Building Wire:
16120
WIRE AND CABLE
Page 2 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
1. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5.
2. Feeders and branch circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volts insulation,
THHN/THWN.
3. Control circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN.
4. Use the following color code system:
120/208 Volt
System
277/480 Volt
System
Phase A Black Brown
Phase B Red Orange
Phase C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Gray
Ground Green Green
C. Remote Control and Signal Cables:
1. Control cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper
conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75 degree C, individual conductors
twisted together, shielded, and covered with PVC jacket; UL listed.
2. Plenum cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper
conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75 degree C, individual conductors
twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for
use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than
20 AWG for control wiring.
B. Unless indicated otherwise on the contract drawings, use 10 AWG conductor for 20
ampere, 120 volt branch ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200
feet.
C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or
cable.
D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.
16120
WIRE AND CABLE
Page 3 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time.
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the
weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
B. Plenum rated cable above ceilings shall be routed in neat and workmanship manner,
bundle cables together with cable ties and route parallel to building walls and
structure. Support bundles from walls or structure, not from equipment.
C. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring
metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or
drive rings.
D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes..
B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the
insulation value of conductor.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
E. Make splices, tape, and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without
perceptible temperature rise.
F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16120
WIRE AND CABLE
Page 4 of 4
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under applicable provisions of Division
1 and Division 16.
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer’s recommended
values.
D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify
proper phasing of all connections.
3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. All locations: Building wire in raceways.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16120 - WIRE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Furnish and install wire and cable, including:
1.Building wire.
2.Wiring connections and terminations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.NEMA WC 3 - Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
B.NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A.Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.
B.Rubber-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3.
C.Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than #6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor,
600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW, RHW.
D.Feeders and Branch Circuits #6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt
insulation, THW, THHN/THWN; smaller than #8 AWG, solid conductor.
E.Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THW,
THHN/THWN.
F.Plenum Rated Cable: Provide plenum rated cable where cable is installed exposed
in plenums.
G.Non-metallic sheathed cable with copper conductors for branch circuits as allowed.
2.2 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES
A.Connect and splice wire #8 AWG and smaller with self-insulating, wire nut
connectors.
B.Set screw type connectors are only acceptable on the load side lugs of Class I and
II switchboards, panelboards, circuit breakers, fusible switches and on individual
motor controllers.
C.Where three or more conductors larger than #8 AWG are installed in wiring gutter,
utilize a screw-type power distribution block. Utilize split-bolt mechanical
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
connector, filled and taped for smooth joint, only where specifically requested by
Contractor and approved by A/E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A.Use no wire smaller than #12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller
than #14 AWG for control wiring. Provide minimum of #12 AWG for all switch legs.
Provide neutral conductor of the same size as the phase conductors to which it is
associated.
B.Use #10 AWG conductor minimum for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer
than 100 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
C.Provide homerun conductors of continuous length without joint or splice from
overcurrent device to first outlet.
D.Provide main service and feeder conductors of continuous length without joint or
splice for their entire length.
E.Install feeders in conduit, except feeders to unit load centers may utilize NMC as
allowed. Branch circuits may use NMC as allowed by local authority.
F.Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, panelboards, switchgear, motor control
centers, wiring gutters, and other equipment using Thomas & Betts "Ty-Wraps."
G.Provide equal conductor lengths and size for all parallel circuits.
H.Support NMC per NEC.
I.Drawings indicate proposed circuiting only, and do not indicate every conductor
unless intent is unclear and further clarification is required. Provide the necessary
travelers for all three-way and four-way switches.
J.Tag each circuit in an outlet box where two or more circuits run to a single outlet as
a guide for the fixture hanger in making connections.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A.Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling
lubricant. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended tension.
B.Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from
the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been
completed.
C.Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
D.Remove and discard conductors cut too short or installed in wrong raceway. Do
not install conductors which have been removed from a raceway.
E.Do not install conductors in conduit which contains wires already in place.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A.Make taps and splices in accessible junction or outlet boxes only.
B.Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
C.Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without
perceptible temperature rise.
D.Provide joints in branch circuits only where such circuits divide. Where circuits
divide, provide one through circuit to which the branch is spliced from the circuit.
Do not leave joints in branch circuits for fixture hanger to make. Make all taps and
splices with approved type compression connector.
E.Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
F.Identify and label all conductor terminations as specified in electrical identification.
G.Properly terminate indicated conductors in equipment furnished and provide
properly sized lugs.
3.4 COLOR CODING
A.Color code all distribution systems as follows:
1.120/208V System
Phase Color
A Black
B Red
C Blue
N White
G Green
B.Provide color coding throughout the full length of all wire No. 6 and smaller.
Identification by permanent paint bands or tags at the outlets will be acceptable for
wire sizes larger than No. 6. Provide the same color and shade of color throughout
the project.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B.Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's
recommended values.
END OF SECTION
16130
BOXES
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16130 - BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of outlet, pull, and junction boxes as indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included;
1. Pull and junction boxes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide standard, stamped galvanized steel outlet boxes except as hereinafter
noted, by Steel City or approved equal.
B. Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Ground mounted concrete boxes as manufactured by Quazite, model
#PG1730 BA 12 or equal by Oldcastle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
16130
BOXES
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps,
wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.
B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless
dimensioned.
C. Locate and install boxes to allow access.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16130 - BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Furnish and install wall and ceiling outlet boxes, floor boxes, and pull and junction
boxes.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A.Provide deep type cast metal outlet boxes located in damp locations exposed to
weather or exposed areas subject to damage, complete with gasketed cover and
threaded hubs.
A. Provide outlet boxes of sufficient volume to accommodate the number of
conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, and
not less than 1 1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are required by structural
conditions and are especially approved by A/E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A.Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps,
wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.
B.Electrical box locations shown on Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned.
Verify with A/E location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to
rough-in.
C.Locate and install boxes to allow access. Provide access doors where installation
is inaccessible. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with those
specified in Division 15 - Mechanical.
D.Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
3.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A.Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit.
B.Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in
straight runs.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Identify all junction boxes by circuit number on cover with legible permanent ink
marker.
D.Provide weatherproof pull boxes or junction boxes where installed outdoors with
watertight gasketed covers fastened by means of corrosion resistant screws.
END OF SECTION
16141
WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of all wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings
and/or as specified.
B. Work included;
1. Wall switches.
2. Receptacles.
3. Device plates and box covers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for
applications indicated.
B. Provide color selection chart to the Architect for review and selection for all wiring
devices and device plates.
C. Wall Switches:
1. Snap Switches: General duty flush single pole, 20-amperes, 120/277 volts
AC, Leviton 5521 series.
16141
WIRING DEVICES
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2. Three-way Switches: General duty flush single pole, 20-ampere, 120/277 x
volts AC, Leviton 5523 series.
D. Receptacles:
1. General Duty Duplex: Flush 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type, 20-amperes, 125
volts AC with NEMA Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Leviton
16362 series.
E Device Plates and Box Covers:
1. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of
types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which
mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal
screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of
plates; wallplates colored to match wiring devices. Provide plates
possessing the following additional construction features:
Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed
device covers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of
Installation:, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project
requirements.
B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as
necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work.
C. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings.
D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas,
using jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished
areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.
F. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
H. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess
building materials, dirt, and debris.
I. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces.
16141
WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
J. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
K. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.
L. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for wiring devices.
Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors
and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A
and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.
M. The Contractor may be directed by the Architect to move a wiring device during
the rough-in stage of construction. The Contractor shall move devices at no
additional
cost if within six (6) feet of where shown on the documents.
3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES
A. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise
indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques in UL Standard
486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.
3.4 TESTING
A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-
circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to
energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirement.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Furnish and install specification grade wiring devices, including:
1.Receptacles.
2.Device plates and box covers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Furnish samples of all devices and plates before purchase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Receptacles
1.Arrow-Hart.
2.Hubbell.
3.Leviton.
4.Pass & Seymour.
B.Cover Plates: Match device manufacturer.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A.20A, 125V, 2P3W Duplex: NEMA 5-20R; standard duty.
2.2 COVER PLATES
A.Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device
covers.
B.Exposed Box Cover Plate: Stamped steel handy box covers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean and free
from excess building materials, debris, etc.
B.Align the tops of all group mounted devices. Install plumb and aligned in the plane
of the wall.
C.Provide ground fault circuit interrupting type devices in all locations requiring
weatherproof devices.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D.Feed through feature for ground fault interrupting devices may be used. Install GFI
device at each location. GFI circuit breaker will not be acceptable.
E.Mounting Heights
1.Refer to architectural drawing or contact A/E.
END OF SECTION
16160
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures as indicated on
the Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included;
1. Hinged cover enclosures.
2. Cabinets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction: NEMA Type 1or 3R as indicated.
B. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard gray enamel finish.
C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush vandal resistant latch operable by
key. Make keys interchangeable with new enclosures of the same voltage and
use.
D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel,
16160
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
Page 2 of 2
Roland
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
2.2. CABINETS
A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches wide, 10
inches deep. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white, for
mounting terminal blocks.
B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw cover front
concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in
gray baked enamel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical
components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6.
B. Provide knockouts on enclosures.
C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection
diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural
supports at each corner, minimum.
B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures.
C. Install trim plumb minimum 6'-6" from finished grade or floor to top of enclosure.
END OF SECTION
16190-A
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16190-A - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install supporting devices, including:
1. Conduit and equipment supports.
2. Fastening hardware.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with section on cast-in-
place concrete.
B. Coordinate size, shape and requirements for utility company equipment with local
utility company.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide support systems adequate for weight of equipment and conduit,
including wiring that they carry.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. B-Line.
B. Kindorf.
C. Unistrut.
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel.
B. Hardware: Galvanized or painted steel.
C. Provide epoxy or PVC coated materials for corrosive environments.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
16190-A
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building
structure using expansion anchors, beam clamps or bolts.
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum
board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry
walls; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood
construction.
C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors on new concrete structure.
E. Do not drill structural steel members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted
to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers
under all nuts.
G. Provide concrete pads and equipment bases for all outdoor equipment on grade,
floor mounted equipment, areas with floors below grade, penthouse equipment
rooms and where indicated on the plans.
H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
I. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets
and panelboards in stud walls.
J. Do not support conduit from ceiling wire supports.
K. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps or support conduits by individual hanger
wires.
L. Where multiple runs of conduit can be run grouped together, run conduit in racks
supported from the building structure. Provide for future use of rack by properly
planning routing of conduits in and through restricted areas such as through walls
and around mechanical and electrical equipment.
END OF SECTION
16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of identification for electrical equipment as shown
and/or as specified.
B. Work included;
1. Nameplates and tape labels.
2. Wire and cable markers.
3. Buried conduit markers.
4. Junction and pull box identifications.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic white letters on a black
background.
B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve, or tubing type.
C. Buried Conduit Marker: Continuous printed plastic tape.
16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws. Secure nameplate to inside
face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and
junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder
number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated
on equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings for control wiring.
3.3 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and
loads served. Letter Height: 1/4 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4
inch for distribution and control equipment identification.
3.4 BURIED CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer’s standard permanent,
bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service;
not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick.
B. Provide tape with printing of “Buried Electrical Conduit” or other similar warning.
Install directly above buried conduit 10" below finished grade.
3.5 JUNCTION AND PULL BOX IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify circuits contained within each junction and pull box with permanent
marker.
END OF SECTION
16195-A
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
SECTION 16195-A - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install items for identification of electrical products installed under
Division 16.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Provide engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplates with
white letters on a black background.
B. Wire and Cable Markers: Provide vinyl cloth markers with split sleeve or tubing
type, except in manholes provide stainless steel with plastic ties.
C. Underground Warning Tape
1. Manufactured polyethylene material and unaffected by acids and alkalies.
2. 3.5 mils thick and 6 inches wide.
3. Tensile strength of 1,750 psi lengthwise.
4. Printing on tape shall include an identification note BURIED ELECTRIC
LINE, and a caution note CAUTION. Repeat identification and caution
notes over full length of tape. Provide with black letters on a red
background conforming to APWA recommendations.
D. Panelboard Directories: Provide a circuit directory for each panelboard. Mount
circuit directory in a permanent, clear Lexan cardholder located on inside of door
on panelboard.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets. Secure
nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
16195-A
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
07/06/2016
3.2 WIRE AND CABLE LABELING
A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in splice boxes, pull boxes, and at first
load connection on homerun. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for
power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on
equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings for control wiring.
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABELING
A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment.
B. Engraved, Laminated Plastic Nameplates: ¼-inch letters, equipment
designation; 1/8-inch letters, source circuit number. Provide for:
1. Panelboards.
2. Enclosed switches, starters, circuit breakers and contactors. Provide
neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying
motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter,
service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Provide phenolic nameplate on
cover exterior to indicate motor served.
3. Transformers if identified on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
16402
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16402 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 16110 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
3. Section 16111 - Raceways and Fittings.
4. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of a complete underground electric service as shown
or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included;
1. Conduit
2. Conductors
3. Concrete
4. Ductbank
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Conduit: See Section 16111
B. Concrete: 3,000 psi with additive to give permanent red color, 3/4" maximum
aggregate size. See Section 03300.
C. Conductors: See Section 16120
16402
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Cable Lugs: Suitable for the application.
E. Drainage Assembly: Provide ½" drain assembly. Drain for each conduit.
F. Duct Spacers: Fabricated plastic, UL approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide adaptation from conduit to fiber duct.
B. Slope service to drainage point.
C. Terminate service conduit in main switchboards with grounding bushing. Make
ground connection from bushing to distribution centers ground bus.
D. Terminate service conduit at pad mounted transformer with grounding bushing.
Make ground connection from bushing to transformer housing or ground bus.
3.2 DUCTBANK
A. Place concrete so that voids around ducts are filled.
B. Provide minimum concrete thickness between ducts of 2 inches.
C. Adjust final slopes onsite to coordinate with existing utilities.
D. Install drain assembly with saddle cutouts for each conduit. Tape drain assembly
to each conduit to prevent entrance of concrete. Band drain assembly with ½"
stainless steel straps to conduit assembly to prevent mechanical displacement.
E. After installation, clean and swab ducts.
F. Install galvanized steel pullwires in spare ducts. Cap spare ducts.
3.3 SERVICE INSTALLATION
A. Provide ductbank and trench from property line to padmount transformer.
B. Adapt to rigid steel conduit encased in concrete.
END OF SECTION
16440-A
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16440-A - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install disconnect switches, including:
1. Fuses.
2. Enclosures.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 198E – Class J Fuses.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish dimensions and ratings for voltage, ampacity, horsepower and short
circuit.
B. Indicated enclosure material finish and NEMA classification type.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Disconnect Switches
1. General Electric
2. Siemens.
3. Square D.
4. Westinghouse.
B. Fuses
1. Bussman.
2. Gould-Shawmut.
3. Littlefuse.
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty; quick-make, quick-break, load
interrupter enclosed switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent
opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class J.
B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty; quick-make, quick-break, load
interrupter enclosed switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent
opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
16440-A
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Enclosures: Unless indicated otherwise, provide general purpose, NEMA 1 for
indoor locations; and weatherproof, NEMA 3R for outdoor locations; except at
cooling tower, provide NEMA 4, stainless steel.
D. General-Use Snap Switch: Motors of one HP or less as allowed by code.
E. Construct all current carrying parts of high conductivity copper with silver-plated
switch contacts.
F. Provide solid copper neutral bar where a neutral is present in the circuit.
2.3 FUSES
A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: UL 198E, Class J; as indicated on drawings; time
delay, dual element, current limiting, 600 volt.
B. Fuses Over 600 Amperes: Class L, bolt-on type with time delay and capability to
hold 500 percent rated fuse current for a minimum of four seconds and clear 20
times rated fuse current in .01-second or less. Provide fuses with ‘O’ ring seals
between end bells and glass melamine barrel similar to Bussman time delay
KRP-C.
C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
D. Provide all fuses of the same manufacturer.
E. Install fuses in motor circuits in accordance with motor manufacturer’s
recommendations.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide disconnect switches, where required by National Electrical Code, where
indicated on drawings, and where required by equipment manufacturer, in a
location convenient for maintenance on each switch and adjacent equipment.
B. Provide fused disconnect switches when required to maintain equipment
manufacturer’s warranty. Coordinate with Division 15 for warranty requirements
of equipment approved by submittal.
C. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Provide permanent marking inside
switch enclosure for fuse type.
D. Wall mount switches, where possible, or mount on Uni-Strut supports.
E. Provide fuse identification label showing type and size inside door of each switch.
END OF SECTION
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 16111 - Raceways and Fittings.
2. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of electrical systems grounding as shown or indicated
on the Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included:
1. Power system grounding.
2. Communication system grounding.
3. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval:
1. Material list of items proposed to be provided as part of the work of this
section.
2. Proposed method of grounding, including drawings indicating location and
sizes of grounding materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide electrical grounding system indicated with assembly of materials, including
but not limited to:
1. Wires and cables.
2. Connectors.
3. Terminals.
4. Ground rods.
5. Bonding jumper braid.
6. Surge arrestors.
B. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with
NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated.
C. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4" diameter, minimum length 8 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC,
with NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended
functions.
B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits.
Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing.
C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable
ground clamp. Make connections to flanged opening at street side of flange.
Provide bonding jumper around water meter.
D. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod in main service
equipment areas.
E. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding
conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board.
F. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company’s metering equipment in
accordance with Section 16420.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness
and proper installation.
B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to
convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment.
Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms.
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
END OF SECTION
16461
TRANSFORMERS
Page 1 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16461 - TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding.
2. Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of power transformers as shown or indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included:
1. Dry type transformers. (Primary less than 600 volts.).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
1.5 SUBMITTAL
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided as part of the work of the
section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements.
16461
TRANSFORMERS
Page 2 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved
will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The transformers shall be manufactured by the following:
1. Square D Company
2. General Electric
3. Jefferson
4. Cutler- Hammer
5. Approved Equal
B. All transformers shall be new and manufactured by the same company.
2.2 DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS (PRIMARY LESS THAN 600 VOLTS)
A. Dry-Type Transformers: ANSI/NEMA ST20; factory-assembled, air cooled dry type
transformers; ratings as scheduled on the Drawings. Transformers shall conform
with ANSI C89.2 and NEMA ST20 standards and Underwriters Laboratories Listing
UL506.
B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows:
KVA Rating
Insulation Class Rise
(degree c)
1-15 Class F UL185C [115c.]
30-500 Class H UL220C [150c.]
C. Maximum case temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40
Degree C. ambient at its warmest point.
D. Winding Taps 25 KVA and Smaller: ANSI/NEMA ST 20. Primary windings shall
have 4 taps; two 2-1/2% increments above full-rated voltage and two 2-1/2%
increments below full rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operations.
E. Winding Taps 25 KVA and Larger: ANSI/NEMA ST 20. Primary windings shall
have 6 taps; two 1-1/2% increments above full-rated voltage and four 2-1/2%
increments below full-rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operation.
F. Sound Levels: Guaranteed sound ratings hall no exceed ANSI standard decibel
16461
TRANSFORMERS
Page 3 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
levels.
G. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV for transformers less than 300 KVA, 30 KV for
transformers 300 KVA and larger.
H. Enclosures:
1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable
for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or
brackets.
2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose.
3. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
I. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
Transformers 30 KVA and larger shall have core and core assembly completely
isolated from enclosure with neoprene rubber pads.
J. Transformers shall have heat barriered termination compartment arranged for
feeder terminations for side or bottom entrance of flexible metallic raceways.
K. Transformers shall have a bonding jumper installed between the secondary neutral
terminal and the metal case and shall include a ground terminal of proper size to
receive ground conductor.
L. The transformer impedance shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Coordinate
with loadside power distribution equipment manufacturer and verify that the
maximum transformer short circuit current availability from the transformer does
not exceed loadside equipment short circuit ratings. Report discrepancies to the
Engineer. Revise transformer impedance (if required) at no additional cost to
Owner.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. All associated conductors and/or cables exiting from conduit or cable shall be
bundled with ties, similar to the T&B conductor markers.
B. All individual conductors shall be identified at their termination by a wraparound
type of identification similar to T&B conductor markers.
C. All terminal blocks and terminals in the switchgear and control cabinets shall have
identification similar to the conductor groups mentioned above.
D. The identification of conductors, cables, and conduit shall conform to that set forth
in their respective schedules.
16461
TRANSFORMERS
Page 4 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards. Install in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Coordinate transformer installation work with electrical raceway and wire/cable
work, as necessary for proper interface.
C. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent
and effective ground.
D. Set transformer plumb and level. Install vibration isolation pads for all
transformers.
E. Adjust taps to provide rated secondary voltage as close as practicable and as
required to accommodate owners requirements.
F. Field modify transformer pad, primary and secondary conduit locations and
switchgear interface as required to accommodate new transformers. All
modifications shall be in accordance with existing equipment manufacturers
recommendations and requirements.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
A. Within 5 days after delivery to the work site and prior to installation perform the
following field tests and inspections:
1. Compare transformer and accessories nameplate information with the
specification and report discrepancies.
2. Inspect transformer and accessories and report installation or shipping
damage, loose material, shipping blocks or contamination that must be
corrected.
3. Check operation of doors and access covers. Report deficiencies.
4. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Check pressure relief, fault pressure, temperature
meters for functional operation. Report deficiencies.
5. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Take an insulating liquid sample, test dielectric,
and water content. Record values and report deficiencies.
6. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Remove access covers and report any damage or
loose materials inside of tank 1 enclosure that must be corrected.
16461
TRANSFORMERS
Page 5 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
7. Move no-load tap changer through all positions and test turns-ratio on each
point. Record values and report deficiencies.
8. Units with Primaries Rated Greater than 1000 Volts: Power Factor test
transformer bushings, record values and report unfavorable conditions.
9. Dry Type Units: Check air filters and air circulation for proper operation,
correct deficiencies.
B. Repairs and Replacements:
1. In event of damage or deficiencies promptly make replacement and repairs
to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Promptly remove damaged and unsuitable transformers from the job site,
and promptly replace with equipment meeting the specified requirements, at
no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not
be considered as a means to justify and extension in the Contract Time of
Completion.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer.
B. Check transformer for level, security to foundation and operation of doors. Correct
deficiencies.
C. Check the equipment ground bus and straps. Correct deficiencies.
D. Make necessary tap adjustments on transformers to insure that the secondary
voltages at the transformer terminals will be as close as possible to design voltage
when the building is in normal operation.
END OF SECTION
16470-A
PANELBOARDS
Page 1 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16470-A - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install distribution and lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboards.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Include outline and support point dimensions, NEMA enclosure type, voltage, main
bus ampacity and material, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker
arrangement and sizes.
1.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish two keys to Owner for each panelboard, all keyed alike.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cutler-Hammer.
B. General Electric.
C. Siemens.
D. Square D.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Conform to UL standards and bear UL label. Form cabinets from code gauge
galvanized steel. Form fronts of code gauge cold rolled steel bonderized after
fabrication.
B. Provide cabinet fronts with concealed hinges, concealed adjustment means and
master keyed flush lock. Provide weatherproof panel for outside installation.
C. Provide with main lugs and breakers or fuses as scheduled on Drawings. Provide
main lug connection to accommodate T & B compression connector on end of
cable. Attach connector to panel bus with two bolts per lug. Provide captive type
bolts or studs to facilitate reinstallation of the lugs with the wire attached.
16470-A
PANELBOARDS
Page 2 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Provide all panelboards with copper bus of the ratings scheduled and designed for
all indicated devices and spaces, complete with taps and trim.
E. Minimum integrated short circuit rating 10,000 amps RMS symmetrical for 240 volt
panelboards; or as shown on Drawings. Integrated ratings may be based on tested
series ratings in conjunction with feeder breaker actually used.
F. Size bus bars to limit the temperature rise within the panelboard to 50 degrees C
over a 40 degrees C ambient temperature.
G. Provide adequate space and provisions for wire #6 AWG and larger conductors to
terminate with compression type connector to main lugs.
2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting Branch Circuit Panelboards: Circuit breaker type for all common area
panels.
B. Enclosure: outside installation type; unless indicated otherwise.
C. Provide insulated neutral bus and separate copper grounding bus bonded to
enclosure.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip branch circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed
as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide non-automatic breakers as main device
in living unit panels. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers
where scheduled.
E. Sequence phase all adjacent breakers. All circuit breaker connection straps shall
be rated at 100 amperes minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb and flush with wall finishes, in conformance with NEMA
PB 1.1. Mount securely to walls or structural spaces.
B. Height: Install wall mounted panelboards at 6 feet to the top of the enclosure.
C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
D. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard mounted in
permanent, clear Lexan card holder located on inside of door. Prepare directories
only after permanent room numbers have been assigned. Do not use room
numbers shown on Drawings.
16470-A
PANELBOARDS
Page 3 of 3
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
E. Stub one empty 1 inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling out of each
recessed panelboard.
F. Arrange branch circuit connections in three phase lighting and appliance
panelboards such that when two or three circuits are run with a common neutral,
each circuit is connected to a different phase.
G. Distribute loading on circuits in panelboards to balance the load as evenly as
possible in each phase.
H. Terminate only one conductor under each lug of branch circuit breakers.
I. Do not make splices or taps in panelboard gutters.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check
proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers.
END OF SECTION
16471
PANELBOARDS
Page 1 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16471 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of electrical panelboards as shown or indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work included:
1. Power distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following:
1. Square D Company
2. General Electric
16471
PANELBOARDS
Page 2 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Siemens
2.2 PANELBOARDS (GENERAL)
A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and shall be so
labeled, rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled.
B. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gage sheet steel having steel doors and
trim to conform to the cabinet mounting. The trim on cabinets shall be made
adjustable with the door. Door shall be mounted with heavy concealed hinges.
C. Cabinets shall have wiring space top, bottom, and both sides in accordance with
the National Electrical Code, but no less than 4-inches wide, with standard
knockouts.
D. Provide a clear plastic covered typed directory card and card holder on the inside
of each door. Key locks alike and provide Owner with not less than 5 keys. Finish
shall be gray enamel over a rust inhibitor, except cans may be galvanized.
E. Multi section panels shall be same height and depth.
F. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled, consisting of rigid frame
supporting the rectangular bus, mains, neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be
sized in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standards, braced throughout
to conform with industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards,
and arranged for sequence phasing throughout.
G. Phase bussing shall be full height copper without reduction, full size neutral, unless
otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral
connection.
H. Terminals for feeder conductors, branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL
listed as suitable for type of conductors specified.
I. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed,
replaced, or additional circuits added without disturbing adjacent units and without
machining, drilling, or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure
be less than 20-inches.
J. Enclosures:
1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable
for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or
16471
PANELBOARDS
Page 3 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
brackets.
2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose.
3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R.
4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with
panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with
arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors
approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than
98% conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral
bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections.
B. Provide bolt-in type heavy duty molded-case main and branch circuit-breaker types
for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-
pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will
trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding
bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same
manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards.
C. On Multi section and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section
shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the
feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground
bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus
bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable.
2.4 LIGHTING AND BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated,
with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and
arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors
approved for copper conductors.
B. Equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt-in type heavy-duty,
quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit-breakers, with toggle handles that
indicate when tripped. Interrupting rating shall be in excess of the available fault
current at the panel in accordance with UL listing for sizes involved, but no less
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
C. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide
16471
PANELBOARDS
Page 4 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select
enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly
with panelboard.
D. On multisection and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section
shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the
feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground
bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus
bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable.
2.5 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall be molded case, capacity as indicated,
in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be quick-
make, quick-break thermal magnetic common trip type, ambient compensated with
trip-free handle and have interrupting rating in accordance with UL listings for sizes
required, but not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and conform to
requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1-1969. Each unit shall have
insulated neutral and/or ground terminal of proper size, where indicated. Lugs
shall be UL listed for copper cables.
B. Enclosures:
1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable
for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or
brackets.
2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose.
3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R.
C. Circuit breakers shall be of same manufacturer as panelboards.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Square D, General Electric, Siemens.
2.6 PANELBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited
to, circuit-breakers, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by
panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
16471
PANELBOARDS
Page 5 of 5
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and
NECA’S “Standard of Installation”, and in compliance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway
installation work.
C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically secure.
D. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures.
E. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating
loads controlled by each circuit.
F. Install wall mounted panelboards a maximum of 6 feet 6 inches above finish floor
to top of panel.
END OF SECTION
16485
CONTACTORS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16485 - CONTACTORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for
or incidental to the installation of contactors as shown or indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work Included:
1. Lighting contactors.
2. Enclosures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for such materials,
provide only materials bearing the UL label.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. The contactors shall be Cutler-Hammer or approved equal as manufactured by
Square D Company or General Electric Company.
2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2: electrically held, 2 wire control.
B. Coil Operating Voltages: 120/277 or 480 volts, 60 Hertz.
C. Contacts: As indicated on drawings.
16485
CONTACTORS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
D. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6: Type 3R.
E. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
16485-A
CONTACTORS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16485-A - CONTACTORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish written verification that contactor type is compatible with all controlling
devices.
B. Indicate enclosure material finish and NEMA classification type.
C. Provide operation and maintenance manual.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Allen-Bradley.
B. ASCO.
C. General Electric.
D. Square D.
2.2 ELECTRICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
A. Electrically held for two-wire control.
B. Encapsulate coils and rate for continuous duty.
2.3 MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
A. Mechanically held for three-wire control.
B. Encapsulate coils and internally wire to prevent continuous operation.
2.4 GENERAL
A. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 hertz with cover mounted H.O.A. switch.
B. Contacts: Provide the number of contacts for the control functions indicated plus
two additional contacts, field convertible to normally open or normally closed
contacts.
C. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals.
16485-A
CONTACTORS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Provide single pole double throw momentary switches controlling mechanically
held contactors where switches are shown on Drawings controlling contactors.
C. Coordinate controlling devices such as time clocks and photocells with contactor
furnished for compatible system.
D. Identify with nameplate. Label each circuit controlled.
END OF SECTION
16491
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16491 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s
Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following;
1. Division 15- Controls and Instrumentation.
2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
3. Section 16483 - Motor Service.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work Included:
1. Service Entrance Rated Disconnect.
2. Circuit disconnects.
3. Motor disconnects.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following:
1. Siemens.
2. General Electric.
3. Square D Company.
16491
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches,
of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 600 volts, and
incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch
blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle
which is padlockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-
conductivity copper. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters’ Laboratory Label.
B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Two pole toggle switch in NEMA type/or 3R
enclosure as indicated.
C. Three Phase Motor Disconnect Switches: Three pole heavy duty 600 volt as
required in NEMA Type 1 or 3R enclosures as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated complying with
manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and
NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices.
END OF SECTION
16503
POLES AND STANDARDS
Page 1 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16503 - POLES AND STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's
specifications and drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 09910 - Painting.
3 Section 16450 - Grounding.
4. Section 16530 - Site Lighting.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for
or incidental to the installation of poles and standards as shown or indicated on
the Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work Included:
1. Concrete bases and base reinforcement.
2. Anchor bolts.
3. Painting.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide poles and standards as specified on the lighting fixture schedule or an
approved equal.
16503
POLES AND STANDARDS
Page 2 of 2
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
2.2 POLES
A. Configuration: As Specified of fixture schedule.
B. Handhole: Complete with removable weatherproof cover installed 18 inches
above bottom of pole.
C. Finish: Factory painted.
2.3 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Provide four anchor bolts per pole; complete with flat washers, lock washers, and
hexagonal nuts for each pole. (All items to be hot-dipped galvanized.)
B. Provide template for positioning of anchor bolts.
C. Provide anchor bolt covers painted to match pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 BASES
A. Construct as indicated on the structural contract drawings.
B. Install anchor bolts with 2 inch projection above top of bases unless indicated
otherwise on the contract drawings.
C. Bases shall extend beyond Anchor base cover a minimum of 2” on all sides.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount standards on bases plumb and true, utilizing shims as necessary.
B. Touch-up chips and scratches on poles upon completion.
END OF SECTION
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16505 - LIGHTING FIXTURES - BUILDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Furnish and install light fixtures associated with building, including:
1.Interior luminaires and accessories.
2.Lamps.
3.Ballasts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Include product data for fixtures, including photometric data, reflectance, lens,
lamps, ballasts, poles and lighting control.
B.Furnish samples to A/E for approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Lighting Fixtures
1.Manufacturers of individual lighting fixtures shall be as scheduled on
Drawings, and indicate quality and design features required.
2.Products of other manufacturers will be considered upon submittal of proper
data.
2.2 GENERAL
A.Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type and rating indicated, complete with lamps,
lampholders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring and accessories.
B.Where fixtures are recessed mounted in ceiling system, provide trim and
accessories required for installation in the ceiling system installed.
C.It is the intent of Drawings and Specifications to indicate the type of fixture for each
intended use. It is generally intended that rooms of similar usage and configuration
will have similar fixture types. Where fixture type is not indicated, it is the duty of
the Contractor to request clarification prior to proceeding with the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.Support surface-mounted luminaires to ceiling using bolts, screws, or approved
clips.
B.Install recessed luminaires with proper frames in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C.Support pendant or bracket fixtures as indicated and as recommended by
manufacturer for job conditions encountered.
D.Connect photocell into system to signal darkness and timeclock to de-energize
system at a preset time.
E.Install lamps in luminaires and lampholders.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Coordinate receipt and installation of all fixtures with regard to the overall schedule
of the project.
B.Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. Clean paint
splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires.
C.Demonstrate proper operation of all luminaires and controls.
D.Refer to Section 16010 regarding lamp replacement prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
16510
SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 1 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
SECTION 16510 – SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 16.
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's
specifications and drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Section 16120 - Wires and Cables.
2. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
3. Section 16501 - Lamps.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for
or incidental to the installation of lighting fixtures as shown or indicated on the
Drawings and/or as specified.
B. Work Included:
1. High intensity discharge lighting fixtures.
2. LED lighting fixtures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that
materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide lighting fixtures of the types specified on the Drawings or an approved
equal.
16510
SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
B. ELECTRICAL STEEL DEVICES
Stainless steel materials shall be used for all fasteners, latches, hinges, and
threaded devices. All stainless steel shall be clear thermoset polymer coated.
C. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Branch circuits for each lighting structure shall be provided that includes the
following:
1. Disconnect –Disconnect Switch.
2. Landing lugs for the feeder circuit as part of the disconnecting device.
3. Fuse block for individual fusing each load carrying conductor of each
lamp circuit. (Neutral conductors are not fused).
4. Manufacturer shall provide all branch circuits completed from the
disconnecting device to the lamp with either plug-in or landing lug
connections provided for completion of circuits during the field
installation. This is to assure that the electrical equipment on the pole is
in conformance with UL standards.
5. Wire harness shall be provided with:
(a) Uniformly wound conductors to avoid excessive stress on any
individual conductors.
(b) Mylar wrapped wire harness to prevent unraveling of the conductors.
(c) Kellum grips attached and tied for mounting the wires inside the pole.
(d) Plug-in connections for each end of the wire harness to connect it to
the electrical component enclosure near the base of the pole and to
the lamps at the top of the pole to assure proper matching of circuits.
6. Assembly and wiring of the fixtures to a plug-in connection is to be
completed by the manufacturer who is to provide a warranty of the entire
assembly. Manufacturer shall provide a schematic of the wiring on the
inside of the door of the electrical component enclosure.
7. Grounding of the electrical system and the equipment shall be provided
throughout the pole structure for connection to ground rods and feeder
circuit ground wires.
16510
SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
8. Mounting of the NEMA 3R enclosure containing all electrical components,
except the lamps, shall be near the base of the pole with the bottom of
the enclosure 8 feet above the ground to allow the step ladder
maintenance access.
9. UL (Underwriter Laboratories) listing report shall be provided for the
entire base and pole assembly and its included electrical systems in
addition to the use of UL listed components within the system.
2.2 H.I.D. SPORTS LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. The lighting system shall consist of steel poles with 1500 watt metal halide
fixtures pre-wired and pre-aimed. The fixture configuration shall be indicated on
the luminaire / Pole schedule.
B. Lighting Performance: Guaranteed maintained illumination levels as
measured by a light meter on a horizontal plane shall be as follows:
Baseball : 50 fc infield, 30 fc outfield Constant Illumination.
Soccer Area: 30fc. Constant Illumination
C. Uniformity shall be a minimum of 2 to 1 on the infield and 2.5 to 1 on the outfield
for the Baseball fields. Uniformities shall be a minimum of 2 to 1 on the Soccer
Fields.
D. Bidders shall supply computer generated point-by-point light scans based on
155,000 lumens per lamp showing both initial and maintained footcandle levels
on lighting systems that depreciate and a scan showing the target values on
lighting systems that provide Constant Illumination.
E. A Recoverable LLF of 0.70 shall be used on systems that do not provide
Constant Illumination.
Initial illumination levels as measured by a light meter on a horizontal plane shall
be as follows for these systems:
F. All lighting manufacturer’s must submit an independent report by a third
party licensed engineer that documents independent testing of an installed
system that uses the same type of equipment proposed for this project.
This test should outline the computer predicted target light levels along
with actual, verified light levels tested at various time intervals during the
proposed life of the lamp. The report shall clearly identify light loss factors
used and state if the predicted light levels were met until the end of the
published lamp life.
G. There shall be an individual ballast for each fixture, the ballast shall be located
remote from the luminaire crossarm and shall be approx. 12 feet above final
16510
SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 4 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
grade. Ballast box must be a NEMA 3R enclosure.
H. Structural steel
1. Luminaire shall be designed to withstand wind forces of 150 mph without
damage or misalignment to assembly. Luminaires shall be constructed
with a die-cast aluminum housing to protect the luminaire reflector
system. Alternative systems that provide spun aluminum reflectors must
have a protective hail shroud.
2. Strength of the materials used in the structures shall be calculated based
upon AASHTO Pole Structure Criteria.
3. Foundation design criteria are to be based upon BROMS Standards
using a safety factor of 3. (Alternate UBC)
4. Galvanize by hot-dipping processing to ASTM-123 standards shall be
used for a pole, crossarms, braces, boxes, hubs, or any extensions
attached to the pole.
5. Poles and foundations shall be designed to meet 2012 IBC, Table
1804.2-I-A and 110 mph wind zone.
I. Foundations
1. Base is to be formed with concrete that obtains 9500 PSI strength and
contains pre-stressed steel cable that is stressed to 28,910 lbs. (which
shall be 70% of the ultimate yield strength of the cable).
2. Foundation Drawings: Project specific foundation drawings stamped by a
registered engineer in the state where the project is located are required.
The foundation drawings must list the moment, shear (horizontal) force,
and axial (vertical) force at ground level for each pole.
J. Life Cycle Costs
1. Complete Lamp Replacement: Manufacturer shall include all group lamp
replacements required to provide 25 years of operation based upon 500
usage hours per year.
2. Preventative and Spot Maintenance: Manufacturer shall provide all
preventative and spot maintenance, including parts and labor for 25 years
from the date of equipment shipment. Individual lamp outages shall be
repaired when the usage of any field is materially impacted. Owner
agrees to check fuses in the event of a luminaire outage.
16510
SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 5 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
3. Remote Monitoring System: System shall monitor lighting performance
and notify manufacturer if individual luminaire outage is detected so that
appropriate maintenance can be scheduled. The manufacturer shall notify
the owner of outages within 24 hours, or the next business day. The
controller shall determine switch position (Manual or Auto) and contactor
status (open or closed).
4. Remote Lighting Control System: System shall allow owner and users
with a security code to schedule on/off system operation via a web site,
phone, fax or email up to ten years in advance. Manufacturer shall
provide and maintain a two-way TCP/IP communication link. Trained staff
shall be available 24/7 to provide scheduling support and assist with
reporting needs.
The owner may assign various security levels to schedulers by function
and/or fields. This function must be flexible to allow a range of privileges
such as full scheduling capabilities for all fields, to only having permission
to execute “early off” commands by phone.
Controller shall accept and store 7-day schedules, be protected against
memory loss during power outages, and shall reboot once power is
regained and execute any commands that would have occurred during
outage.
5. Management Tools: Manufacturer shall provide a web-based database of
actual field usage and provide reports by facility and user group.
6. Communication Costs: Manufacturer shall include communication costs
for operating the controls and monitoring system for a period of 25 years.
K. WARRANTY
25-Year Warranty: Each manufacturer shall supply a signed warranty covering
the entire system for 25 years. Warranty shall guarantee light levels; lamp
replacements; system energy consumption; monitoring, maintenance and control
services, and structural integrity. Manufacturer shall maintain specifically-funded
financial reserves to assure fulfillment of the warranty for the full term. Warranty
may exclude fuses, storm damage, vandalism, abuse and unauthorized repairs
or alterations
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUPPORTS
A. Refer to Section 16190.
B. Install fixtures on lighting cross-arm as recommended by manufacturer.
16510
SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 6 of 6
Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex
B000399.001
11/15/17
C. Aim fixtures as per manufacturer’s point-by-point aiming diagram to achieve
50FC infield and 30FC outfield as a minimum, and 30FC as a minimum on
soccer and football areas.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Illumination Measurements: Upon substantial completion of the project and in the
presence of the Contractor, Project Engineer, Owner's Representative, and
Manufacturer's Representative, illumination measurements shall be taken and
verified. The illumination measurements shall be conducted in accordance with
IESNA RP-6-01, Appendix B.
END OF SECTION